IntroductionWelcome| 00:00 | Welcome to CorelDRAW X4 Essential Training.
| | 00:02 | I'm David Rivers.
| | 00:04 | You know CorelDRAW and I go way back to the
late nineties, when I was first introduced
| | 00:09 | to this powerful yet easy to use graphics application.
| | 00:12 | In my role as a training specialist at that time, I was required
to learn this program inside and out, as well as the competition.
| | 00:20 | Well, since then CorelDRAW has continued to be
equally or more powerful than it's competitors,
| | 00:25 | yet much easier to use and of course very easy to learn.
| | 00:29 | This latest rendition X4 is no exception
and we have a lot to cover in this title.
| | 00:34 | By the end though, you are going to feel like you have
got at least an intermediate level of understanding
| | 00:38 | of CorelDRAW and the other applications in the suite.
| | 00:42 | So, let's talk about what we're going to do in this title.
| | 00:45 | One thing you will need to understand
when working with an application
| | 00:48 | like CorelDRAW is the difference
between a vector and a bitmap image.
| | 00:52 | We'll be working with both. By the end you will
understand the differences and how to work with each.
| | 00:58 | Introduction or overview of what is new and
enhanced in CorelDRAW, right off the top
| | 01:04 | and then as we move through the different movies in this title,
we'll work extensively with those new and enhanced features.
| | 01:11 | We're going to look at some drawing basics to get you comfortable
in CorelDRAW and then we'll be working extensively with objects,
| | 01:18 | creating objects, manipulating and modifying objects
as well as working with multiple objects on a page.
| | 01:25 | We'll be working with layers as well to stay organized,
creating them, modifying and manipulating those layers.
| | 01:32 | We're going to be working with text and pages. It's
interesting about CorelDRAW, you can work with multiple pages
| | 01:38 | in a single file. One of the key defining features of CorelDRAW.
| | 01:43 | Working with color is something that we'll
do quite extensively in this title as well.
| | 01:48 | There is a ton of special tools and special effects, we're
going to try and look at as many as we can in this title.
| | 01:54 | Working with our objects, using some of the special
tools to modify those objects and add some cool effects.
| | 02:01 | We'll be sharing your work with others.
| | 02:02 | That's something that's very important, whether you are going
to be collaborating with others on a project or if you need
| | 02:08 | to deliver your work to a professional print house, for
example, how do you get that ready to share with others?
| | 02:14 | We'll be talking about that in this title and we'll also
be looking at some of the other applications in this suite
| | 02:19 | for converting your images, tracing,
photo editing and a whole lot more.
| | 02:26 | Now, if you are a Premium subscriber or you've purchased
this title on disk you will also have access to all
| | 02:31 | of the exercise files that I will be
using throughout the upcoming lessons.
| | 02:35 | If you do not have access to the exercise
files, I would not worry too much about that.
| | 02:39 | You can learn an awful lot just by watching.
| | 02:42 | So, without further delay, let's get started.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
1. Getting StartedThe Welcome screen| 00:00 | Alright, in this first chapter, we're going to get you
started with CorelDRAW X4 and that means in this first lesson
| | 00:06 | of the chapter, we'll be launching the application
and exploring the welcome screen that greets you.
| | 00:12 | After that we'll talk about what is new or enhanced in CorelDRAW
X4, get a good overview before we start using those tools
| | 00:18 | as we move through the other lessons in this title.
| | 00:21 | Then we'll open up a file, so we can tour the new user
interface. There are few changes you need to know about.
| | 00:28 | After that, we'll talk about vector and bitmap images.
| | 00:31 | It's really important you understand the differences
between those two types of images and their advantages,
| | 00:37 | disadvantages and how to work with each in CorelDRAW.
| | 00:40 | After that, we'll be creating a brand new file from scratch and
then compare that to the next lesson, where we create a new file
| | 00:47 | by using one of the many templates you
have at your disposal here in CorelDRAW X4.
| | 00:51 | The last lesson in this chapter will
be all about saving your work.
| | 00:57 | Very important, that when you put a lot of time and
energy into a project, you know how to save it properly.
| | 01:03 | But right now, we can't do any of that until we
launch the application so here I'm on my desktop.
| | 01:07 | I'm going to go down to my Start button down here
on the bottom left corner and give it a click.
| | 01:12 | By default, there is no shortcut icon on your desktop.
| | 01:16 | That's not created during the installation
process. Of course in Windows,
| | 01:19 | there are ways to create your own
shortcuts if you wanted to do that.
| | 01:23 | Now, you can see here from my most Recently Used list that
CorelDRAW X4 is one of my most recently used applications,
| | 01:30 | but if you have never used it before, it will not show up here.
| | 01:33 | So, you've got two other options.
| | 01:35 | One is to go down to All Programs, just hover over All
Programs, you don't even need to click on it and it will expand
| | 01:41 | to show you all of your folders including
CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X4 and when you click
| | 01:46 | on that folder it opens it up to
display the applications in the suite.
| | 01:50 | Notice that some of mine are highlighted and some are not.
| | 01:54 | The ones that are highlighted are the ones I still haven't used.
| | 01:57 | The ones that are not highlighted, I have used
before like CorelDRAW X4, there it is right there.
| | 02:03 | Now, if you have ever seen any of my other titles,
| | 02:05 | you know my favorite way to find an application is
just to come down here to the Start Search field.
| | 02:11 | Instead of browsing through folders and
lists, just come down here type in Corel,
| | 02:15 | for example and you will see all the Corel programs, the history,
you will see the files you have used that have Corel in them.
| | 02:22 | But, right at the top here under
Programs is CorelDRAW X4, how about that?
| | 02:26 | So, all I have to do is click on it to launch the application.
| | 02:30 | So, this is going to launch CorelDRAW X4.
| | 02:32 | If this is your first time, you will see the welcome screen.
| | 02:36 | This is not my first time, but I still see the welcome
screen because I have left the check box selected down below
| | 02:42 | that Always shows the Welcome screen at launch.
| | 02:45 | Now, the only difference is the very
first time I launched CorelDRAW X4,
| | 02:49 | my welcome screen was not in the Quick Start section.
| | 02:53 | Notice over here on the right hand side, I have got some tabs,
Quick Start, What's New, Learning tools, a Gallery and Updates.
| | 03:00 | So, I can go to those sections just by clicking the tab.
| | 03:03 | Now, if this is your first time launching the application,
| | 03:06 | you do not see this Quick Start screen,
what you see is the Welcome Screen.
| | 03:11 | So, I'm going to click Welcome right up here under Quick Start,
closes up the booklet, it's kind of like an electronic version
| | 03:17 | of a booklet and you can see here, it does say Welcome across
the top and down below, I have got access to Quick Start,
| | 03:24 | What's new, Learning tools, Gallery and Updates.
| | 03:27 | All those tabs that we still see
over here on the right hand side.
| | 03:31 | Now, the difference is, when I hover over these like
Quick Start, look over here on the right hand side.
| | 03:35 | When I hover over Quick Start without clicking on it, it
does say, this is where I go to Quickly perform basic task
| | 03:41 | like opening an existing document, starting a
brand new one from a blank page or from a template.
| | 03:47 | As I move down to What's New without clicking on
that, here is what I got to wee what's new in X4.
| | 03:52 | You see examples of how you can use the new features.
| | 03:55 | You have got some Learning tools as well.
| | 03:57 | So, you can get access to them by clicking
Learning tools here or the Learning tools tab.
| | 04:01 | There is a gallery where you can see some inspiring
projects created with CorelDRAW Graphics Suite.
| | 04:06 | There are a couple of links to websites that will
give you a cool idea of what you can do with DRAW X4
| | 04:11 | and then of course there is Updates down below where
you can choose to receive messages, about any updates,
| | 04:17 | new tutorials or any other content for that matter.
| | 04:20 | Notice right here too, there is a little
button that allows you to get a Workspace tour.
| | 04:25 | Now, we're going to be doing that as we move through this
chapter, but you could go right to this little link here
| | 04:30 | to get a tour of the new user interface and it will
show you how to use the basic tools and features,
| | 04:36 | give you a little bit of inside too
from design professionals, kind of neat.
| | 04:39 | Well, let's go to Quick Start and give it a click.
| | 04:42 | So, that opens up that section, you can
see how it's flipped open like a booklet.
| | 04:46 | Quick Start is the tab that you see here.
| | 04:48 | From this screen, if you choose to Always have the Welcome screen
launch, whenever you launch CorelDRAW X4, well, right away,
| | 04:58 | you can see you can do everything
possible like open up recent files
| | 05:02 | that you have worked on, they are listed here under Open Recent.
| | 05:04 | If this is your first time, you won't
see anything here under Open Recent.
| | 05:09 | You have also got a button to Open any
other file that you maybe haven't worked
| | 05:13 | on in a while, it doesn't show up on the recent list.
| | 05:15 | You can create a New blank document or create a New one by
getting a head start, using one of the templates right from here.
| | 05:22 | So, pretty much anything you need to do in CorelDRAW can be
done from this Quick Start section of your welcome screen.
| | 05:28 | Now, if you want to move on to another tab,
you just click the tab over here on the right.
| | 05:32 | Let's go to Learning tools and when I
click on that, notice the other two flip
| | 05:35 | over to the left hand side, just like I have flipped open a book.
| | 05:38 | Over here I have got Video tutorials, something called
CorelTUTOR, it has been around for a long time so,
| | 05:44 | you can get some great tutorials online using CorelTUTOR.
| | 05:48 | Insights from the experts, that's kind of need
depending on how you are going to be using CorelDRAW.
| | 05:53 | There maybe experts out there who have
already done what you are hoping to do.
| | 05:56 | So instead of re-inventing the wheel, check out their insights.
| | 05:59 | There's Tips and tricks and a link to a history.
| | 06:02 | So, there's more resources that are available
online obviously and they are updated periodically.
| | 06:08 | See that information right there.
| | 06:10 | If we go over to the Gallery, here is
where you will see some links to --
| | 06:15 | for example, Igorstshirts.topblogspot.com, some cool graphics.
| | 06:20 | Every time you open this up it is
going show you something different.
| | 06:23 | When I go back to Quick Start for
example and come down to the Gallery,
| | 06:27 | you can see I have got a couple of
different samples showing up here.
| | 06:30 | So, every time you come back to this section
it just changes up and then it gives you some,
| | 06:35 | maybe inspiration for different kinds
of things you can do with CorelDRAW.
| | 06:39 | I think this is really cool, looks very
realistic, but all created in CorelDRAW.
| | 06:44 | Notice, there is a link here to cdwgraphics.com and you
can click that link, it will launch your default browser,
| | 06:50 | take you right there to get some more inspiration.
| | 06:53 | The last tab is the Updates tab and you
can see here, you can get some News.
| | 06:58 | Visit the CorelDRAW.com Community,
so there are others using CorelDRAW
| | 07:02 | that you can ask questions and get
some inspiration form them as well.
| | 07:07 | You can also Sign up for the Graphics By
Design newsletter by clicking this link.
| | 07:11 | So, lots of options to help you get
comfortable, become an expert using CorelDRAW.
| | 07:16 | Now, the one tab I have not clicked on yet is the What's New tab
and that is where we're going to go in the next lesson to talk
| | 07:24 | about what's new or enhanced here in CorelDRAW X4.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| New and enhanced features in CorelDRAW X4| 00:00 | If you were following along in the previous lesson,
we started a tour of our new welcome screen,
| | 00:05 | and we now know it's set up like a booklet, and one
of the tabs we can access is the What's New tab,
| | 00:12 | and that's where we're going to go in this lesson to
talk about the new and enhanced features of CorelDRAW X4.
| | 00:17 | As we move through the movies in this title, we'll
be using some of those new or enhanced features.
| | 00:24 | So, let's click What's New right now.
| | 00:26 | You might be thinking, hey, I closed up my
welcome screen, I went to the top right corner
| | 00:30 | and clicked the close button, how do I get that back?
| | 00:33 | Well, here in draw you will notice there is a
button here on the Toolbar that we'll be talking
| | 00:38 | about when we tour the user interface and as I
hover over it, you can see it says, Welcome screen.
| | 00:42 | I can always go back to the welcome screen at any time by
clicking this button, even if the welcome screen doesn't launch
| | 00:49 | by default every time I launch CorelDRAW, and
now we're going to go over the What's New tab.
| | 00:55 | Now under What's New, you can see those three sections
Layout and text editing, Design assets and Workflow.
| | 01:02 | Each of these has a description down below of some of the
content in those sections, so I can go directly to a section,
| | 01:10 | Layout and text editing or I can click
this little navigation button down here.
| | 01:14 | This button is pointing to the right,
because I'm on the first page of the section,
| | 01:18 | and when I click on it, it will take
me to Layout and text editing.
| | 01:22 | The path shows up here across the top.
| | 01:26 | Now I have got two buttons in my navigation area, if I want to go
back, I could do that, and go directly to Layout and text editing
| | 01:32 | by clicking it here on the right half of my page.
| | 01:36 | So here you can see that this section called Layout
and text editing has one, two, three, four, five,
| | 01:42 | six new or enhanced features, like Independent layers.
| | 01:46 | As I click on these, I get a quick description of
each as it expands, so under Independent layers,
| | 01:52 | now you can see that we can set up Independent
layers on our various pages in a document.
| | 01:57 | Meaning, we can setup for example,
guidelines for individual pages.
| | 02:02 | So, they are different on each of those
pages, but setup guidelines on a master
| | 02:07 | that will stretch throughout the entire the document.
| | 02:09 | You've got both options now, there
is also the ability to create tables.
| | 02:13 | New interactive tables, and this is
great for trying to organize text,
| | 02:18 | and graphics together for example, and
you want things to line up properly.
| | 02:22 | You can put them in a table, and if you
ever done any Web design, you know that,
| | 02:26 | that's a great way to layout a Web page using a
table that is invisible on the Web page itself,
| | 02:32 | but it's great way to line up text with graphics and so on.
| | 02:35 | So you've got that now in CorelDRAW.
| | 02:37 | Something called Live text preview.
| | 02:39 | This is a great new feature that's very intuitive.
| | 02:42 | It let's you interact with text on your screen, and experiment
with different settings without actually choosing those settings.
| | 02:48 | So once you have got the look that you
are after, you can then apply that change.
| | 02:53 | So you can actually see what it's going to
look like before you make that application.
| | 02:56 | I like that.
| | 02:57 | Kind of like a real time preview.
| | 02:59 | Easy font identification through something called what the font.
| | 03:03 | If for example, you have received a file from someone else and
you are having difficulty identifying the fonts that were used,
| | 03:11 | you can capture a font and send it to,
WhatTheFont.com, you can see it's available
| | 03:16 | in English only, and it will identify your font for you.
| | 03:20 | And then that will help you, if you plan on working on that
file for example, and you want to keep things consistent.
| | 03:26 | Something you can do now, is take paragraph text and mirror
it, and keep in mind we're going to be doing all this stuff
| | 03:32 | as we move through the lessons in this title.
| | 03:35 | we'll be working with paragraph text,
and I will show you how to mirror it.
| | 03:38 | Something you couldn't do before.
| | 03:39 | So if you wanted to for example, have
a reflection of your paragraph text.
| | 03:43 | You can see, the mirror option allows
you to do that now, and it's interactive.
| | 03:48 | I kind of like that.
| | 03:49 | You can do it vertically or horizontally, it's up to you.
| | 03:52 | It's better support for quotation marks.
| | 03:54 | If you work in multiple languages you'll know that quotation
marks are styled differently in different languages,
| | 04:01 | so here you can see that we can actually work
with different styles of quotation marks,
| | 04:06 | depending on the language we're working in, kind of cool.
| | 04:08 | Now to go to the next section, I can click
the right arrow, the right navigation button,
| | 04:12 | or I could go back and just click right on Design assets.
| | 04:16 | Exact same thing happens, takes me to the Design assets
section, and you can see down here I have got several new
| | 04:22 | or enhanced features as well, including this
first one which is support for Raw camera files.
| | 04:28 | If you have a digital camera and it's capable of
storing your photos, your images in that raw format,
| | 04:35 | meaning there are no adjustments made for
brightness or contrast or saturation etcetera.
| | 04:41 | You are left with what is called a raw file and you
have got raw camera file support now in CorelDRAW.
| | 04:47 | So you can bring them right into draw, kind of cool.
| | 04:50 | Enhance compatibility, now draws have always been
compatible with other applications out there,
| | 04:55 | but it's been even further improved now, support of file formats
now include, you can see Illustrator CS3 and Photoshop CS3.
| | 05:03 | All kinds of different formats that can be imported,
and in some cases exported as well from CorelDRAW.
| | 05:10 | we're going to be looking at importing
and exporting in this title.
| | 05:14 | There is a New search capability for templates.
| | 05:17 | There are lots of templates to choose from
and when you're starting a new project,
| | 05:21 | you can get a great head start using a template,
while templates are even easier to find right now.
| | 05:26 | At least to find the right template that is on your computer.
| | 05:29 | There is a browser, preview and search
options, that we'll talk about later on.
| | 05:33 | When we create a new file from a template, they are Extras and
when we click on Extras, you can see how it expands to tell us
| | 05:40 | that the Graphics Suite X4, just puts 4000
new clip art images at your finger tips.
| | 05:46 | That is a lot of clip art images.
| | 05:48 | Now one of the options during installation is
to install all those directly on your computer,
| | 05:53 | or you can access them from the installed CD, it's up to you.
| | 05:57 | I have chosen to put all of mine on my computer.
| | 06:00 | I have plenty of room for it.
| | 06:01 | So I really do have them at my fingertips.
| | 06:04 | There is some new fonts as well, an extended selection
of new fonts, including single-line engraving fonts,
| | 06:10 | great for those for people who are
using draw to create engravings.
| | 06:14 | You can see some additional language support down here as well.
| | 06:18 | Enhance search functionality, so you can use keywords and
notes and file types, you can search by date and all kinds
| | 06:25 | of cool features to allow you to find and
keep track of your work here in CorelDRAW.
| | 06:30 | Updated user interface, that we'll be talking
about as we explore the new user interface,
| | 06:35 | and there's something called thumbnails now.
| | 06:37 | So you got some redesigned icons and menus and controls
in the application that gives you a new fresh look,
| | 06:43 | and more intuitive working environment, and we'll
be exploring that in detail when we open up a file
| | 06:49 | and explore our user interface, helps you stay organized too.
| | 06:53 | Let's move to that third section.
| | 06:54 | I'm going to click my right navigation button
down here to go to the Workflow section here,
| | 06:59 | where you will see something called PowerTRACE.
| | 07:01 | This is really nicer -- or some enhancements to PowerTRACE now,
like centerline tracing, for more accurate curves and strokes,
| | 07:09 | for tracing technical illustrations
in line drawings or signatures.
| | 07:12 | So you can take a bitmap image and trace
it and turn it into a vector image.
| | 07:17 | This will all make better sense, when we talk
more about the differences between bitmap
| | 07:21 | and vector images, and the advantages of each.
| | 07:25 | You can go to Review and collaboration tools here by clicking
this to see that there is something called concept share.
| | 07:31 | A valuable collaboration tool, if you plan on working with
others on projects, you can get real time feedback from clients
| | 07:39 | for example, or colleagues if you are collaborating on a project.
| | 07:43 | Concept share is something we'll look at later on.
| | 07:46 | Improved print merge functionality, so if you are going to be
merging, for example, names and addresses to create invitations
| | 07:52 | or labels, it's a lot easier to do now in CorelDRAW x4.
| | 07:56 | There is Search capability again, when saving and opening files.
| | 08:00 | There is those keywords and in search by
author, and subject, and date, and so on.
| | 08:05 | Automatic product updates is another option.
| | 08:08 | Now you can receive messages and information about new
content and product updates, we saw from the Updates tab
| | 08:13 | in the previous lesson, where you can go to set all of that up.
| | 08:16 | When we're done with the welcome screen, we
clicked the close button up here, in fact,
| | 08:20 | we cannot do anything in CorelDRAW unless we go back to
Quick Start and make a selection from here, or close this up
| | 08:28 | and make our selections from the menu's or the Toolbars.
| | 08:32 | So in the next lesson, we'll open up a file and take a tour of
this user interface to get you comfortable in your surroundings.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Opening files and touring the new user interface| 00:00 | In this next lesson we're going to explore the
newly designed user interface here in CorelDRAW X4.
| | 00:05 | Now if you are a user of previous versions of CorelDRAW,
don't worry, you will have no problem finding your way around,
| | 00:13 | you'll feel totally comfortable in this environment.
| | 00:15 | It really hasn't changed in that way, but
what you will notice is a fresh new look.
| | 00:21 | So to really explore the user interface,
we should open up a file.
| | 00:24 | You will notice right now that my
menus for example, are very sparse.
| | 00:29 | The tools on the various Toolbars and then the
Toolbox are grade out, not accessible in this,
| | 00:35 | because I have got nothing open right now to work on.
| | 00:38 | So let's open up a file first.
| | 00:40 | To do that we know there are a few different ways.
| | 00:42 | We could go up to our little button up here for
the Welcome screen we saw in the previous lesson,
| | 00:47 | that the welcome screen gives us an opportunity to open
up recently used files or even browse to existing files.
| | 00:54 | So if we click this button from the Quick Start page
here, you can see under open recent, if you have opened up
| | 01:00 | and worked on any other CorelDRAW
files, they will be listed here.
| | 01:03 | For example, I have got IntroFileX4.cdr, you may have nothing
here, but when I hover over a file with my mouse button,
| | 01:11 | I see a thumbnail of the first page, over there on the left
and down below some additional information about that file.
| | 01:17 | Now you do have nothing here, you do have a button down below
that allows you to browse through the folders in your computer
| | 01:24 | by choosing the Open other button,
you will be able to do just that.
| | 01:27 | But, if you do not have the welcome screen open,
like I didn't, I'm going to close it up here.
| | 01:32 | The other option is to go up to the File menu and
choose open from here, Cltr+O, is the keyboard shortcut.
| | 01:39 | You have another way, and if I click
out here to close up this menu,
| | 01:43 | you will notice that the second button on
my Toolbar here is also an Open button.
| | 01:48 | So all of these will do the same thing, they open the
Open Drawing dialog box, and now all you have to do is,
| | 01:54 | browse through your exercise files to the Lesson 1 folder.
| | 01:57 | To find this one here, IntroFileX4.
| | 02:00 | So I'm going to click on it once to select it.
| | 02:03 | Now if you have the exercise files, wherever you store them,
you will have to browse to them, remember on the desktop.
| | 02:09 | If you do not have the exercise files, don't worry.
| | 02:12 | You can still learn lots just by watching.
| | 02:15 | So with IntroFileX4 selected, I'm going to click the open
button down below here in this dialog box to open it up,
| | 02:22 | and now if you check at my user interface, I have
got lots of buttons to choose from, lots of tools.
| | 02:27 | Look at my menu bar, I have got File all
the way across here to help lots of options.
| | 02:32 | So let's start our tour, right at the top on our Title Bar.
| | 02:35 | This top bar is called the Title Bar, it tells you
what you are using, CorelDRAW X4, in case you forgot,
| | 02:41 | but more importantly is the name of your file, IntroFileX4.
| | 02:45 | It's a .cdr file, a CorelDRAW file, and the entire
path, so you see exactly where this file is located.
| | 02:53 | Also in the very far right hand corner, you have got buttons
to close up CorelDRAW, this is colored red on purpose.
| | 02:59 | It's a little bit dangerous.
| | 03:00 | Clicking this button will Close up the entire application.
| | 03:03 | So if you got multiple files opened for example, and
you haven't saved changes, you will be prompted to,
| | 03:08 | but if you by accident answer no, you will lose those changes.
| | 03:12 | So you really want to make sure that
you do not have anything opened
| | 03:15 | or at least you have saved everything
before you click this button.
| | 03:18 | First you got to Minimize the Restore button to keep draw
running, but just get it out of the way, you can minimize it,
| | 03:24 | bring it back, when you are ready to work on draw again,
right where you left off, and you will notice down below
| | 03:30 | on this next bar, called the menu bar,
where we see all those menu headings.
| | 03:33 | We have similar buttons.
| | 03:35 | Well, these apply to the actual file that's opened in CorelDRAW.
| | 03:38 | So I can minimize this file to work
on another file without closing it.
| | 03:42 | Restore it to change its size.
| | 03:44 | Now right now it's restored up, meaning, it fills the entire
screen, I can restore it down, by clicking this button,
| | 03:51 | and you can see now my Restore button
here is a restore up or maximize button.
| | 03:55 | There is also a little Close button here which will
close the file itself, but keep CorelDRAW open.
| | 04:00 | So I would like to go there to close my files after I save them.
| | 04:04 | Let's go over here on the left hand side of
our menu bar, these are the menu headings,
| | 04:08 | and each one of these has a menu when
you click on them, a dropdown menu.
| | 04:13 | So if I click on File, you will see file commands.
| | 04:16 | New, Open, Close, Save, Import, Export,
Print, all of these are file commands
| | 04:22 | or commands related to working with the entire file.
| | 04:25 | If I go up to the Edit menu with my mouse pointer, you can
see edit commands, many of them not accessible right now,
| | 04:31 | because I haven't selected anything, or I haven't
actually done anything with this file yet,
| | 04:36 | and I have got View commands, Layout
commands, there is Arrange, Effects.
| | 04:42 | Now some of these menu items have little black triangles to
the right, if I go down to Effects and hover over Adjust.
| | 04:48 | You can see there is a sub menu here
with a whole bunch of adjust options.
| | 04:52 | Same thing for Transform and Correction.
| | 04:55 | Down below I have got a whole bunch more, so keep in
mind you have got hidden commands in those sub menus.
| | 05:01 | There is Bitmaps, Text, tools and all the way to Help.
| | 05:06 | I'm going to click out here in my actual
documents, so I have closed up that menu,
| | 05:11 | because the next part down is our Standard Toolbar
containing buttons which are basically shortcuts
| | 05:17 | to some of the commands we saw in the menu Bar.
| | 05:20 | Pretty much every command is available to you through the menus.
| | 05:24 | But there are certain commands that
you will use more often than others,
| | 05:27 | and typically they will appear here on your Standard Toolbar.
| | 05:29 | For example, this first group, New, Open, Save and Print.
| | 05:34 | All of those are file commands found on the File menu.
| | 05:38 | Then we got another grouping, Cut, Copy and Paste.
| | 05:40 | They appear on the Edit menu.
| | 05:42 | Same with Undo and Redo.
| | 05:44 | Then we have got Import and Export.
| | 05:46 | Those are borrowed from the File menu.
| | 05:48 | Got a command here for Application Launcher, and there is a
Welcome screen, they are kind of grouped together as well.
| | 05:54 | Zoom options.
| | 05:55 | All of these Toolbars and menus are totally customizable,
there is a whole chapter dedicated to this later on,
| | 06:02 | where we'll make changes to our Toolbars in our menus.
| | 06:07 | Down below there is a really important
one, it's called the Property Bar.
| | 06:10 | Right now you will see options here for changing the
Paper Type and Size, there are some size options here.
| | 06:17 | The Orientation, Landscape or Portrait.
| | 06:19 | You can see, I have got, page layout options here as well.
| | 06:23 | I have got my Units selected.
| | 06:24 | All of these apply to the entire file down below.
| | 06:27 | But what's really cool about the Property Bar is
it's context sensitive, meaning, if I come down here
| | 06:33 | and click on the word 'Welcome,' you can see that text is now
selected and look up here, my Property Bar is totally changed
| | 06:40 | to give me a different set of tools,
the tools I need, when I need them.
| | 06:44 | So here we can see things like, the actual size of this
object, which happens to be text, the location as well.
| | 06:51 | You can see the font that is being
used, the point size, any attributes.
| | 06:56 | If I want to turn, Underlining or change the
Justification or Alignment, I can do that right from here.
| | 07:01 | If I click on this box down below, which is a yellow rectangle,
I get different options up here, these are tools that would apply
| | 07:08 | to working with that kind of object,
like changing the borders for example,
| | 07:13 | or the width of the outline around the outside of my rectangle.
| | 07:19 | If I click out here in a blank spot on my page, it's flipping
back now to the original Property Bar, I saw a moment ago.
| | 07:26 | With also dot rulers across the top and down
the left hand side, these show up by default.
| | 07:31 | You can turn them on and off at your
leisure, but right now there on,
| | 07:34 | showing me exactly the size and position
here of things on my page.
| | 07:40 | Down the left hand side is a Toolbox.
| | 07:42 | These are tools that you are going to be
using to create things here in CorelDRAW.
| | 07:47 | This is all a part of the design process.
| | 07:49 | There are lots of tools, and you will notice that some
| | 07:51 | of these tools have little black triangles,
and they do have sub menus called flyouts.
| | 07:56 | For example, if I come up here to the Zoom tool and I click,
| | 08:02 | notice that I have got two zoom options,
the zoom and the Hand tool.
| | 08:06 | If I come down here now without clicking and
just hover over these, I see the flyouts.
| | 08:11 | You will notice something about these flyouts.
| | 08:13 | I have gone over here to this Polygon tool,
they have these little dots across the top,
| | 08:17 | and that means that when I hover over, I might see a
four sided arrow, that allows me to click and drag,
| | 08:23 | to move that set of tools to any place on my page.
| | 08:27 | Notice that I keep the tool over here, but now I have
got them easily accessible as I work on my document,
| | 08:34 | and I can close up that little set,
just by clicking the Close button.
| | 08:38 | And of course, you will notice I have got these little dots
at the very top of the Toolbox, the entire Toolbox as well
| | 08:44 | as my Property Bar and my Standard tool
Bar, meaning I can float any of these.
| | 08:50 | If I don't want my Toolbox docked over here on the left hand
side, I can click and drag when I see the four sided arrow here
| | 08:56 | at the top, and place my Toolbox anywhere I want.
| | 08:59 | I can size it to any shape I want as well, and I when I'm
done with it, I could close it, but I'll lose my tool.
| | 09:05 | So even better, is to put it back over here.
| | 09:08 | I can drag it back to its location, it will be docked
there, or double click up where it says Toolbox.
| | 09:14 | That puts it back where it was, when
I dragged it away from there.
| | 09:18 | Same things goes for your Standard Toolbar, your Property
Bar and over here on the right hand side, the Dockers.
| | 09:24 | The dockers appear over here and right
now, HINTS is showing up by default.
| | 09:29 | HINTS is a tab over here, it's a separate docker,
and you can see, I have got actually two dockers,
| | 09:35 | one is called the Object Manager, and dockers can be
opened up by going to the Window menu, down to Dockers,
| | 09:43 | and you will see right now I have got
two with check marks next to them.
| | 09:46 | You may have the same too or others if you reduce them.
| | 09:49 | For example, the View Manager, if I click
on it, its now opened up here at the top.
| | 09:54 | Now I can collapse my dockers by clicking
the double arrow up here at the top.
| | 09:59 | You can see tabs now for my View Manager, Object Manager
and Hints, clicking any of those brings them back.
| | 10:04 | The View Manager though always appears up here at the top.
| | 10:08 | When I'm done with an actual docker, I
can close it by clicking the Close button.
| | 10:12 | Needs to do the same to HINTS now.
| | 10:14 | I can switch to my Object Manager just by clicking the tab,
and of course, I can always go up to Window, down to Dockers
| | 10:21 | and deselect something that has a
check mark, that will turn it off.
| | 10:24 | If I didn't want Hints, I click on Hints here to turn it off.
| | 10:28 | Always come back here to turn it back on.
| | 10:30 | I'm going to leave Object Manager and Hints
on at this time, and to undock my Hints,
| | 10:36 | I will just go the title bar and
drag it wherever I want it to go.
| | 10:39 | Now you can see I have got both of these
dockers here floating around on my screen.
| | 10:44 | Double clicking up here on the Title
Bar, will put it back where it was.
| | 10:48 | Just to the right of the Dockers, you have got the color palette.
| | 10:51 | You can see a standard set of colors here, but there
are more, I can click this double arrow down here.
| | 10:56 | That's a single arrow actually with a line in front of it.
| | 10:59 | That will show me an extended set of colors, and if I
click back out here, anywhere, it collapses back down to
| | 11:06 | that standard setting, just to let you know
there are more colors than what you are seeing.
| | 11:10 | This is a standard set.
| | 11:12 | If you wanted extended colors, for example, shades
of Cyan, you can click and hold your mouse button
| | 11:18 | down to see the extended palette, and then
select the shade of Cyan right from here.
| | 11:23 | So for example, I'm going to click Cancel here,
| | 11:25 | I'm going to click right on my text,
'Welcome,' come over here and click on Cyan.
| | 11:30 | You can see it just changes my text color to Cyan, but if I
wanted a different shade, I'll just click and hold this down.
| | 11:36 | Now, I can just move over here to
maybe a darker shade, click on it.
| | 11:40 | I see that change right here, deselect my object by clicking on a
blank space, and that's how easy it is to use the color palette.
| | 11:48 | we'll have a whole bunch of lessons
just dedicated to working with color.
| | 11:53 | Down at the bottom of you screen you have got some information
showing up-down here on what we call, our Status Bar.
| | 11:59 | Watch what happens when I click on my text here, WELCOME.
| | 12:02 | Well, first of all my Hints change over here, to give
me Hints about moving, scaling and stretching objects.
| | 12:08 | Down below, though you can see this
object is what we call artistic text,
| | 12:13 | and it's using the Arial Black font,
and you can see it on layer too.
| | 12:17 | So I have got information, there is the text size as
well, showing points, and some instructions down below,
| | 12:24 | about what I could do with this object, like, double clicking
it to get some tools for rotating and skewing and so on.
| | 12:30 | So when I deselect my text, you can see that I get a different
piece of information showing up-down here at the bottom.
| | 12:37 | I'm going to click on my yellow rectangle,
down at the bottom, I get some information,
| | 12:42 | this is called a curve on layer one and look over here too.
| | 12:47 | You can see there's things like the outline and colors
being used, if I go up to my text and click on it.
| | 12:54 | There is the Fill color that Blue I selected with no outline.
| | 12:57 | So you really get some helpful information about the
different objects on your page down there on the Status Bar.
| | 13:04 | So pay attention to what's going on down there for sure.
| | 13:07 | Also you've got some navigation buttons
here for doing things like flipping
| | 13:11 | between multiple pages in a CorelDRAW file, if you've got them.
| | 13:16 | This one has two pages, Page 1 and Page 2.
| | 13:18 | If I click on Page 2, I will see that page.
| | 13:21 | Then go back Page 1, and back to Page 1.
| | 13:24 | Notice I have also that navigation buttons, here it says, I'm on
one of two, if I click the right arrow, I will be on two of two.
| | 13:30 | To go back to the beginning, I can click the
arrow with the line in front of it on the left
| | 13:35 | or to the end, there is an arrow with a line after it.
| | 13:38 | Of course, this looks better with even more pages than two.
| | 13:41 | To add pages, I'm going to go back to the first page here,
you have got a plus sign on the left as well as on the right.
| | 13:48 | So if you wanted to add a new page before the
current page, you would click this one on the left.
| | 13:53 | If you want to add a new page after Page 1,
you click this little plus sign on the right.
| | 13:58 | Clicking it adds the page.
| | 13:59 | You can see now I'm on Page 2 of three,
Page 1 is my Welcome, Page 3 has my vector
| | 14:05 | and bitmap that we're going to be using in the next lesson.
| | 14:09 | So I'm going to go back here to Page 1, and if I don't
want Page 2, I'm just going to right click on it.
| | 14:15 | I see a pop-up menu, keep in mind, right clicking always gives
you context sensitive options, like delete page in this case,
| | 14:22 | so I'm going to click on delete page and
it's gone, I'm back to Page 1 and Page 2.
| | 14:28 | Go back to Page 1 by clicking the
tab, so that is the user interface.
| | 14:33 | we're going to keep this file open for the next lesson
where we talk about the difference between a vector image
| | 14:39 | and a bitmap image, each has its own advantages and
each are worked with differently here in CorelDRAW.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Vector vs. bitmap images| 00:00 | Before we go any further in this title, I think now
is a good time to talk about vector and bitmap images.
| | 00:07 | CorelDRAW X4 is primarily a vector based graphics application.
| | 00:11 | Meaning, when you start creating objects
on your page, they will be vector graphics.
| | 00:17 | When you take your digital camera and take
a photo, you are creating a bitmap image.
| | 00:22 | While in CorelDRAW, we can work with both types of
images, but they are different, they behave differently
| | 00:27 | and there are advantages to each, so that is
what we're going to talk about in this lesson.
| | 00:32 | We are going to continue to use the same file from the
previous lesson called IntroFileX4, it's a cdr file,
| | 00:39 | CorelDraw file in the Lesson1 folder of your exercise file.
| | 00:43 | So if you have got them, and you want to follow along
and it's not already open, go ahead and open it up.
| | 00:48 | The only difference you will see is that, in the last
lesson, we changed our Welcome text here to a shade of Cyan.
| | 00:54 | Really doesn't matter, because we're going to Page 2.
| | 00:56 | On Page 2, you are going to see examples of a bitmap
image, on the right and a vector image on the left.
| | 01:04 | So now let us just talk about the differences between these two.
| | 01:07 | Starting with our bitmap over here on the right hand side.
| | 01:10 | This is clearly a photograph taken with a digital camera.
| | 01:14 | A bitmap image is an image made up of little pixels,
little squares, each one of those has its own color
| | 01:21 | and when you put them all together, you end up with this image.
| | 01:25 | Now we do not see those squares when
we're zoomed out to a certain level.
| | 01:29 | So when you take a picture with your digital camera,
and you get it developed, you do not see the squares.
| | 01:33 | You will have to look really, really closely with a magnifying
glass or something more powerful to see those pixels.
| | 01:39 | However, if you were to try and blow up that image into a
poster size, you might start to see the little squares that make
| | 01:46 | up the image, those pixels and it
becomes a little bit blurry or pixelated,
| | 01:51 | and we're going to see that by zooming into our bitmap.
| | 01:54 | So I'm going go over here to my tool
Box and click on the Zoom tool.
| | 01:57 | I'm going to click and drag over an area
of the forest here and when I let go,
| | 02:02 | you can see how it's starting to get
a little bit blurry or out of focus.
| | 02:06 | Pixelated is the correct term, and you can
actually see little squares that make up the image.
| | 02:11 | If we zoom in even further, and it becomes
very clear that these are little squares,
| | 02:16 | different shades of green in this case, that make up the image.
| | 02:20 | That's why if I have to blow this up to a poster,
I might start to see some of these squares.
| | 02:25 | So scalability is not an advantage with a bitmap image.
| | 02:30 | Same thing for sizing, if I have to size it up or down, I'm
going to loose pixels or insert pixels to create the image
| | 02:37 | and then the quality of the photo starts to deteriorate.
| | 02:40 | I'm going to hold down shift and press F4 to zoom out
to the full page view that we were at a minute ago,
| | 02:47 | and I'm going to zoom in now to my vector graphic.
| | 02:50 | Vector graphics are not made up of pixels.
| | 02:52 | I'm going to zoom into this corner here.
| | 02:55 | Vector graphics are made up of lines and curves and nodes
| | 02:58 | and there are mathematical calculations
that go into the creation of these graphics.
| | 03:04 | So you can see when I zoom in, that corner
stays nice and round and it's not jagged.
| | 03:09 | There is no pixelation.
| | 03:11 | What if I zoom in even further?
| | 03:13 | Look at that nice and smooth.
| | 03:15 | Again, a nice straight line and that's because
there are no pixels in a vector graphic.
| | 03:21 | Shift+F4 on the keyboard zooms us back out, and
that is the big difference between these two.
| | 03:26 | Now when you are creating in CorelDRAW,
you are going to be creating vector images.
| | 03:30 | Even though you can bring bitmap images in and even edit them
here in CorelDRAW, typically if you wanted to make changes
| | 03:38 | to your graphic, and it is bitmap image, you are
going to need some kind of photo editing software.
| | 03:43 | I'm going to click on my Pick tool, and I'm
going to click right here on this bitmap.
| | 03:48 | Now right away you will see an option
appear on the Property Bar, Edit Bitmap,
| | 03:52 | and there are some bitmap editing tools built into CorelDRAW.
| | 03:56 | If you really have to get technical with your
image, you probably take it into something
| | 04:01 | like Corel Photo-Paint or even another
application like PhotoShop.
| | 04:05 | Let us say, I want to make a change.
| | 04:07 | I want to edit just the grass.
| | 04:08 | Make the grass a darker shade of green.
| | 04:11 | Well, I can't actually just click on the grass.
| | 04:13 | It is the entire image that gets selected.
| | 04:15 | Bringing it into an image editing application like
Photo-Paint, allows me to do things like masking
| | 04:22 | and put the grass on a separate layer and change its color.
| | 04:25 | All of that is time consuming and a little bit complex.
| | 04:28 | Whereas, if I want to make a change
to a vector image, that's different.
| | 04:32 | Over here when I click on my vector image, you can see
| | 04:35 | that this is actually an image, an
object, made up of four separate objects.
| | 04:40 | Notice down below on my Status Bar.
| | 04:42 | Group of four objects on layer two.
| | 04:44 | So I have a green rectangle with rounded corners.
| | 04:48 | I have got a black rectangle with squared corners,
and I have got two different text objects.
| | 04:53 | So what if I want to just make the
green rectangle a different color?
| | 04:56 | Well, I can select, just the green rectangle
after, I ungroup these four objects,
| | 05:03 | and I do that with its selected by going up to the Property Bar.
| | 05:06 | There is an ungroup button here, Cltr+U on the keyboard is the
shortcut, and now that means when I click off of the object
| | 05:12 | and just click on the green rectangle, it's all that selected.
| | 05:16 | Look down below, rectangle on layer two.
| | 05:19 | There is the color over there.
| | 05:20 | Green on the inside.
| | 05:22 | Black on the outside.
| | 05:24 | So if I want to change that to red.
| | 05:25 | I will come over to my color palette.
| | 05:27 | I will click on red, and that's all there is to it.
| | 05:29 | The portion of the image is easily
editable, whereas with a bitmap, it's not.
| | 05:35 | I'm going to click undo, sets it back to green
and I'm going to marquee select all four objects.
| | 05:42 | So I'm going go to come out here, click and drag and make sure
that all four objects, that's all I want, inside that marquee,
| | 05:49 | when I let go, that means they are all selected,
four objects selected, it says so down here.
| | 05:54 | Meaning, I can go up to this button on my Property
Bar which is now turned into a group button,
| | 05:59 | to group them all back together and now it's treated as one.
| | 06:02 | Which means of course, If I scale this
up by going to the sizing handle up here
| | 06:07 | on the top left corner and clicking
and dragging to make it bigger.
| | 06:10 | You can see how big it's getting here.
| | 06:12 | I'm going to drag it up here as well.
| | 06:15 | And now even zooming in, I haven't lost any
of the quality, the sharpness, the clarity.
| | 06:22 | Shift+F4, is going to take me back, and
I'm going to have to size this back down.
| | 06:27 | I'm going to click undo, couple of times
to get it back to it's original size.
| | 06:33 | Go back to my Pick tool and just click out here to deselect.
| | 06:37 | So you should have a good understanding now, the
differences between vector images and bitmap images.
| | 06:42 | Like I said, we can work with both of them here in
CorelDRAW, but, when you need to get very technical
| | 06:48 | with your bitmap editing, CorelDRAW is not the best
application for making changes to a bitmap image.
| | 06:55 | However, you do have Corel Photo-Paint that's included in the
suite, and if you are an expert with Adobe PhotoShop for example,
| | 07:03 | then that's where you probably want to
start working with your bitmap images.
| | 07:06 | So most of the work that we do in this title
in CorelDRAW, will be with vector graphics.
| | 07:12 | I think we're ready now to move on to creating new files, and
we're going to do that in the next lesson, starting from scratch.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating new files| 00:00 | Alright, now that you are feeling comfortable
in your new surroundings here in CorelDRAWX4
| | 00:05 | and you understand the differences between vector
and bitmap images, it's time to start creating.
| | 00:10 | That's what we're going to do in this lesson.
| | 00:12 | we'll look at few different ways to
create new work here in CorelDRAW.
| | 00:17 | we'll talk about creating new blank
documents, as well as getting some help
| | 00:21 | through the many templates you have at your disposal here.
| | 00:24 | So it really doesn't matter what you
have on your screen at this time.
| | 00:27 | I'm just going to close up everything by going to my Close
button up here on the menu Bar in the top right corner.
| | 00:32 | So that leaves me with nothing here, not even a blank document.
| | 00:36 | So you can see that most of the tools
and the menus are unavailable to me.
| | 00:40 | There are a few different ways to create new projects, new
files or new documents, whatever you want to call them.
| | 00:46 | One way we saw earlier is from the welcome screen,
and we can always access the welcome screen
| | 00:51 | by clicking this button here in the
middle of the Standard Toolbar.
| | 00:55 | When we do that, we're going to see the
Quick Start menu by default, and over here,
| | 01:00 | notice we can create a New blank document, and that's
going to give you a new blank page or like a blank canvas,
| | 01:06 | ready to start working with all of the default settings applied.
| | 01:10 | Now if you want to head start, you
can check out the many templates.
| | 01:13 | New from template will allow you to choose a template, before you
create your new document, and this gives you a good head start.
| | 01:20 | Of course, any content that's delivered to you in a template
can be altered, manipulated, removed, it's all up to you.
| | 01:27 | So we're going to look at both of these methods in a moment.
| | 01:30 | Right now I'm going to close this up and
show you that here from a blank screen,
| | 01:34 | we can also go to the New button on our Standard Toolbar.
| | 01:37 | Cltr+N, is the keyboard shortcut, and this
will create the new blank document for you.
| | 01:43 | So you get the default settings, a
blank canvas ready to go on your own.
| | 01:48 | However, if you go up to File, you will notice that
New also appears here, just above New from templates.
| | 01:53 | So both of those options that we saw in the
welcome screen are available here as well.
| | 01:57 | So let us start here with New, Cltr+N, on
the keyboard to create a new blank document.
| | 02:02 | When we give it a click, it doesn't take long before
we have got our blank canvas here in front of us.
| | 02:07 | But let us examine some of the defaults that are given to
you here when you choose to create a new blank document.
| | 02:13 | Of course, these defaults can be altered, we'll talk about that
later on in this title, when we customize our work environment.
| | 02:20 | But right now you can see, my default is set to Letters,
so my Paper Size and Type is Letter, which means,
| | 02:25 | 8.5 X 11, that shows up over here on my Property Bar.
| | 02:30 | The orientation is Portrait, I can easily change that to
Landscape, and any changes I make to the actual layout,
| | 02:37 | will be applied to all of the pages in my document.
| | 02:40 | So if I had ten page here, any changes I make like flipping
the Landscape, will automatically be applied to every page
| | 02:47 | in the document, unless I click this other button over
here to Apply Page Layouts to the current page only.
| | 02:53 | So we'll be talking about that layer on as well,
when we start to manipulate our page layouts.
| | 02:58 | My default units is set to inches, that was selected during
the installation process, so that is all automatic for me.
| | 03:04 | I'm ready now with my blank page here sitting in front of
me to get creative and start working on my first project.
| | 03:12 | Now like I said earlier, if you wanted some help, and
you need a head start, you can use one of the templates.
| | 03:18 | To do that, we go up to File, down to new from template.
| | 03:22 | Any time you see a command on a menu that
has the ellipsis after those three dots,
| | 03:27 | that will remind you that you are about
to launch some kind of dialog box.
| | 03:31 | So you are going to see a screen with some options here.
| | 03:33 | So let's give it a click, New From Template, and
instead of just giving us that new blank document here,
| | 03:39 | you can see that we get a list of filters
down the left, templates on the right,
| | 03:44 | and designer notes will appear when we select a template.
| | 03:47 | Now by default, you are probably viewing
all of the templates available to you,
| | 03:52 | and they are categorized in alphabetical order here as well.
| | 03:56 | So notice that advertisements appears at
the top, there are a few options there.
| | 04:01 | Then we get into Brochures, and as I use the scroll bar to
scroll through this list, you will see it is quite extensive.
| | 04:06 | There are lots to choose from.
| | 04:09 | So let say your intention was to
create some kind of poster or sign.
| | 04:14 | That was the project, you were about to begin.
| | 04:16 | Well, you can come over to the filters
here and choose a category,
| | 04:19 | and you can see Brochures for example,
gives me some Brochure options.
| | 04:23 | Those are really what I'm looking for, and as I go down the
list, you will notice there is one here called posters and signs,
| | 04:29 | and when I click on that, look at
that, I get a whole bunch options.
| | 04:33 | Here's one that represents a bakery type layout.
| | 04:37 | And if click on it, I'm going to see that
additional information over here on the right.
| | 04:41 | So the industry, North American bakery or coffee shop.
| | 04:45 | You can see the Pieces of Sales Poster.
| | 04:47 | The Description shows up down below.
| | 04:50 | The style combination of modern style and traditional
touches creates this warm and welcoming feel.
| | 04:55 | So it's all set up for you in style.
| | 04:58 | The color choices are selected for
you, browns and yellows in this case.
| | 05:02 | The Overall message is, it's a high quality
establishment, modern yet, warming and inviting,
| | 05:08 | and you can see the Font choices that are used don here and why.
| | 05:12 | Alignment, and look at those two colors down below, they kind of
go with each other to give you that feeling that you are after,
| | 05:18 | with a poster representing a bakery in this case.
| | 05:21 | You can also choose the tabloid version, and when you click
on that, you will see additional information over here,
| | 05:27 | about the tabloid version, it's left aligned with headings.
| | 05:32 | You are also seeing information down
at the very bottom template details.
| | 05:35 | So the title of the template, the page size, here
is tabloid, meaning, 11 X 17 inch sheet of paper
| | 05:41 | that would likely be folded in half
to give you that tabloid effect.
| | 05:45 | The orientation -- you can see where the template is
located, the entire path appears when you hover over it.
| | 05:52 | How many pages, single sided folds etcetera.
| | 05:55 | So let's go to one that's going to
work for our imaginary company.
| | 05:59 | Let's say we're going to be working for a Bistro.
| | 06:03 | The Green Onion Bistro.
| | 06:05 | We want something here that closely represents what we're after,
and I'm thinking maybe this pub sign here, when I click on it,
| | 06:11 | it is a sign German pub or bar, okay,
that's pretty close to a Bistro.
| | 06:16 | It's a retro menu style, traditional,
clean and friendly, the alignment centered.
| | 06:22 | If I want to keep this information as I work on my
project, notice there is a little print icon down below.
| | 06:27 | So I can print out these designer notes, have them
with me as I'm working on this, that's kind of cool.
| | 06:32 | I'm not going to print them right now, but I'm
not going to make sure pub sign is selected here
| | 06:36 | under posters and signs, and I'm going to click Open.
| | 06:40 | When I click the open button, you can see it takes
a moment, but I left with my one page document here,
| | 06:47 | which is the beginnings of my sign, which in this case,
if you can understand German, it says daily specials.
| | 06:53 | Now I'm going to obviously change the text to
suit my own needs, or probably change the logo.
| | 06:59 | Maybe I don't want the beer sign in there or even
the spaghetti and meatballs or whatever that is.
| | 07:04 | So obviously I have got some editing to
do, but I have got a huge head start.
| | 07:07 | I have got some nice formattings and nice color
combinations, all I have to do, is change up the content now.
| | 07:13 | So by using a template to create a New document
here in CorelDRAW, you get a huge head start,
| | 07:20 | and you will save a lot of time and a lot of effort
in the design, in the styling of your document.
| | 07:25 | So those are a couple of ways to start
a brand new design here in CorelDRAW.
| | 07:31 | Obviously, when you start making changes and altering that
content, you will need to know how to save what you worked on,
| | 07:38 | and that's what we're going to talk about next.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Saving your work| 00:00 | As you begin creating master pieces in CorelDRAW X4, it will be
important for you to understand the proper way to save your work.
| | 00:08 | So in this lesson we're going to look at different
methods for saving your masterpieces here in CorelDRAW X4.
| | 00:15 | we'll look at simple updates, to changes you might make to
a file, as well as converting your files to other formats.
| | 00:22 | Choosing other locations, even different names,
to create different versions of your work.
| | 00:27 | So you can see I have already opened up a file
to work with, and it's called a Bistro_Sign.cdr,
| | 00:32 | you will find this in the Lesson1 folder of your exercise files
if you have got them, open it up if you like to follow along.
| | 00:40 | You can see that this is actually based on
the template we used in the previous lesson.
| | 00:44 | We had that German pub with some different color
schemes, different logos, different content.
| | 00:50 | I just simply made a few changes and created my own version
of this, and our scenario here is the Green Onion Bistro.
| | 00:56 | So you can see I have got a different logo,
different text, different content down below.
| | 01:01 | Even different images, showing up down
here in the bottom corners of my sign.
| | 01:06 | So let's say we want to make a simple change.
| | 01:09 | we're going to raise the price of our Vegetarian Lasagna,
| | 01:12 | I'm going to go up to where it says $
4.99 here and just double click on it.
| | 01:16 | Now automatically, that takes me inside the text and changes
me over to the text tool it selected over here in my Toolbox.
| | 01:23 | My cursor happens to be flashing just left of the four (4).
| | 01:26 | So I will hit my delete key.
| | 01:27 | If you are flashing away on the other side
of the four (4), hit your backspace key.
| | 01:31 | Either way we want to take out the four and add a
five, so now it's gone up by a dollar to $ 5.99.
| | 01:37 | I'm going to back to my Pick tool here on
the Toolbox right at the top, click on it.
| | 01:42 | Click out here in an empty space to deselect
anything to see the finished product.
| | 01:47 | Now of course, if something were to happen like
the power goes out, I shut down draw by accident
| | 01:51 | and don't save my changes, I will have lost that change.
| | 01:54 | We need to update this file with the latest change.
| | 01:58 | The easiest way to do that is to
go right to your Standard Toolbar
| | 02:01 | and click on this little icon of the
diskette, that's your save button.
| | 02:05 | Ctrl+S, is the keyboard shortcut, if you
prefer using the keyboard, either way,
| | 02:10 | clicking or Ctrl+S on the keyboard
will update this file with the change.
| | 02:15 | In other words, we've got the newest
version of this, we have the new price saved
| | 02:20 | under the same name, the same format, in the same location.
| | 02:24 | Perfect. Now what happens if you are collaborating with others?
| | 02:28 | Maybe you want to send this off to somebody who doesn't
have CorelDRAW, maybe they use Adobe Illustrator,
| | 02:34 | or maybe you want to send it off to a print
house to get a thousand copies printed
| | 02:38 | and they prefer Adobe Illustrator or
some other format for that matter.
| | 02:43 | Well, in that case you would not use the save button or Ctrl+S,
in that case you go up to File and you would choose Save As.
| | 02:51 | Notice, Ctrl+Shift+S is the shortcut for that one, and the
ellipsis tell me I'm about to launch some kind of dialog box.
| | 02:58 | So when I click on it, the save drawing dialog box opens up.
| | 03:01 | You can see the name down below, it's Bistro_Sign.
| | 03:04 | The type is CorelDRAW cdr file.
| | 03:08 | You can see the location, here is the Lesson1 folder, if I click
Save, I will be asked to - I want to replace the current version
| | 03:14 | with this new version, that's not actually what I want to do.
| | 03:17 | I want to change a few things.
| | 03:18 | I want to change the location, so I'm
going to click on my desktop here.
| | 03:22 | That's where I want to save it.
| | 03:23 | So my location has changed.
| | 03:25 | If I want to change the name from Bistro_Sign, I
could, just by typing something else or adding to this.
| | 03:31 | I'm going to add a two at the end by clicking after sign,
typing in a 2, and I want to change the format, the type.
| | 03:37 | Notice, Save As type is, CorelDRAW by clicking this bar.
| | 03:42 | Well, there is quite a list here to choose from.
| | 03:45 | Notice, at the top, I have got some common ones,
Illustrator, CorelDRAW and Corel Presentation Exchange.
| | 03:51 | They also appear down here on the long
list along with some other ones like SVG,
| | 03:55 | Scalable Vector Graphics, Corel Word Perfect Graphic.
| | 03:59 | There is a Macintosh, Pict or pct file.
| | 04:03 | Frame Vector Metafile, lots of options here.
| | 04:06 | Corel DESIGNER in there and AutoCAD So let's say our scenario
is, we're sending this off to someone who uses Illustrator,
| | 04:13 | they are not familiar with draw, well,
we'll just use Adobe Illustrator.
| | 04:17 | You can see that now shows up as the Save As type option.
| | 04:20 | Meaning, this is going to get a different extension.
| | 04:23 | It won't be of the cdr extension, it be an ai extension.
| | 04:26 | All I have to do now, is click the
Save button to accept those choices.
| | 04:30 | The Adobe illustrator Export dialog box shows
up with some options, like compatibility.
| | 04:35 | Notice Adobe Illustrator CS, Creative Suite, shows up here.
| | 04:39 | If I click the dropdown, I can narrow it down
to a specific version, but by choosing CS,
| | 04:44 | those with CS2 or CS3 will be able to open this file.
| | 04:48 | Maybe I want to go to CS2 though.
| | 04:50 | I know the person has at least CS2 on their PC.
| | 04:54 | The destination can be at PC or a Macintosh.
| | 04:57 | What are they using, it's important to know, because they'll
act differently on different types of machines or hardware.
| | 05:03 | So I'm going to leave that to PC.
| | 05:05 | Export text and there is some text in my file as curves,
so they become objects or do you want to keep them
| | 05:11 | as text, so that they can be edited with a text tool.
| | 05:14 | I'm going to leave them as text and then we have got a series of
other options down below, some are not selected, and some are.
| | 05:20 | Notice that the ones with check marks
are to Include Placed Images.
| | 05:24 | So there are some images that have been added.
| | 05:26 | They will be included.
| | 05:27 | So we'll have a preview image.
| | 05:29 | You know, when you are browsing for a file and you are looking
at thumbnails, where you won't be able to see a preview
| | 05:34 | of this image, and that can be saved with
it when you save to a adobe illustrator.
| | 05:40 | Other options involve Complex Built
Curves and outlines effects and so on.
| | 05:44 | So you can turn any of those on if you wish.
| | 05:47 | I'm just going to click Okay, accepting the defaults.
| | 05:49 | The only change I'm making is the
compatibility to Adobe Illustrator CS2.
| | 05:55 | So when I click Okay, the Export kicks in the gear.
| | 05:58 | So it's going to be kicking my CorelDRAW file, putting it
on the desktop in a new format known as Adobe Illustrator.
| | 06:05 | Let me take a moment for that to happen.
| | 06:07 | Meanwhile, I still have my CorelDRAW file in
front of me that I can continue working with.
| | 06:12 | So that covers saving.
| | 06:14 | Saving is very important obviously, if
you make changes to a CorelDRAW file,
| | 06:18 | you want to update your file by saving those changes.
| | 06:21 | If you want to save to another format to share with
others, collaborates into a print shop, you can do that.
| | 06:26 | You now know that, that's the Save As command.
| | 06:29 | And if I minimize CorelDRAW, I will go right
to my desktop, and there is my Bistro_Sign.
| | 06:34 | It's an Adobe Illustrator file, shows up as a blank
icon, because I don't have Adobe Illustrator installed.
| | 06:41 | So my computer doesn't know what to use to open
this up, although, I could open it up in CorelDRAW.
| | 06:47 | So that covers saving.
| | 06:49 | You are know ready to move on to working with actual pages in
a document, and then after that, we'll start creating objects.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
2. Working with PagesCreating multi-page projects| 00:00 | Before you start creating your masterpieces here in CorelDRAW
X4, it's important that we talk about pages, working with
| | 00:07 | multiple pages in a document, modifying page layout,
| | 00:11 | and even using Guidelines and Snap to options to make life
easy for you when it comes to lining up objects on your page.
| | 00:18 | So we're going to look at all three of those things in this chapter
| | 00:21 | before we move into the next chapter where you'll start creating.
| | 00:24 | So you can see I have actually opened up a file here, it's
called Bistro_Sign2.cdr, looks a lot like the file we were
| | 00:31 | working with in the previous lesson, but this
one is the Lesson2 folder of your Exercise Files.
| | 00:36 | So if you have got them and you want to follow along,
open it up. As I look down below in my Status Bar here,
| | 00:41 | just above Status Bar, I see that I am on Page 1
and there is only one page. It is a one page document.
| | 00:48 | One of the great advantages of CorelDRAW over some of the other
applications out there is that you can have multiple pages
| | 00:55 | and each of those pages can be different layouts. So
for example with our Green Onion scenario here where we
| | 01:01 | created our Bistro sign that's probably going to go in the window,
we might also want to create a menu for our customers and
| | 01:08 | maybe business cards to hand out to those customers. Well we
can have all three of those in one file, nice and convenient,
| | 01:15 | nice and easy to find and organize.
| | 01:17 | So we are going to talk about creating multiple pages first and
then as we move through the lessons in this chapter we'll look at
| | 01:23 | modifying the page layout and using those Guidelines and Snap to
options to help you when it comes to adding objects to the page.
| | 01:31 | So I have got a one pager here and we already know from our tour of
the user interface that down below in the bottom-left corner here
| | 01:37 | I've got navigation buttons.
| | 01:39 | I am on page one of one. The navigation buttons are not
selectable right now because I only have one page, but what's
| | 01:45 | important is that I have got these little plus signs on the left and
the right for adding pages. So in our scenario where we want to create
| | 01:52 | a business card and a menu we need two more pages.
| | 01:56 | So we have the option now of inserting those pages before or after
the current page, so if I click this little plus sign on the left,
| | 02:03 | I get a new page one, page one is selected.
| | 02:06 | It's blank by default and if I go to page two by
clicking on the Page 2 tab, I see my original page.
| | 02:14 | Now if I wanted a page after this I click on the plus sign over
here on the right hand side of the navigation buttons. Now I've got a
| | 02:21 | Page 3 which is also blank. I have got a Page 2
tab down here but can't I see the Page 1 tab currently.
| | 02:27 | Notice I am on Page 3 of 3 and now I can use my navigation
buttons to move through the pages one at a time. I can move
| | 02:35 | right to the end by clicking the arrow with the line
after it or right to the beginning by clicking the arrow
| | 02:40 | with the line in front of it
| | 02:42 | and if I want to go directly to a page
I can click on the tab if I can see it.
| | 02:46 | Now if you have many, many pages and you want to be able to see
more tabs you can also click and drag this little border here
| | 02:52 | between your horizontal scroll bar
| | 02:55 | and the page tabs. I'll click and drag this off to the right a
little bit so if needed to add more pages I'd be able to see
| | 03:01 | those tabs down here.
| | 03:03 | The other thing you can do is change the name of your tabs
| | 03:07 | and a neat little trick with anything, including
your page tabs, is to right click with your mouse.
| | 03:13 | So clicking the right mouse button displays the menu. I'm going
to go Page 1 here and right click. Notice I have some options here.
| | 03:20 | I can rename the Page. It's currently called Page 1.
| | 03:23 | I can insert another after or before this page, I can
duplicate this Page, delete the Page if I don't want it,
| | 03:31 | switch the orientation and use Publish Page to
ConceptShare, something we will talk about later on.
| | 03:37 | Well, let's say I want to delete this page. I'm going to
delete it right now, removes that, I'm down to two pages.
| | 03:42 | I am on Page 1. I want to insert the page after.
| | 03:45 | Now we also move pages around too if we wanted to just by clicking
and dragging these tabs, but now I have got Page 1 as my sign.
| | 03:52 | Page 2 is going to be my menu and Page 3 is going to be
my Bus. card. So I am going to go back to Page 2 and
| | 04:00 | right click again. This time choose Rename Page
| | 04:04 | and all I have to do type in whatever I want here.
I'm going to type in Window Sign like so and click OK.
| | 04:12 | And that's the name of my tab now, Page 1.
| | 04:15 | I'm going to right click on Page 2 and rename it, even though there's
nothing there right now, this is the page that I want to reserve for my menu
| | 04:22 | so click OK
| | 04:25 | and that's my menu tab and I am going to right
click on Page 3, rename that one to Bus. Card,
| | 04:33 | I can hit Enter or click OK and that's locked in. So now I've got
my Windows Sign, my menu and my Bus. Card page's ready to work with.
| | 04:43 | So once you have got your multiple pages and you are comfortable
moving around those pages, the next thing we will need to explore
| | 04:49 | is changing the page layouts. I mentioned earlier
| | 04:52 | that we can have different page layout for different pages
in a single file and I love that feature and that's exactly
| | 04:59 | what we are going to explore in the next lesson.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Modifying page layout| 00:00 | Continuing our work now with multiple pages in a CorelDRAW
file, we're going to focus in now on Page layouts
| | 00:06 | and what's really cool about CorelDRAW
is not only can you have multiple pages,
| | 00:09 | but you can also have multiple different page layouts.
| | 00:14 | So this is ideal for our scenario where we want one file that is
going to contain our Window Sign, our menu, as well as our Bus.
| | 00:21 | Card. Now if you have been following along
we're still working with our Bistro_sign here.
| | 00:26 | If you have jumped to this lesson and you have got
the exercise files and you would like to follow along,
| | 00:31 | you can go to the Lesson2 folder to open
up Bistro_sign3, it's a CorelDRAW file
| | 00:36 | and you will have what I have, which is a three page document.
| | 00:39 | We have got our Window Sign, we have our menu and our Bus.
| | 00:42 | Card down below, and notice that the menu and the Bus.
| | 00:46 | Card really don't have anything on them yet.
| | 00:48 | I'm going to go back to the first page
and just take a look at this page layout.
| | 00:53 | This is based on one of those templates that we saw in a
previous Lesson and if you look at the ruler at the top,
| | 00:58 | this is 24 inches wide and 36 inches tall,
this is not your average sheet of paper.
| | 01:05 | Now it's obviously too big for a menu
and definitely too big for a Bus.
| | 01:09 | card. So we're going to need multiple page layouts.
| | 01:12 | So if we go over to the menu tab and we decide we want
to change this page layout to the standard 8.5 x 11,
| | 01:19 | so this will be a menu that will fit on the table.
| | 01:22 | We go up to our Page Layout or Paper Size Type dropdown, and
let's just choose Letter, I want you to see what happens here.
| | 01:29 | Alright now we're working with an 8.5 x 11 sheet of paper.
| | 01:32 | If I go over to my Window Sign, look what's happened,
it's also changed the Page Layout for this page
| | 01:39 | and now my sign doesn't fit on the page, so I better undo that.
| | 01:43 | When I click the Undo button I'm
back to Page 2, I go over to Page 1
| | 01:47 | and you can see everything fits nicely, okay, so we're safe.
| | 01:51 | But I want to be able to change the menu and the Bus.
| | 01:53 | Card page layout while maintaining this
page layout here for my Window Sign.
| | 01:58 | So back we go to the menu by clicking on the menu tab and now
what's very important is that we click on this little button
| | 02:04 | up here on our Property Bar to Apply
Page Layout to Current Page Only.
| | 02:09 | So it won't affect the other pages like it does by
default, that's why this button appears selected.
| | 02:15 | So we click on this button and now we can make our changes,
we can go up to our Paper Size and Type, click the dropdown,
| | 02:23 | choose Letter, you can see I got my 8.5 x 11 sheet of paper.
| | 02:27 | If I go back to my Window Sign, perfect,
it's still 24 inches wide by 36 inches tall.
| | 02:35 | Now our Bus.
| | 02:36 | Card is going to be a different shape and
size, so we're going to go down to the Bus.
| | 02:39 | Card tab here and you can see it was unaffected by that change
to the menu as well, it's still way too big, 24'' x 36''.
| | 02:48 | So we come to our dropdown here, I just want you to see that
there is a scroll bar down here that's letting you choose
| | 02:54 | from Multiple Preformatted Paper Sizes and Types
and look at that one of them is a Business Card.
| | 03:02 | So when I click on it look at the size of this
one it's actually only three-and-half inches wide
| | 03:07 | and it's well just about two inches tall.
| | 03:11 | The other thing I want you to notice is that it's a
different orientation, it's a Landscape not Portrait.
| | 03:18 | Clicking the Portrait button would flip it on its end.
| | 03:21 | So we'll typically want to work with
business cards in the Landscape orientation.
| | 03:25 | And because we have already clicked on the
button that allows us to Apply Page Layouts
| | 03:29 | to Current Page Only are other pages are not affected.
| | 03:32 | If I click on the menu, it's still 8.5 x 11, if I go back
to Page 1, you are going to see that it's still 24'' x 36''.
| | 03:41 | So those are the multiple page layouts that
are different from each of the different pages
| | 03:46 | in our file and that's the beauty of CorelDRAW.
| | 03:51 | So definitely we would want to save those changes because
we're going to start working very shortly with actual objects
| | 03:57 | on those pages and now that we have got our page layouts,
our paper size, our orientation is set correctly for each
| | 04:04 | of the individual pages, we're ready to move on.
| | 04:07 | So in the next lesson before we actually creating objects we're
going to talk about one more important feature when working
| | 04:12 | with pages and that's your Guidelines and your Snap to options.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using guidelines and snap-to options| 00:00 | If you have been following along with me in this
Chapter, you are comfortable not creating multiple pages
| | 00:04 | within a single CorelDRAW file, you also know exactly how
| | 00:08 | to create different page layouts for
those different pages in CorelDRAW.
| | 00:12 | So now it's time to talk about one more feature before we start
creating and that is Guidelines as well as Snap to options
| | 00:20 | because Guidelines are really going to help you when it comes
to lining up the objects you create or insert into your file.
| | 00:27 | Now you may have noticed from the very beginning when
we started using this file which is based on a template
| | 00:33 | that there are certain lines showing up on the left hand
side, at the top and the bottom all the way down the left,
| | 00:38 | same thing across the top and across the bottom,
the right hand side, these are called Guidelines
| | 00:44 | and these Guidelines are actually set at the top,
bottom, left, and right hand side of the page
| | 00:49 | to make sure everything stays inside those boundaries.
| | 00:53 | Well, the first thing I want to show you is
that from the View menu you can choose whether
| | 00:57 | or not you are going to view those Guidelines or not.
| | 01:00 | Guidelines are typically turned on by
default, you see a check mark here,
| | 01:04 | if I click on Guidelines I don't see those lines anymore.
| | 01:08 | Now they are still there they are just invisible,
if I go back up to View down to Guidelines,
| | 01:13 | I toggle it back on and there's the Guidelines there.
| | 01:16 | So how did they get there?
| | 01:18 | Well, I'm glad you asked, we're going
to go down to Page 2 of this document.
| | 01:22 | If you are following along with me you are still working with
our Bistro_Sign here, if you jumped to lesson though and you want
| | 01:28 | to get all caught up, no problem, if you got
the exercise files go to the Lesson2 folder
| | 01:33 | and open up Bistro_Sign4.cdr you will have exactly what I have
and when we come down here to the second tab, now labeled menu
| | 01:42 | and click on it there's our new blank page that we created in a
previous lesson, the page layout was changed to an 8.5 x 11 sheet
| | 01:49 | of paper and typically when you have a blank page like this you
are ready to start creating, adding content, creating content,
| | 01:57 | and when you do that if you need things to
line up perfectly Guidelines can really help.
| | 02:01 | So how do we get those Guidelines in there, we go to the Rulers
on the left and across the top of your screen to add Guidelines.
| | 02:09 | When you add a Guideline from the top ruler
you are going to get a horizontal Guideline.
| | 02:14 | So let's click and drag just from
anywhere around the ruler down to
| | 02:18 | about the 10.5 inch mark, I'm going
to go right there and release.
| | 02:23 | I now have a new Guidelines and this will help
me when lining things up and not going too far
| | 02:28 | above that border when I start adding objects.
| | 02:31 | Let's add another one to the bottom, so again we go up to this
top ruler click and drag all the way down to the 0.5 inch mark
| | 02:38 | and I'm going to let go just -- not in the right place here,
and if that ever happens, no problem just go back to it
| | 02:44 | when you see the double arrow you can click and drag to
move it and move it right to the 0.5 inch mark and let go
| | 02:50 | and I'm just looking over here on the ruler
to make sure I'm right at the 0.5 inch mark.
| | 02:54 | Now we can also add some Vertical Guidelines
by going to our ruler on the left, same thing.
| | 03:00 | I want my menu items to go down the center.
| | 03:02 | So I'm going to go over here to the 2 inch mark and
when I get right on the 2 inch mark I will let go.
| | 03:08 | Notice how it turns red, it's currently selected, we
can go to any of these Guidelines and when we click
| | 03:13 | on them they appear red to indicate they are selected.
| | 03:16 | Just click anyone on your page and none of them turned red.
| | 03:19 | Let's add one more now.
| | 03:20 | we're going to go over here to the 6.5
inch mark, I'm going to go right there,
| | 03:25 | that's 2 inches off the right hand
side of my 8.5 inch piece of paper.
| | 03:30 | And now I have got this little area,
I have got it all cordoned off.
| | 03:33 | I'm ready to start adding my menu items, my Objects, that's
exactly what we're going to be doing in the next lesson,
| | 03:40 | but just before we do that, another cool feature
to make sure that things always stay lined
| | 03:45 | up on those Guidelines is the Snap to function.
| | 03:49 | Now when you are creating objects and you want them lined up
say side by side, when you move one object close to another one
| | 03:55 | by default, it's going to look like
there is a magnet between the two
| | 03:59 | and they will just snap together, that's called Snap to Objects.
| | 04:03 | Well when we choose Snap to Guidelines we get that same affect
and notice up here on the toolbar there is a Snap to dropdown,
| | 04:09 | and when I click on it I have got Snap to Grid, and now if
you want to display your Grid it's kind of like graph paper.
| | 04:16 | You can have objects snapping to the Grid not typically
turned on by default, keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Y.
| | 04:22 | Snap to Guidelines is currently not turned on and that's the one
I do want to turn on, so clicking Snap to Guidelines turns it
| | 04:29 | on when I go back to the Snap to, it has a check mark next to it.
| | 04:33 | Snap to Objects already had a check mark Alt+Z is the
keyboard shortcut for turning that on and off, it's a toggle.
| | 04:40 | Each time you hold down Alt and press the letter
Z you will be turning it on and off, on and off.
| | 04:45 | There's also something called Dynamic Guides that can be
snapped to as well but we're going to focus in on these two
| | 04:50 | for now, Snap to Guidelines and Snap to Objects.
| | 04:53 | So with those selected I click down here and
I'm now ready to start adding those objects.
| | 04:57 | I just want to show you something here.
| | 04:59 | If we got to the View menu, you will notice that all of
those options also appear down here, there's my Guidelines
| | 05:05 | and down below there are Snap to Grid,
Guidelines, Objects and Dynamic Guides.
| | 05:11 | If I click on any one of these Guidelines to select it,
I also see some different options on my Property Bar.
| | 05:17 | Notice that this button here is depressed, it looks like
it is pushed in, it's the Snap to Guidelines feature.
| | 05:23 | So I can turn it off and back on right from there as well and
I have got the Preset Guidelines that can be turned on and off
| | 05:31 | and when I click on it, the Options dialog shows up, Corel
Presets, I can have One Inch Margins, the Bleed Area,
| | 05:38 | Page Borders, all of these are presets that I can choose
to turn on or off just by selecting the check box.
| | 05:43 | So I'm going to go to my Page Borders and click
OK, and you can see I have also got Guidelines now.
| | 05:51 | The Page Border shows up all the way around the outside here.
| | 05:54 | So I have got all the Guidelines I need.
| | 05:56 | What happens when you don't want a Guideline?
| | 05:57 | Let's add one more.
| | 05:58 | I'm going to click and drag from my left ruler right to over
here about the 5 inch mark and I'm going to drag another one
| | 06:06 | to the four-and-quarter inch mark which is
the center of an 8.5 x 11 sheet of paper.
| | 06:13 | So I have got this one extra one here.
| | 06:14 | To delete it, just click on it, you
know it's selected when it turns red,
| | 06:18 | hit your Delete key on the keyboard
and it's gone, as simple as that.
| | 06:22 | So I think that's all I need for Guidelines, if you are
going to be following along in the next chapter we're going
| | 06:27 | to be using this file, you might want your changes.
| | 06:30 | I will have a new version of this
file in the next chapter as well.
| | 06:34 | So let's move on now to actually creating here
in CorelDRAW by creating your own objects.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
3. Creating ObjectsDrawing basic shapes| 00:00 | Hi, this is the chapter where the fun begins.
| | 00:03 | we're going to be talking about drawing objects in this Chapter.
| | 00:06 | we'll start out in this Lesson with some basic shapes, and
we'll move on to more advanced shapes in the next lesson.
| | 00:12 | we'll look at the Perfect Shapes Collection, drawing lines and
curves and then manipulating, modifying any of those shapes,
| | 00:19 | lines, and curves using some note editing techniques.
| | 00:22 | But right now you can see I have closed every thing
up, we're ready to start drawing some basic shapes,
| | 00:26 | so we need a brand new blank canvas so to speak.
| | 00:29 | So I'm going to go up here to my New button,
Ctrl+N on your key board is the shortcut,
| | 00:34 | give it a click there's my New blank page the default settings,
8.5X11, it's portrait, I'm going to flip it on its side by going
| | 00:41 | up to my Property Bar here, and click Landscape,
and now I have got a nice drawing area.
| | 00:46 | So let's experiment now with some basic shapes.
| | 00:49 | we're going to come down to our Toolbox here on
the left, and start with our basic Rectangle tool,
| | 00:55 | 'F6' on your keyboard is the shortcut to access this tool.
| | 00:58 | One click activates it, now when you
move your mouse pointer on to the page,
| | 01:02 | you can see it's changed from the
Pick tool, to the Rectangle tool.
| | 01:06 | Also take a look down at the very bottom on you Status
Bar, there are some HINTS down there and how to use this.
| | 01:11 | For example, double clicking on the Rectangle
tool creates what we call a Page Frame.
| | 01:16 | I will show you that in a moment.
| | 01:17 | Control, while dragging to draw a rectangle constrains
it, so you always end up with a perfect square.
| | 01:24 | And if you hold down your Shift key and drag to draw a rectangle,
it will be drawn from the center, and that's sometimes helpful
| | 01:30 | of you got multiple objects one on top of the
other and you want them perfectly aligned.
| | 01:34 | So let's experiment with these options.
| | 01:36 | First of all, holding no keys down, let's just go up to the
top left corner here, we'll click and drag across and down,
| | 01:43 | and what we should get is your basic rectangle.
| | 01:46 | So I'm going to go right to about the
four inch mark on my ruler at the top,
| | 01:50 | and down to about the six inch mark, those
help me get the size I'm looking for.
| | 01:54 | When I release, I got my brand new rectangle, not much to that.
| | 01:58 | If I want a perfect square, remember, down at the bottom we
have our HINT, hold down your Ctrl key, click and drag across
| | 02:04 | and down, now you are getting a perfect square.
| | 02:07 | It won't let you draw anything, but a perfect square, no matter
where you move your mouse pointer, but as you click and drag out
| | 02:12 | and down, once you have got the size you are
looking for, like go with the mouse first,
| | 02:17 | and then your Ctrl key, and you will a perfect square, very nice.
| | 02:21 | Now like I said before, if you wanted to fill the page in the
background with a rectangle, just go over to the rectangle tool
| | 02:29 | and give it a double click, watch what happens.
| | 02:32 | See the handles around the outside here, now if
I wanted to really show you what's happened here,
| | 02:38 | I would go over to my Color palette and choose a color.
| | 02:40 | I'm going to click on this Bright Red here, and you can see I
can still see my other rectangles, even though I drew them first,
| | 02:47 | the big rectangle is in the background,
it's on my page filling the entire page
| | 02:52 | and straight way to add a background to any of your work.
| | 02:55 | I'm going to hit Delete on my keyboard, because it's still
selected I can tell, by the little handles around the outside.
| | 03:02 | Hitting my Delete key on the keyboard
removes that background, there we go.
| | 03:05 | I'm still using the Rectangle tool, now what if
I wanted to draw a rectangle but on an angle?
| | 03:12 | Now you can draw a rectangle and rotate it after
the fact, I'm going to go up to my Pick tool here,
| | 03:17 | and I'm going to click on this bottom square down here,
and I'm going to rotate it by clicking again in the center.
| | 03:24 | Now my handles have changed to rotations handles and skew
handles, I'm going to rotate it just to about 45 degrees.
| | 03:31 | Now, you will be able to see the actual degrees
up on your Property Bar as you are rotating.
| | 03:37 | So I'm going to go and try get as
close to 45, that's 45 right there.
| | 03:41 | I see 45 degree up here, of course,
I could have typed that in as well.
| | 03:45 | I'm going to click again on the rectangle which is a square, and
just move it over here a little bit down and towards the center.
| | 03:53 | Now I could have just drawn that right from
the beginning by using a different tool.
| | 03:59 | Notice that the Rectangle tool is what we call a flyout, there
is that little black triangle in the bottom right corner,
| | 04:05 | indicating there are some tools hiding behind this
Rectangle tool, and if I hold my mouse button down,
| | 04:10 | there is something called the Three Point Rectangle.
| | 04:13 | So when I click on that, now all I have to
do, is click and drag on the angle I want,
| | 04:18 | and then a third click at the end
is going to complete my rectangle.
| | 04:22 | So let's say I wanted it to go right along this
angle here, when I see the note highlighted I click,
| | 04:28 | and I'm dragging now you can see, I can move my
mouse around till I get the angle I'm looking for,
| | 04:32 | but I want a perfect angle here,
and actually I want the same width.
| | 04:36 | So I let go, and now all I have to do, that was the
second click, is just move to the location where I want
| | 04:44 | to release this and create my new rectangle on the angle.
| | 04:48 | So I'm going to go right to, right about there and click.
| | 04:53 | So it's perfectly on the 45, because
I already had an object rotated to 45.
| | 04:57 | I was able to add a rectangle, same width as my square, on
the same angle, thanks to the Three Point Rectangle tool.
| | 05:04 | I'm going to go up to my Pick tool now, and
I'm going to click on my page, to deselect.
| | 05:09 | So that is your rectangles and squares, how about ellipses?
| | 05:14 | Now ellipses are really just ovals and if you
constrain them they become perfect circles.
| | 05:18 | So that's the next tool down here in our Toolbox, I'm going
to click on the Ellipse tool, 'F7' is the key board shortcut,
| | 05:25 | and if I come up here to the top right hand side of my
screen, click and drag, you can see I'm drawing an ellipse.
| | 05:31 | When I let go, it's drawn, of course, I have got these handles
and we'll be talking about modifying the shape and the size
| | 05:38 | and the location of your objects a little bit later on.
| | 05:41 | Right now we're just drawing these basic shapes.
| | 05:43 | If I want a perfect circle, hold down Ctrl, click and
drag, and you can see I have got that perfect circle.
| | 05:50 | Now you can see I'm dragging across
to the right and down to get my shape.
| | 05:54 | I'm going to let go here, hit my Delete key to remove that.
| | 05:58 | This time I'm going to go from the center, I'm going
to hold down my Shift key, and watch what happens now.
| | 06:03 | I'm actually drawing from that starting point,
that's my center, and if I hold down Shift and Ctrl,
| | 06:10 | I'm drawing from the center and getting a perfect circle.
| | 06:14 | When I let go off my mouse button first,
and then the keys on the keyboard,
| | 06:18 | I'm left with my perfect circle that
was drawn from the center here.
| | 06:21 | One of the neat things about draws, if I want to move this out of
the way, I don't have to go up to my Pick tool and switch over.
| | 06:27 | Let's say, when I moved to the center here, my mouse pointer
changes from the Ellipse tool to that four sided arrow,
| | 06:33 | which means I can just drag it here out of the way.
| | 06:36 | I'm going to click right in the center of my ellipse, it becomes
selected and I can move it out of the way a little bit as well.
| | 06:41 | Because I'm going to work down here now with
another way that we can draw an ellipse, yes,
| | 06:47 | there is a flyout for the Ellipse tool as well.
| | 06:49 | So I'll click on the button, hold it down,
and there is my Three Point Ellipse tool,
| | 06:53 | works just like the Three Point Rectangle tool.
| | 06:56 | we'll give it a click, all we have
to do now is to choose our angle.
| | 07:00 | So I'm going to click and drag just like I did for my square.
| | 07:03 | I'm going to click and drag along this angle, and
when I reach the other note, I'm going to let go,
| | 07:09 | and now all I have to do is, just click and drag.
| | 07:12 | You can see what's happening here, it gets perfectly on that
angle inside those other shapes, and when I click to let go,
| | 07:19 | perfect, a nice looking ellipse drawn on the 45 degree angle,
| | 07:24 | just because I already had a shape on
that angle, I was able to follow along.
| | 07:27 | But of course, you don't have follow along another shape.
| | 07:29 | You can click, drag at any angle you want, another drag and
click to finish it off, creates another ellipse on the angle.
| | 07:38 | I'm going to hit my Delete key to remove that one.
| | 07:41 | So you can see what's happened over here.
| | 07:42 | we're going to get into this later on when we
start combining multiple objects to create one.
| | 07:48 | So you can see I've almost got a
bullet shape here, and if I wanted to,
| | 07:51 | I can start coloring that and turn it into an actual bullet.
| | 07:54 | So that's kind of neat, how we can create shapes using multiple
shapes and thanks to these two basic tools, your Rectangle
| | 08:01 | and your Ellipse tool, you got a great head start.
| | 08:05 | As we move on to the next Lesson, we're going to
explore some of the more Advanced Drawing tools,
| | 08:10 | and we'll start with that Polygon tool that appears
in the Toolbox here, underneath our Ellipse tool.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Drawing more advanced shapes| 00:00 | If you were following along in the previous lesson,
we drew some basic shapes, rectangles, ellipses.
| | 00:06 | We looked at some of the tools that allow us to make adjustments.
| | 00:09 | Now we're going to move to some more advanced
shapes, and don't be scared by the word advanced.
| | 00:13 | We still just click and drag with our mouse to draw these shapes,
| | 00:17 | but the end result is a more advanced
shape than a basic rectangle or ellipse.
| | 00:22 | So if you are jumping to this lesson, you new a brand new
document opened here, you can click the New button up here.
| | 00:29 | I already have a document from the previous lesson.
| | 00:31 | If you were following along, follow with me down to the bottom
and click the plus sign after Page 1 of 1 to insert a New Page.
| | 00:38 | I'm going to go up to my Pick tool here,
this gives me a Property Bar that allows me
| | 00:43 | to change this over to Landscape, so I want to do that.
| | 00:47 | Now I have got a nice new drawing area, like I said, if
you skip to this lesson, just click to your New button
| | 00:53 | and change over to Landscape to start with a new canvas.
| | 00:57 | Alright, we're going to explore some of the more advanced tools
now by going back to our Toolbox, and just below the Ellipse tool
| | 01:03 | where we left off in the previous lesson, is our Polygon tool.
| | 01:07 | And when we click on that, all we have to do is come over
to the drawing area, click and drag to draw our polygon,
| | 01:15 | which happens to be by default a
five sided polygon or a pentagon.
| | 01:19 | It can wide and short, it can be tall and skinny.
| | 01:24 | If you hold down your Ctrl key while you are clicking
and dragging, it will be five equal sides in our polygon.
| | 01:32 | Let go off your mouse button first.
| | 01:33 | then the keyboard to keep that shape constrained.
| | 01:37 | Of course, this is just the default, if we go up our
Property Bar, we do have some options and we'll get
| | 01:43 | into modifying your objects a little bit later on.
| | 01:46 | Even in this Chapter when we get to the Shape tool, but right
now you can see there are some simple changes we can make.
| | 01:51 | If you want more than five sides, maybe you want to
draw a stop sign, well, you need eight sides then.
| | 01:56 | So you bump that up by clicking the up arrow, or you can
come in here and just highlight what's there and type in 8.
| | 02:02 | When you hit Return or Enter on your
keyboard, you get your octagon.
| | 02:07 | So for us doing our stop sign, we probably just have
to rotate this slightly to have a good head start.
| | 02:13 | we'll be talking about rotating and so on
later on, as we move through these lessons.
| | 02:17 | So there's our basic octagon which
we created using a Polygon tool.
| | 02:22 | Now the Polygon tool does have a little black triangle in
the bottom right hand corner, indicating there is a flyout,
| | 02:27 | there are some more tools in here, so when
I click and hold this down, look at that,
| | 02:31 | we have got Star, Complex Star, Graph Paper, and Spiral.
| | 02:35 | So let's go through these.
| | 02:36 | we'll start with the regular Star.
| | 02:38 | So when I click on the Star, it's now attached to my pointer,
I just have to click and drag across and down, again,
| | 02:45 | I can adjust the width and the height, make it tall and
skinny as I click and drag, or if want to constrain it,
| | 02:51 | so it's perfectly symmetrical, hold down your Ctrl key, click
and drag, and when you have got the size you are looking for,
| | 02:57 | let go off the mouse button first, then your
keyboard button and you have got your star.
| | 03:02 | Again, the default is 5 points, but we can manipulate that.
| | 03:06 | There's the five there, if I wanted to create more of the star
burst, I might want to bump that up clicking the up arrow.
| | 03:12 | I'm going to go all the way up to
12, you can see that star burst now.
| | 03:16 | I can also adjust the Sharpness, notice it is set to 53 here
for me by default, meaning that the difference between the point
| | 03:24 | at the bottom and the top can be
adjusted to create some Sharpness.
| | 03:27 | So if I bump that up, you can see now that the
points are actually pointier and sharper therefore.
| | 03:33 | Of course, I could come in here and
just type in any number I want.
| | 03:36 | I'm going to type in 65.
| | 03:39 | and hit Enter.
| | 03:40 | There we go, there is my star burst, start doing
some cool things with that, like node editing,
| | 03:45 | we'll do that later on in this chapter,
adding some color and special effects,
| | 03:49 | all of that to be done as we move through these lessons.
| | 03:52 | Right now we're just drawing the shapes though, So let's
go back to our Toolbox, click that button hold it down
| | 03:58 | and check out the Complex star now the Complex star is
something that can be drawn just by clicking and dragging,
| | 04:05 | that otherwise without this tool would take a lot of
manipulation in the nodes in a regular star or even a Polygon.
| | 04:13 | But now that we have got the Complex Star, we
just click and drag and if you want to constrain,
| | 04:18 | hold down your Ctrl key and let go off the mouse button first.
| | 04:21 | You can see, really if look closely at this, it's really just
three triangles, one on top of the other and rotated slightly.
| | 04:30 | So I could have drawn that myself by creating those
triangles and rotating them, but thanks to the Complex star,
| | 04:36 | I didn't have to do any of that, and it's
very easy to adjust the number of points.
| | 04:41 | If I want to bump that up or bump it down or type in the
number I'm looking for, I'm going for seven and adjust,
| | 04:48 | just like we could with the regular Star, the Sharpness, if
we wanted to, you can bump that up or down, as you can see,
| | 04:56 | choose about a size I can go with my seven points here.
| | 04:58 | Of course, I can do a lot more with node editing.
| | 05:02 | I'm just kind of building you up for that
Lesson which happens at the end of this Chapter.
| | 05:06 | Let's go back to that same tool now, the Complex
Star tool, and go down to one called Graph Paper.
| | 05:13 | Graph Paper allows you to create a grid, now you can create a
grid, you can create a checker board or whatever that's you want
| | 05:19 | to do, it will look like a table, but this is
not the Table tool that's new to CorelDRAWX4.
| | 05:26 | This has always been around, this is our Graph Paper, when we
click and drag across and down, we're going to see our grid.
| | 05:32 | Now I have used this before, so you can see the number of columns
| | 05:35 | and rows for me is six and six, you
might have something different.
| | 05:39 | I'm going to press delete to delete it, and I'm going to
change this now to, I'm going to go down to four and three.
| | 05:49 | So I have got four columns and three rows.
| | 05:53 | Now when I click and drag, you can see that's exactly
what I get, that might be your default, but like I said,
| | 05:58 | if you have used it before, it remembers your settings,
I'm going to bump this up now, let's go the other way,
| | 06:05 | all the way up to ten by ten, and now
when I click and drag, what could I get?
| | 06:12 | My 10X10 grid.
| | 06:14 | Very easy to do, just click and drag, and of course,
using your Ctrl key, you will get that perfect square.
| | 06:19 | I'm going to hit Delete to remove
it, hold down Ctrl, click and drag,
| | 06:24 | and that's a perfect square now made
up of ten rows and ten columns.
| | 06:30 | One more to check out here I'm going to click and hold
my Graph Paper tool now down, go down to the Spiral,
| | 06:36 | and I'm going to just click and drag over here,
holding down my Ctrl key to draw that Spiral.
| | 06:41 | This is something in the past you could draw
manually, you can still do it, but of course,
| | 06:46 | it's going to take a lot of pin point accuracy to draw a line
that's curved like this ,you would probably have do a lot
| | 06:52 | of node editing and so on, but with the
Spiral, just click and drag to draw it.
| | 06:57 | You can also adjust how complex the revolutions are.
| | 07:00 | If you want to bump that up for example, let's try that now.
| | 07:03 | Click and drag, you can see, as I hold down my Ctrl key here
to keep it perfectly symmetrical, that's a little more complex
| | 07:10 | than the first one I drew I'm going to go back to my Pick tool
here, and just create a little a little bit of room by clicking
| | 07:15 | on my grid down here, my 10X10, and hit the Delete key.
| | 07:19 | I have got some drawings space, because I do
want to show you one more that's kind of cool.
| | 07:23 | It's hiding up here above our Rectangle tool.
| | 07:26 | Not the Smart Fill tool, we'll check that out later, but if we
hold this down to access the flyout, it's called Smart Drawing.
| | 07:34 | If I click on that, I get a pencil now for a pointer,
meaning, I can sketch this out this is really handy
| | 07:40 | if you use a Tablet PC and you have got a Stylus.
| | 07:44 | Now all you have to do is just sketch out the shapes and
according to some shape recognition technology built into this,
| | 07:51 | the shape you are after will be drawn for you,
according to what you sketch, and of course,
| | 07:56 | look up here on our Property Bar we can adjust the Level
of Shape Recognition and even the Smoothing of our curves.
| | 08:03 | So for example, if I'm not very good with my mouse at drawing a
perfect circle, I'm might want to set this to the highest level,
| | 08:10 | and now I'm going to come over here and try and draw a circle.
| | 08:13 | Now it's just very important, it doesn't have to be a
perfect circle, but it does have to join up at the end
| | 08:18 | and when you let go, you can see
mine was just a little bit too odd.
| | 08:22 | So I would do some node editing here.
| | 08:25 | Let's try a triangle, up, down and over, when I let go, that's
better, that's a nice three sided triangle, a rectangle, click,
| | 08:36 | drag across down and back up, and of course
it has to join up, and if doesn't quite,
| | 08:41 | we have got the highest recognition level
set and I get a nice looking rectangle.
| | 08:46 | I'm going to try once more with the circle, and you can
see how rough that is, I ended up with a square there.
| | 08:55 | It's very rough with the mouse, if
you got the Stylus it's a lot easier.
| | 08:59 | I'm going to go back to my Pick tool, and I'm going to
marquee select all of these by clicking and dragging across,
| | 09:07 | hit my Delete key, don't want that one either.
| | 09:09 | Now I have got a bigger drawing area I'm going to go
back to my Smart Drawing tool and with a bigger area.
| | 09:16 | Let's see if I can that circle or ellipse,
not bad, takes a little bit of practice.
| | 09:26 | So I encourage you to trey this out with you Smart Drawing tool.
| | 09:31 | It's a great way if you need to sketch things out, to create
the shapes that you are after, maybe you are in a meeting,
| | 09:37 | and you are doing a drawing, you can even do arrows for
example, if I click and drag a straight line and create my arrow
| | 09:43 | and let go, it creates a nice looking arrow for me.
| | 09:47 | And of course, you do have your Property Bar for Smoothing, you
can even adjust the Thickness of the lines when you draw them,
| | 09:53 | like I just did for that arrow, lots
of options and we're going to continue
| | 09:56 | to use these tools as we move through the upcoming lessons.
| | 10:00 | But of course, the Shape tool is going to come in
very handy for editing the nodes within a shape.
| | 10:06 | Just before we get to that though, we need to talk
about Perfect Shapes and drawing lines and curves.
| | 10:12 | So we're going to start in the next
Lesson, with our Perfect Shapes Collection.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Perfect Shapes collection| 00:00 | If you have been following along with me in this Chapter, you
should be feeling comfortable now drawing some simple shapes,
| | 00:05 | as well as more advanced shapes like
we did in the previous Lesson.
| | 00:09 | But just to let you know, there's a collection of shapes
called the Perfect Shapes that will give you a nice head start.
| | 00:15 | These are shapes you could draw manually yourself taking
a lot time and effort, or you can get a nice head start
| | 00:21 | by accessing these Perfect Shapes and
there are several categories of them.
| | 00:24 | That's what we're going to look at in this
Lesson, and we need a New blank page to do that.
| | 00:28 | So if you have been following along,
we're on page 2, that's where we left off.
| | 00:33 | we're going to add a New Page by clicking the plus sign
after Page 2 of 2 and we want to flip that on its side,
| | 00:39 | we'll do that momentarily, let's go our Pick tool.
| | 00:42 | If you have jumped to this Lesson, you will need a
new drawing page, so you can go up your New button,
| | 00:48 | and then all of us can come over to our Property Bar here
and click the Landscape button to turn our page on its side.
| | 00:54 | So whether you have one or three pages or two, it
really doesn't matter as long as we got a blank page,
| | 00:58 | turned on its side here on Landscape, we're ready
now to start drawing some of our perfect shapes.
| | 01:03 | We access those from our Toolbox, over here you can see
grouping of shapes called Basic Shapes, and when I click
| | 01:10 | and hold this button down, sure enough Basic Shapes is at the
top, but there are other categories, there's Arrows Shapes,
| | 01:16 | Flow Charting Symbols in here, Banners and Callouts as well.
| | 01:20 | So let's go through these.
| | 01:21 | we'll start with our Basic Shapes, and when I click
on it, you can see it's attached to my mouse pointer.
| | 01:26 | What am I about to draw, oh, that's
actually up on your Property Bar.
| | 01:30 | If you look up here, you can see that this is
a perfect shape, looks like a parallelogram.
| | 01:35 | If I click the dropdown, sure enough you can see
there's a bunch of different shapes to choose from here.
| | 01:40 | I'm going to go to this one here, the Isosceles
Triangle, and I'm going to click and drag,
| | 01:46 | and you can see, I get this Right Angled Triangle.
| | 01:49 | If I hold down my Ctrl key, I get the isosceles triangle.
| | 01:53 | So it's up to you, just draw the triangle
let go, and you have drawn your triangle.
| | 01:58 | So again, we could have used the Polygon tool
chosen three sides but it's already in here.
| | 02:03 | Some of these other ones would be very hard to draw.
| | 02:06 | For example, let's go over to the 'no' sign here, click and
drag, holding down Ctrl to keep that perfectly round down below,
| | 02:14 | and now, that would have taken some effort
combining shapes together to create the no sign.
| | 02:19 | Notice also that there is one little red node
showing up in there, and as I move over it,
| | 02:24 | you can see my mouse pointer changes from the cross hair to the
black arrow, that means I can edit that node known as a gliff,
| | 02:31 | and that's useful for creating thinness
or thickness of the actual shapes.
| | 02:37 | In this case I'm going to go out to the
right here a little bit, and let go,
| | 02:40 | and you can see I have made the thin line
appear here, all the way around my shape.
| | 02:45 | I drag that the other direction in towards
the center, I get a much thicker line.
| | 02:49 | And speaking of lines, on the Property
Bar you can choose different line styles.
| | 02:53 | If you don't like a solid line, you can go to dots and dashes.
| | 02:57 | I'm going to try this one down here, dashes, it's very hard to
see zoomed out like this, but it's definitely got those dashes
| | 03:04 | in there, and if we create some Thickness
,by going to the dropdown here,
| | 03:07 | I'm going to go to 1.5 millimeters, that
is the idea right there, kind of cool.
| | 03:12 | Let's try one more of these Basic Shapes.
| | 03:15 | I'm going to click the dropdown and go to my Happy Face.
| | 03:18 | I'm going to come down to the bottom right
corner, hold down Ctrl as I click and drag,
| | 03:23 | I'm going to change that Thickness from the Property Bar.
| | 03:26 | I'm going to try 2.0, and I'm going to go over here for fun to my
Color palette, and click on yellow, and fill that up with yellow.
| | 03:35 | There is one glif in here and as I move to
it, you can see that black arrow up here,
| | 03:39 | I can adjust the smile to be more or less if I wanted to.
| | 03:42 | I'm going to go down a little bit to make it more of
a smile and I'm going to go up to my Pick tool here,
| | 03:48 | click, click off of it to see the end result.
| | 03:52 | We will come back to that later.
| | 03:53 | Let's go back to our Toolbox, so there's some other categories
in here, like Arrow Shapes, I'm going to click on Arrow Shapes,
| | 04:00 | check it out up here, there's the default, I click
the dropdown arrows pointing in different directions.
| | 04:06 | See that one is pointing down.
| | 04:08 | So if I want to click and drag, I have got an arrow
pointing down, using the default Line Style and Width,
| | 04:14 | I'm going to bump that up to 2.0,
and I'm going to use the glif here
| | 04:17 | to either make the arrow tail skinnier or
wider, until I get the shape I'm after.
| | 04:24 | Click the Pick tool, click off of it to see the end result.
| | 04:28 | And of course, I could fill that up by clicking on it, I'm
going to go up here to Black on my Color palette to fill it up,
| | 04:35 | and click off to see the end result, very nice.
| | 04:37 | There are some other arrows to choose from tool, we'll
go back to our Toolbox here on the Perfect Shapes,
| | 04:43 | and you can see there are some four sided arrows, Chevron
Type Arrows, we have got some with trails in behind,
| | 04:50 | so lots of different options for creating arrows.
| | 04:54 | Things that you would probably have to spend a little bit
too much time and effort on trying to draw yourself manually.
| | 04:59 | So it's nice to have them here in collection.
| | 05:01 | Let's go back to our Toolbox, hold this down
and go to the Flow Charting Shapes in here.
| | 05:07 | If you are going to be drawing any diagrams that require
the flow charting shapes ,you got them all listed here.
| | 05:12 | I'm going to start with this one right up here at the
top, and I'm going to click and drag to draw that shape.
| | 05:19 | I might want to fill that in with some
text, we'll be doing that later on.
| | 05:23 | I'm going to add another one, so let's just
switch this up now to maybe this shape right here,
| | 05:30 | click and drag, and add one more just for kicks.
| | 05:35 | I want to go down to this right here,
click over here to the right, OK.
| | 05:42 | Typically when you are doing flow charting, you need to
connect them, so we're going to talk about the tool now,
| | 05:47 | that's part of the Align tools we're going to discuss
in the next Lesson, but let's get a head start here.
| | 05:52 | Over here where it says Free Hand in your Toolbox,
this is the fourth button down, click and hold that,
| | 05:57 | you will notice that there is a number of Align tools here,
and the one I want to select is actually near the bottom,
| | 06:03 | it's called the Connector tool, and
this allows me to go to shapes.
| | 06:07 | When I find a node, see as I move along the edge
here, it says, edge, but eventually I'll see node.
| | 06:13 | I can now click and drag down to the next
shape, and when I go along the edges,
| | 06:17 | since I find a node, I can let go, and it will stay connected.
| | 06:20 | I'll show you what I mean in a second.
| | 06:22 | Right now I'm going to go over to this right side
when I see a node, click and drag over to a node here.
| | 06:28 | Now I need to find a node, there's one right there,
I'll let go, and now these shapes are connected as well.
| | 06:35 | All that means is, if I go to my Pick tool and I move
these around, I'm going to click and drag this one down.
| | 06:43 | It stays connected and I drag this guy down as well, it always
stays connected and that's the beauty of the Connector tool
| | 06:52 | that maintains all of your connections, no
matter where you move things around on your page.
| | 07:00 | Alright I'm going to marquee select these,
with my Pick tool I'm going to click
| | 07:03 | and drag to make sure I encompass
all of those flow charting shapes.
| | 07:07 | When I let go, they're all selected, so when I hit
my Delete key on the keyboard, they are all gone.
| | 07:11 | Gives me a little bit of space now, because I'm going
to go to the next category here of my Perfect Shapes.
| | 07:16 | I'm going to hold this down and go down to the Banners.
| | 07:19 | Now think about drawing flyers or advertisements.
| | 07:23 | You've got different banners to choose
from, from the Property Bar.
| | 07:26 | This banner is going down, up, you've
got this wavy one, star burst.
| | 07:31 | Let's start with the second one here.
| | 07:33 | I'm going to click and drag across, you
can see I have got a nice little banner.
| | 07:37 | I do have a node for adjusting the
actual width of the banner itself,
| | 07:43 | and I can adjust the ribbons on the
end as well using the yellow node.
| | 07:48 | There we go.
| | 07:49 | It's a little more 3-D and now I've
just entered my text on the inside.
| | 07:53 | Let's try a different one now.
| | 07:54 | I'm going to up here to my Property Bar
and choose this star Burst right here,
| | 07:58 | and I'm going to click and drag right underneath.
| | 08:01 | I could see that on a Sale Blowout flyer, and we
might want to put something like 20% in there.
| | 08:07 | First though with it selected, I'm going
to chose yellow, make that nice and bright.
| | 08:12 | I'm going to go over to my Text tool, let's have some fun here.
| | 08:15 | Just click anywhere on your page and type in 20%, there we go.
| | 08:20 | I'm going to go back to my Pick tool now, I'm going to go
to the bottom right corner, just make that much bigger.
| | 08:26 | It can even be bigger than the burst itself.
| | 08:28 | Go to the center, click and drag it over, and when I release,
you can see that blowout there on a flyer, I can imagine that.
| | 08:36 | And of course, we can always make adjustments to
make it a little wider, make it a little taller,
| | 08:42 | it's totally up to you, by using those sizing handles.
| | 08:47 | There we go.
| | 08:48 | So I think you have got the idea, lots of banners to choose from.
| | 08:52 | Now we have also got from our Perfect Shapes some Callouts.
| | 08:57 | Callouts are useful if you are doing cartoons for example,
or you have got photos where you want to show people talking
| | 09:04 | or thinking, and if I come up to my Property Bar, you can see,
I have got some for displaying speech, there's a thought bubble.
| | 09:12 | I can even be a little more technical
with some of these Callout shapes.
| | 09:16 | So I'm going to start with my middle one here at the top, and I'm
going to click and drag, I'm going to go to my little node here,
| | 09:26 | because this is where I can adjust where it's coming from.
| | 09:31 | I wanted to come right from down here, I'm going to
go right up to there, make that little adjustment,
| | 09:35 | and in here's where I would type my
text, just like I did with the 20%.
| | 09:39 | I'm going to delete that though and try a Thought Bubble instead.
| | 09:43 | So let's go down here and click on the Thought Bubble.
| | 09:45 | Click and drag down, you can see that the direction you drag
is very important, like click and drag from the top down,
| | 09:53 | with all the thought's going in the wrong direction.
| | 09:55 | So I'm going to go this way, go to the
X in the middle and just move it down.
| | 10:03 | I'm going to click on my Text tool.
| | 10:05 | I'm going to type, to hit Enter, easy, an exclamation mark.
| | 10:15 | Over to my Pick tool, I'm going to size that up a little bit.
| | 10:18 | Go to the center with the four sided arrow
moving inside and deselect to see the end result.
| | 10:26 | So lots of different shapes under the Perfect Shapes
Collection found right there on the Toolbox, lots of categories,
| | 10:33 | hold it down, select the category you are after.
| | 10:35 | Remember, the Property Bar is very
important not just for selecting the shape,
| | 10:39 | but the line style and thickness for those shapes as well.
| | 10:44 | Speaking of lines in the next lesson, we're going to a
start drawing actual lines and curves and look at some
| | 10:50 | of the options you have when drawing
lines and curves in CorelDrawX4.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Drawing lines and curves| 00:00 | In this lesson it's time to checkout some of the
line drawing tools you have here in CorelDrawX4.
| | 00:06 | So far in this Chapter we have drawn some
Shapes, Advanced Shapes, Perfect Shapes.
| | 00:10 | Now it's time to explore the Line Drawing tools, and we're going
to continue to use our brand new file created here in CorelDraw.
| | 00:18 | I'm on Page 3 of 3, that's where we
left off with our Perfect Shapes.
| | 00:23 | So if have been following along, let's go up to the Pick tool,
come down below here and click on the plus sign after 3 of 3,
| | 00:30 | creates a brand New page, it's Portrait though, so
we're going to come up here and make it Landscape.
| | 00:35 | If you have jumped to this Lesson, don't worry
about it, all you need is a brand new file,
| | 00:39 | click the New button up here, Ctrl+N
is the shortcut on your keyboard.
| | 00:44 | And then come over to your Landscape button to turn
it on its side, you'll have one page, I have got four.
| | 00:49 | Really does not matter as long as
you got a blank canvas to work with.
| | 00:53 | Just before we start exploring the Line Drawing tools, I'm going
to go over here to the Toolbox and click on my Rectangle tool.
| | 01:00 | So I need to click and hold this down, the
last one I used was a Three Point Rectangle.
| | 01:04 | I just want a simple rectangle, so I choose that, click and
drag across like a wide screen T.V., I'm going to color it gray,
| | 01:13 | a light gray on the inside, by clicking it over
here in the Color palette and that's going to come
| | 01:18 | in handy a little bit later on in this lesson.
| | 01:21 | Back to the Pick tool, and I'll click outside
the selected rectangle to deselect it.
| | 01:27 | Let's start with the first of the Line tools, which is usually
the default, you will find it here of fifth the button down.
| | 01:34 | Now right now mine says, Interactive Connector tool,
| | 01:36 | that's because I used it in a previous
lesson to connect Flow Charting shapes.
| | 01:41 | I'm going to hold this down, the real default is the
Free Hand tool, and that's the one we're going to select.
| | 01:47 | So give it a click, and now it's time to draw
Free Hand, like the name, kind of implies,
| | 01:52 | we can click and hold our mouse button down and just draw a line.
| | 01:56 | I'm going to do a wavy line here, and watch
what happens when I let go off my button?
| | 02:00 | See how it's nicely smoothed out for me I
have got a nice curvy line drawn free hand.
| | 02:06 | I'm going to hit Delete.
| | 02:08 | If I wanted to draw something free hand and join it at
the end, all I have to do is come back where I started,
| | 02:14 | and when I see that little arrow appear, let go.
| | 02:17 | Now I have drawn a shape, a curvy shape.
| | 02:20 | That's all according to some of the defaults
that you see up here on your Property Bar.
| | 02:24 | First of all the line style is just a solid line and these
two fields on the left and the right are for arrow heads.
| | 02:32 | So if you wanted to have arrows at
either end or both ends for that matter,
| | 02:35 | you could do that just by clicking these drop
down and selecting the appropriate style.
| | 02:40 | But you can also select a Thickness I'm going to just
make that a little bit thicker I'm going to go up to 2,
| | 02:46 | and over here where you see 100, that's our Free Hand Smoothing.
| | 02:49 | If you click and hold this down, you will see the sliders all the
way to the right at 100, indicating full smoothing is turned on.
| | 02:56 | If you prefer that jagged look, you move it all the way to
zero, somewhere in between will give you a different level
| | 03:03 | of smoothing, but 100 is good right at the top.
| | 03:06 | With that still selected, hit your Delete key to remove it.
| | 03:10 | What if you want a straight line?
| | 03:11 | Let's try and do a nice straight line on an angle.
| | 03:13 | You are going to start up here in the top left, and
I'm going to click and drag down, and when I let go,
| | 03:19 | there's a bit of a curve in there, isn't there?
| | 03:21 | I wasn't able to draw it perfectly straight, so I'm going to
hit Delete, and show you that I was using the wrong technique.
| | 03:27 | With the Free Hand tool you don't have to click and drag, you
can click once, let go, now move your mouse, and you can see,
| | 03:34 | it's going to draw a straight line on whatever angle you choose.
| | 03:37 | If I wanted this angle right here, I click, and my line is drawn.
| | 03:42 | I'm going to hit Delete and show you that the constrain
option that we used when drawing rectangles and ellipses
| | 03:49 | and other shapes, also works with your Line tool.
| | 03:51 | Hold down your Ctrl key on the keyboard, now click once, and as
you move across, look how straight and level that line stays.
| | 03:59 | As I move down, you will see it's going to snap to 15 degree
increments, and that's the default setting here in draw.
| | 04:07 | Of course that can be changed.
| | 04:08 | If you want it to be perfectly flat, keep holding
that Ctrl key down, click to end your line
| | 04:14 | and then let go off the Ctrl key on the
keyboard, there's your straight line.
| | 04:18 | I'm going to hit Delete and show you another option,
still using Ctrl, because I want straight line.
| | 04:23 | I'm going to click up here, holding Ctrl, I'm going to
move down at this angle, which is a 45 degree angle.
| | 04:30 | I'm going to click once, you will notice
that my mouse pointer is hovering that node
| | 04:36 | at the end of the line, that's where I left off.
| | 04:39 | That means, I can actually click again
to draw another line that's connected.
| | 04:43 | So I'm going to move all the way over here to the right,
click once, I'm over a node, click again, come up here,
| | 04:51 | and notice with Ctrl held down, I can't actually connect it.
| | 04:54 | I have to let go off the Ctrl key to
be able to be able to go to that node,
| | 04:57 | because it's not a perfect angle
within those 15 degree increment.
| | 05:01 | So I click, and there is my triangle.
| | 05:04 | So one way to draw your own shapes, is with the Free Hand tool.
| | 05:08 | I'm going to delete this, because there's a better way.
| | 05:11 | So I'm going to Delete that, and go back to
my Line tool here, click and hold that down.
| | 05:16 | Notice the other ones, there's a B?zier tool, very
complicated tool for drawing curves and lines together.
| | 05:22 | There's artistic media we'll save that for
later, because you can adjust the thickness,
| | 05:27 | it's like working with a Paint Brush
and get some nice artistic effects.
| | 05:31 | There's a Pen, works just like writing, it's
kind of like the Free Hand when you are holding
| | 05:35 | down your mouse button Polyline though,
allows you to draw some of those shapes
| | 05:40 | without so many clicks, like we saw with the Free Hand tool.
| | 05:43 | So let's check out the Polyline tool.
| | 05:45 | This time I'm just going to click once,
go down to this corner, click once,
| | 05:49 | move over to the right, See it's already drawing the shape.
| | 05:52 | You got to hold Ctrl to keep the bottom
flat and I'm going to double click
| | 05:56 | down here and it's automatically closing it up for me.
| | 05:58 | There is my triangle, just like that.
| | 06:02 | So less clicks with the Polyline tool.
| | 06:04 | I'm going to hit Delete, because there's
a little bit more to the Polyline tool.
| | 06:07 | You can actually combine curves and straight lines.
| | 06:11 | So I'm going to start down here, I'm going to click
once, hold down Ctrl, so I keep a nice level line,
| | 06:18 | click again, this time I'm going to come up slightly.
| | 06:22 | I'm going to click now and drag and you can see I have got the
curvy lines here, come down to that node, and double click,
| | 06:34 | closes it up, and now I have got a piece of a puzzle there.
| | 06:37 | So I have combined some straight lines with
some curved linesm thanks to the Polyline tool.
| | 06:42 | You can see how that could be useful in your drawings.
| | 06:45 | Let's hit Delete to delete that, and move on to another tool.
| | 06:50 | Click and hold the Polyline tool button down to get
the flyout, and let's go to that Three Point Curve.
| | 06:55 | Now we saw the Three Point Ellipse and Rectangle tools earlier,
| | 06:58 | and now we're going to create a Three
Point Curve, it's the same way.
| | 07:02 | Notice that you are getting HINTS over here on
the right, if you haven't closed up HINTS Docker,
| | 07:07 | telling you how to define the start and end points first of all.
| | 07:10 | So in other words, we need to click where we want to start
the curve, and then drag to where we want the curve to end.
| | 07:15 | So let's say we want to put a nice curve on top of this,
go to this node, click and drag over to the other node,
| | 07:22 | and when I let go, now watch what happens when I move my pointer.
| | 07:27 | I'm actually going to preview the curve I'm about to draw.
| | 07:31 | So if I wanted this to look as though it were a handle on a
purse or something, I could click, I have got my curved line.
| | 07:39 | All I have to do now, is go up here
and change some of the Attributes,
| | 07:43 | like maybe make it a little bit thicker, and I go up to four.
| | 07:47 | I'm going to hit Delete to remove my Three Point curve.
| | 07:51 | Let's look at another one now.
| | 07:52 | Let's hold this down, we have seen the Connector,
we're going to skip over to the Dimension tool,
| | 07:57 | and that's why we have our flat panel
T.V, here in the middle of our page.
| | 08:02 | Let's get the measurement for this.
| | 08:03 | This is a great tool for technical
drawings, floor plans and so on,
| | 08:07 | because you have got a lot of options
up here on your Property Bar.
| | 08:10 | Let's start with a Vertical Measurement, so I'm going
to click on this second button, Vertical Dimension tool.
| | 08:17 | All I have to do is, go to this node
to know I'm right at the corner,
| | 08:21 | and I'm going to come down to this node down here and click.
| | 08:24 | Now I'm going to move out towards the center and
click a third time, and it measures it for me.
| | 08:30 | Notice it's 2.72 inches, perfectly.
| | 08:34 | I know that's the exact measurement, and if I want to be
more precise, I could change it to maybe more decimal places,
| | 08:41 | like four for example, 2.72-3-6,
look at that, that's very precise.
| | 08:47 | Let's try it across the bottom now, we need to switch
| | 08:50 | over to our Horizontal Dimension tool
by clicking it here in the Property Bar.
| | 08:54 | Go to this node, click and drag across
to the other node, and click.
| | 09:00 | Now we come down, wherever you want that number to appear is
where you are going to click a third time, and there it is, 4.74.
| | 09:08 | I'm going to bump that up, as well to four
decimal places to get the exact measurement.
| | 09:14 | Now the important one, when talking
about T.V. Screens, the Diagonal,
| | 09:18 | we can get that as well by clicking
the Diagonal or Slanted Dimension tool.
| | 09:23 | Again, we go to a node, click, go to the next node, click, and
now we just have to choose where that number is going to appear.
| | 09:33 | I wanted it out here, out here, or right in the center.
| | 09:36 | I'm going to go to the center and click, and
notice it's 5.46 inches, not a very big screen.
| | 09:42 | I'm going to bump that up to four
decimal places, so it matches the rest.
| | 09:46 | You can see it's in inches, other options, we
could change that if we wanted to, to show 'in,
| | 09:51 | instead of the inches symbol the word inches, millimeters,
peakers and points, look at all the different options.
| | 09:57 | When you get into feet and yards and so on, then you are
working with different drawings that are drawn to scale.
| | 10:03 | For example, if you're doing a floor plan, you might want it
in feet, and then you have to set up your scale ahead of time,
| | 10:09 | and then it would actually measure the number of feet for you.
| | 10:14 | So that's a great way to do some of those technical
things, like floor plans or even technical drawings
| | 10:19 | when discussing instruments and things that
need to be measured precisely, so I like that.
| | 10:25 | I think I'll click out here to not
select anything, click on my Pick tool,
| | 10:29 | click out here to deselect, to see what that looks like.
| | 10:32 | So those are some of the Line Drawing tools that you
have available to you, right here from your Toolbox.
| | 10:38 | So keep those in mind, they are very useful, depending on
your scenario, and we're going to be using them as we move
| | 10:44 | through some of the lessons coming up, working with objects.
| | 10:47 | Next though, we're going to talk about modifying some of your
shapes, and your objects ,and even your lines and curves,
| | 10:53 | because they have got nodes, and you need to know
how to change the shape of one of your objects,
| | 11:00 | whether it's a line, a curve or any other object for that matter.
| | 11:04 | So coming up next, the Shape tool.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Node editing with the Shape tool| 00:00 | Now so far in this chapter we've created a bunch of
different kinds of shapes and objects, like lines and curves
| | 00:06 | and we've used perfect shapes even, and when you
create these shapes, obviously you can manipulate them
| | 00:12 | to be exactly what you need, create a rectangle and you
can create a bigger rectangle out of it or size it down,
| | 00:19 | move it around on the page, but there is even more you
can do with these objects, thanks to the Shape tool.
| | 00:24 | That's what we're going to talk about in this
lesson, node editing with our Shape tool.
| | 00:30 | So the first thing we need is a new blank page.
| | 00:33 | If you've been following along, and
you've got several pages open right now,
| | 00:37 | you're just going to go down to the bottom
here and click the plus sign, to add a new page.
| | 00:41 | We'll go to our Pick tool now, because on the Property
Bar we want to be able to flip this on its side,
| | 00:46 | choosing the Landscape button, gives us our nice canvas.
| | 00:49 | If you skip to this lesson, don't worry about that,
just click your New button, Ctrl+N on the keyboard,
| | 00:55 | and then the Landscape button to have what I have here,
| | 00:58 | which is a nice clean blank canvas,
ready to start working with node editing.
| | 01:03 | Now we need something to edit, so let's go back to some of
those shapes that we've been working with in previous lessons.
| | 01:08 | I'm going to start with my Rectangle tool.
| | 01:11 | If you do not see the Rectangle tool here, you might be seeing
the 3 Point Rectangle tool, make sure it's the Rectangle tool,
| | 01:17 | by clicking and holding that button down you get
the flyout, F6 on your keyboard is the shortcut.
| | 01:22 | I'm just going to draw a rectangle right here,
near the center of my page, and I'll let go.
| | 01:28 | I'm going to color that, I'm going to color it red.
| | 01:32 | Clicking red on the color palette
fills it up with red, just like that.
| | 01:36 | Alright, let's create an ellipse, and
let's make our ellipse a perfect circle.
| | 01:40 | Down below our rectangle, hold down your Ctrl key,
click and drag, and you get a nice round circle,
| | 01:47 | and let's fill that up with a nice
light blue or cyan, there we go.
| | 01:51 | Next we're going to draw a wavy line,
that means we need our Free Hand tool.
| | 01:55 | I'm going to go over here, why I use the Dimension tool
the last, but when I click and hold this fifth button down,
| | 02:03 | I can access my Free Hand tool, F5
on your keyboard is the shortcut.
| | 02:07 | Let's just click and drag a nice wavy line here across the top.
| | 02:13 | Gets all smooth done for us nicely, I'm going to
change the thickness of that line by going up here
| | 02:17 | to my Property Bar, and I'm going to go to 2.0 millimeters.
| | 02:23 | you can choose two points if you're saying
points, if you're saying millimeters like me,
| | 02:27 | just something thicker, so we have a line to work with.
| | 02:31 | You may have noticed, as we're creating these things are
a little square showing up somewhere along the way in each
| | 02:37 | of these shapes, those are the nodes we're going to be
editing, but before we do that, let's add some text.
| | 02:42 | Now there is a whole chapter dedicated to working with text,
so let's just do dome simple artistic text, F8 on your keyboard
| | 02:49 | or click the Text tool over here in your
Toolbox, that selects the Text tool.
| | 02:54 | Now all I need to do is, type in the words that we want,
and I'm going to click up here above my line and type in,
| | 03:02 | in upper case or Caps Lock key on, GO WITH THE FLOW!
| | 03:10 | Exclamation mark, just like that.
| | 03:12 | Now I'm going to click on my Pick tool, it's still selected.
| | 03:15 | I'm going to go up to my Property
Bar, change that to Arial black,
| | 03:19 | it's up here near the top of my Fonts and maybe bump the size up.
| | 03:23 | I'm going to double it from 24 to 48.
| | 03:26 | As I hover over these, I get a real time
preview, maybe 36 is more appropriate, 36 points,
| | 03:32 | and I'm going to move that down just
about my wavy line, there we go.
| | 03:36 | We can color our text as well.
| | 03:39 | Let's go for maybe a bright yellow, that's hard to see, let's
go to a different one like Magenta, that is easier to look at.
| | 03:49 | Alright, we'll deselect it by clicking
outside of it and now it's time
| | 03:52 | to start modifying these shapes using our node
editing capabilities, thanks to our Shape tool.
| | 03:58 | We'll start with our rectangle, and when I
click on it, you can see these little squares,
| | 04:02 | they are smaller than the ones you see along
the other side for sizing and reshaping.
| | 04:08 | The nodes are tiny squares on the inside, at least they
are tiny right now, when I switch over to my Shape tool,
| | 04:15 | the second button down in the tool
Box, check out what happens now.
| | 04:19 | They are selected, that's why they appear to be quite large
here in the corner, and if I click and drag them down and in,
| | 04:26 | look what happens, I'm rounding the corners of my rectangle,
all four corners, because all of my nodes are selected.
| | 04:33 | Now some new nodes are appearing along the way as well.
| | 04:37 | So if I drag that right back, putting on top of each other,
| | 04:40 | I'm back down to four nodes, and it's
nice right angles at each corner.
| | 04:45 | So if I wanted to just make changes to one or two of these
nodes, well, I can click on one node, click and drag,
| | 04:51 | now I'm just rounding the one corner, and you can see how
I'm creating a brand new shape here from my rectangle.
| | 04:57 | I'm going to drag that back out, click on it
once, let's see if we can select multiple nodes.
| | 05:04 | I don't want them all, I just want these top two, so holding
my Shift key down allows me to select the top two nodes,
| | 05:10 | and now I when I click and drag, I'm rounding just the
top corners, and when I let go, its perfectly symmetrical
| | 05:16 | at the top, but it's a totally different shape.
| | 05:19 | Now that's pretty much the limitations of node editing with
a rectangle, but momentarily, we're going to change this
| | 05:26 | to another type of object that allows
us to do even more with our Shape tool.
| | 05:30 | Right now though, we're going to go down to our ellipse.
| | 05:34 | So let's go back to the Pick tool to select the ellipse,
because I want you to see what it looks like when it's selected.
| | 05:39 | Here is our sizing handles around the outside,
and just below the top one in the middle,
| | 05:44 | you can see there is a little 'V' node in there.
| | 05:47 | So if I go over to my Shape tool, and
I click on that node, it's selected.
| | 05:53 | Watch how limited I'm here when shaping
something like an ellipse.
| | 05:57 | When I click and drag, I'm going to go about
45 degree here or 90 degrees, and let go.
| | 06:02 | You can see I'm ending up here with an arc, now if I really
want that to be pie, I can click Pie up here on my Property Bar
| | 06:09 | or if I want to close it in, fully
ellipse by clicking right there.
| | 06:13 | If I go the other way, same thing happens, if
I stay inside the circle I'll create a pie,
| | 06:18 | if I go outside the circle I'll create an arc.
| | 06:21 | So if I stay inside, there is my piece of pie, if I
drag that to the other side and stay inside the circle
| | 06:28 | with my pointer, there is my big piece of pie.
| | 06:31 | And if I drag that by going outside the circle ,I get an arc.
| | 06:37 | So I'm going to back to pie and leave it just like that.
| | 06:40 | Up we go to our wavy line, now we
created this with our Free Hand tool.
| | 06:45 | So here we've got a number of nodes along
the way that help shape this curvy line.
| | 06:50 | Let's go to our Shape tool and make sure it's still elected,
and of course, we can click on it with the Shape tool.
| | 06:56 | You can see these little nodes, as I hover over
them, they're kind of hard to see, so let's zoom in.
| | 07:00 | I'm going to click on my Zoom tool here, and I'm going to click
and drag just over the wavy line, and that's a little easier
| | 07:07 | to see those nodes now, and go back to my Shape tool.
| | 07:11 | So if I wanted to, I can click on a node, you can see
these arrows that show up that allow me to change the angle
| | 07:16 | of the curve, I can flatten it, I can stretch it, bring
it down, and of course, I can move the node itself.
| | 07:25 | I can make it more to the left or more to the right.
| | 07:30 | When I click on this node, bring it up a
little bit, click on this node and bring it
| | 07:34 | down a little bit, maybe over this way as well.
| | 07:38 | When I do the same with this one, just bring it over a little
bit, to get that wave effect, and there's the node right there
| | 07:45 | and I can do the same thing with, click
this node, that's a nice effect right there,
| | 07:50 | maybe just drag it this way to smooth it out a little bit.
| | 07:56 | So you got the idea, we've got nodes that we can play
with, but what if we wanted some additional nodes,
| | 08:01 | maybe I want to build a pull from this area, you can add nodes.
| | 08:05 | First of all, there are a couple of different ways to do it,
| | 08:08 | at the top on your Property Bar there is a button
for adding nodes, as well as deleting nodes.
| | 08:13 | I currently have nodes selected here, so clicking the Delete
button here is going to delete nodes, there it's gone.
| | 08:19 | You can see that I don't have either
of these buttons available to me now.
| | 08:23 | I'm going to undo that, and instead
this time click the plus sign to add nodes,
| | 08:29 | and a node gets added in between
here, so I have got this new one.
| | 08:32 | If I come over here and click ,and then add a note, if it
gets added between the first one and the one I've selected.
| | 08:39 | I'm going to delete that node, click on it and delete,
and you can see all of those nodes are gone now.
| | 08:46 | I'm going to undo that, and show you another
way to add nodes, and that's just double click,
| | 08:51 | double clicking anywhere on the line gives you some new nodes and
now I can just drag that down to get that the shape I was after.
| | 08:58 | Let's add a whole bunch of nodes
here without actually changing them.
| | 09:01 | I'm going to double click here, and here, over here
and here, I wonder how many nodes that is altogether.
| | 09:10 | Well, if we go up to our Property Bar and click this
button, we can select all of the nodes in a shape,
| | 09:15 | and if I look at my Status Bar, down at the bottom, I have
14 nodes selected, I wonder if I need that many nodes,
| | 09:23 | gives me a lot of flexibility, but
also requires more system resources.
| | 09:26 | So refreshing your screen and saving your file
is going to take up more space and memory.
| | 09:32 | So let's go up here to this feature, Reduce Nodes.
| | 09:35 | When I click the Reduce Nodes, there is some intelligence
built in the CorelDraw here, that is going to analyze my shape,
| | 09:41 | and figure out whether or not I need all of those nodes, some
of them may not be necessary and are not affecting the shape.
| | 09:46 | So click in reduce nodes, takes me down
to 10, look down below, now I have got 10.
| | 09:52 | So four were removed, leaving me with these nodes
that you see selected, so I can actually go in there
| | 09:57 | and start making additional modifications if I wanted to.
| | 10:01 | Let's go up to our Pick tool now, and since our
text is right here, let's move over to our text.
| | 10:06 | One click shows you, I've got a couple of little
nodes here along the baseline, the bottom of my text,
| | 10:12 | but if I go up to my Shape tool watch what happens.
| | 10:15 | They're actually nodes before each of the characters,
which means I can use those to adjust this text.
| | 10:22 | I've also got this little guy over here for
adjusting the kerning, the space between my text.
| | 10:28 | So I click and drag this, Ouch!
| | 10:30 | You can see it's adding space in between, of course, if
I go to the left, I'm going to squeeze it altogether.
| | 10:36 | Get the real time preview, so you
know how it is going to look like.
| | 10:39 | I'm going to go over the length of my curvy line over here.
| | 10:42 | Now the nodes, it's time now to talk
about what you can do with text here.
| | 10:46 | If I want to adjust my text, let's say I go to this one
here where the 'E' and 'THE' and I click and drag down.
| | 10:53 | You see I have dragged it below the baseline, I'm going
to drag the 'T' up, a little higher than the baseline.
| | 11:01 | I'm going to bring this down, down a
little further, down there, up here.
| | 11:09 | I can also move them left or right, bring the
'G' down, and you can see what I'm doing here.
| | 11:14 | I'm creating a nice little effect, it's kind of matching
my wavy line down below, it's the node in the front
| | 11:21 | of the character that you want to be able to alter.
| | 11:26 | Perfect, go with the flow, I like that.
| | 11:28 | So I was able to modify each character in this
string of text, now keep in mind, it's still text.
| | 11:36 | If I go back to my Pick tool and I click on this text, you can
see what it selected, I'm able to do things like change the font,
| | 11:43 | and the size, and the font attributes, that's because it is text.
| | 11:47 | This is important to remember, because we
also have the ability to change our objects
| | 11:52 | into curves, and that gives us even more flexibility.
| | 11:56 | Shift+F4 on your keyboard zooms you
out, so you can see the entire page.
| | 12:01 | Let's say I wanted to go down to my rectangle here, if I go
up to the Arrange menu, you'll notice that I have the ability
| | 12:08 | down near the bottom here, to convert this to curves.
| | 12:12 | So it's no longer treated like a rectangle.
| | 12:14 | When I do that ,and I go to my Shape
tool, now when I start editing nodes,
| | 12:19 | it's not just rounding corners, I'm
changing the actual shape here.
| | 12:24 | So I click and drag, click and drag a node, you can
see what's happening, I'm the changing the shape.
| | 12:31 | It's no longer a rectangle, of course,
I can add nodes just by double clicking
| | 12:35 | on the border, and of course, I can click and drag up.
| | 12:39 | Let's try it with our ellipse, which is
currently looking like a piece of pie.
| | 12:44 | Well, it's treated like an ellipse, a circle, until
we go up to Arrange, down to, Convert to Curves.
| | 12:52 | Now I have got more nodes to edit, so I can click on my
Shape tool, I can add remove nodes, I can change the shape,
| | 13:01 | really alter the look, and now I have got something totally
different than that piece of pie we were looking at.
| | 13:10 | Let's go back to the Pick tool, and our wavy line is already a
curve, so we're going to go up to our text now and click on it.
| | 13:18 | I want to zoom in to my text, so I'm going
to use my Zoom tool here, click and drag
| | 13:23 | and I want to catch a little bit of a line down below.
| | 13:26 | Now with my text selected, I'm going to go my Pick tool, go
up to Arrange, and I can even convert this text to curve.
| | 13:33 | Now be careful here, because it will no longer be text.
| | 13:36 | In other words, you won't be able to change your
font size, and the font face, the font appearance,
| | 13:42 | it's going to be treated like any other
object when we convert it to curves.
| | 13:46 | So we give it a click, look at the Property Bar, all those
font options are gone, but we have full access now to each
| | 13:52 | of these little shapes that look like text right now.
| | 13:56 | So for example, with my shape tool, if I click and drag this node
that's go inside with our Shape tool, I click and drag this too,
| | 14:04 | I'm changing the shape of my T, so I want
all my T's to be angled up like that.
| | 14:11 | What about my W, drag that away from both sides.
| | 14:16 | Look at all the nodes we have, there is
another W, we want to do the same thing with.
| | 14:22 | You can see I'm getting a totally different effect,
my I's, I'm going to drag to bottom left corner,
| | 14:28 | my G, look at all the nodes around the outside.
| | 14:31 | I'm going to drag this corner down a little bit, and Ouch!
| | 14:35 | And now I've got a totally different looking
piece of text that's really no longer text.
| | 14:40 | I'm going to go back to my Pick tool.
| | 14:42 | I'm going to do a Shift+F4 to zoom right out,
deselect by clicking anywhere out here on my page.
| | 14:48 | Now look at that, that's kind of neat.
| | 14:50 | You wouldn't be able to do that unless you had nodes to
edit, and you get a lot more nodes when you convert objects
| | 14:56 | that are formally shapes or text and you
turn them into curves from the Arrange menu.
| | 15:01 | So really the possibilities are endless, you
get a lot of options on your Property Bar.
| | 15:06 | I encourage you to experiment with your Shape tool, especially
with the objects after you have converted them to curves.
| | 15:12 | There is one more kind of object we need to talk about in the
next lesson, brand new here in CorelDrawX4, and that is tables.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with tables| 00:00 | In this lesson we're going to explore
something that is brand new to CorelDRAW X4,
| | 00:04 | and now you can actually create tables in your drawings.
| | 00:08 | And tables are a great way if you need structure
for adding text and graphics for example,
| | 00:13 | and you want to organize it nice and neat on your page.
| | 00:16 | So we're going to create some tables now,
couple of different ways using this file
| | 00:21 | that I have already opened called Tables1.cdr.
| | 00:23 | If you've got the Exercise_Files and you want to
follow along you'll find this in the Lesson3 folder.
| | 00:30 | This is a two page or if you look down below I'm on Page 1.
| | 00:34 | Pretty much blank accept for my title PARTS INVENTORY up here.
| | 00:37 | And if I flip over to Page 2, you'll notice that I
have got the same title at the top, PARTS INVENTORY.
| | 00:44 | But down below I have got some paragraph text, text
that's already been entered and it's separated.
| | 00:50 | You can see I have got item numbers very difficult
to see right now, we'll zoom in a little bit later
| | 00:54 | when we convert this text into a table, really cool feature.
| | 00:59 | Well let's go back to Page 1.
| | 01:00 | We are going to draw our table and we're going to
put it right underneath our title PARTS INVENTORY.
| | 01:06 | All we need to do is go over to our Toolbox
where we now find this tool here, the Table tool.
| | 01:11 | Giving it a click changes our Property Bar to show us things
like the number of rows and columns we're about to create.
| | 01:17 | We can change Backgrounds and Border Attributes
or other options hiding under the Options button.
| | 01:23 | But right now we're trying to setup our columns and rows
before we draw our table by simply clicking and dragging.
| | 01:30 | So the Number of Rows, I'm going to bump this up to
5, I'm going to take 5 rows and I'm going to need
| | 01:35 | at least 4 columns for my PARTS INVENTORY list.
| | 01:39 | So I'm going to bump that up as well.
| | 01:40 | Of course I could come in here and just type in the
numbers that I need, so we want 5 rows by 4 columns.
| | 01:47 | Now all we have to do is move into the drawing area,
| | 01:50 | right here on our page where we want the table
to go, and click and drag across and down.
| | 01:55 | And you can see I'm actually drawing my table using the
exact number of rows and columns that I selected already
| | 02:01 | from the Property Bar and when I'm
done I release and there is my table.
| | 02:06 | Now there are certain defaults that kick in here, for example
you'll notice that every single row is the exact same height,
| | 02:12 | every column is the same width, and
these are all things that we can alter.
| | 02:17 | So let's go over to our Zoom tool here because
we're going to be working with the table.
| | 02:21 | And I'm going to zoom into my title and table area here by
clicking and dragging with my Zoom tool to encompass all of that.
| | 02:29 | So here we go, we're ready to start entering information into
the table and then we'll make some adjustments to this table.
| | 02:36 | So I'm going to go to go back to my Pick tool here.
| | 02:39 | You'll see the table is still selected.
| | 02:41 | It's just like any other object.
| | 02:42 | I can move it around if I want to
move it up using the four-sided arrow.
| | 02:46 | If I want to stretch it, make those rows
a little bit taller, I could do that.
| | 02:49 | If I want to squeeze it in or stretch it out, I've got all
of these handles just like working with any other object.
| | 02:55 | But when I come in here and click inside the table, actually
double click, you can see I have got a flashing cursor now
| | 03:02 | and up at the top of my Property Bar I've got my Font options.
| | 03:05 | You can see Arial, 12 Points, my default.
| | 03:08 | I have all of those Fonts Attributes I can
apply including the Horizontal Alignment.
| | 03:14 | So I would like to change this to Center, so whatever I type
| | 03:17 | in that cell will be centered, my
flashing cursor now move to the center.
| | 03:21 | Same thing for the Vertical Alignment,
that button is right up here
| | 03:24 | in the Property Bar, I want to Center this vertically as well.
| | 03:28 | So give that a click and now I'm ready to start entering my text.
| | 03:32 | So in here let's just type in Item Number.
| | 03:36 | And that Font and that Size seems to be OK.
| | 03:39 | We might make some changes to it a little bit later.
| | 03:42 | If I click in this cell you can see its back to the left
hand side top left corner so it might be best if I click
| | 03:48 | and drag over all of these cells to select them.
| | 03:51 | Now those three cells are selected.
| | 03:53 | I could've selected the entire row.
| | 03:55 | And if I want to make all of those cells
formatted the same way in one step,
| | 04:00 | you'll notice that I have lost my Font
Attributes up here on the Property Bar.
| | 04:04 | So in this case I need to go up to Text and be able
| | 04:07 | to format those paragraph formatting
options by clicking Paragraph Formatting.
| | 04:12 | Now over here on the right hand side in the dockers you can
see I have got Alignment, Horizontal, there is Non Vertical,
| | 04:18 | it is set to Top but we can change those to Center, and Center,
| | 04:24 | and then we can close up that docker
by clicking the Close button.
| | 04:27 | And click in the next cell where we want to start typing,
look at the cursor flashing right there in the middle.
| | 04:33 | Here is where our description is going to go and
in the next cell I can click and type in, Quantity.
| | 04:41 | And I'm just going to type in QTY for Quantity.
| | 04:45 | And when you hit the Tab key typically when you're working
with tables, whether its in a spreadsheet application
| | 04:51 | or in another application where you create tables,
hitting your Tab key usually moves you to the next cell.
| | 04:57 | And you can see when I hit my Tab key there to move to the
next cell I get the Tab Key Options dialog box showing up here
| | 05:03 | where I get to chose what's going
to happen when I hit the Tab key.
| | 05:07 | Will it insert the Tab character into the text, no I'm working
on a table, or will Move to the next cell and I want it to move
| | 05:13 | to the next cell, that's what is selected, the tab order
is going to be left to right and then top to bottom.
| | 05:18 | It's just going to move through my
table as I hit my Tab key so click OK.
| | 05:22 | Now I'm in the next cell, where I need to type in Cost.
| | 05:26 | Now when I hit Tab you can see it just
moves me to the next cell down here.
| | 05:30 | And I'm thinking these cells should
also be centered for the Item Numbers.
| | 05:33 | So I can click and drag from this cell all the way
down and I'm going to change my options again by going
| | 05:41 | up to Text and Paragraph Formatting, that docker there.
| | 05:45 | I'm going to change the Horizontal to Center and the
Vertical I'm going to put it at the Bottom, there we go.
| | 05:52 | And now when I click under item number to start
entering my actual item numbers they'll be centered.
| | 05:58 | 0001, I'll hit Tab, saves me having to click.
| | 06:02 | Description, that's fine, description could get lengthy so,
starting on the left is fine for this particular description.
| | 06:08 | Let's type in HDMI Cable and I put in a dash here.
| | 06:14 | Let's start with a 10-foot cable and we'll hit our Tab key.
| | 06:20 | The quantity or the amount that we have in
INVENTORY, I'm just going to type in the number 23.
| | 06:25 | I'm going to hit Tab and the cost for those
10 ft cables I'm going to set to 25.99.
| | 06:32 | I'm not really formatting anything at this point.
| | 06:34 | I'm going to hit Tab to move on to the next one.
| | 06:37 | Let's do 0002 and tab over.
| | 06:41 | We'll do another HDMI Cable here and let's do it 15 footer.
| | 06:46 | And the Quantity, we only have 16 of those in stock, and
they are a little bit more expensive, we'll go to 45.99.
| | 06:54 | So you got the idea and probably what you are seeing
here is that I don't really want equal columns,
| | 06:59 | my descriptions will probably get longer as I get into
some of the other parts in my INVENTORY, Quantity here,
| | 07:06 | I really only need a skinny little
space for that same thing for this Cost.
| | 07:10 | So now it's time to start making changes to our table appearance.
| | 07:14 | And we're going to go right into the middle of our
first two columns here and you can see when I touch
| | 07:19 | that border it turns into a double arrow pointing left and right.
| | 07:22 | So I move over to the left to squeeze that column over to
the left, creates a little more space for my description.
| | 07:29 | I'm going to go between the second last and
last columns here when I see the double arrow.
| | 07:35 | I can drag that one over to the right.
| | 07:38 | Quantity I can drag that one way over to the right as well and
you can see now I have got lots of room for my descriptions,
| | 07:45 | some simple changes that allow me to change my column widths.
| | 07:49 | So now I can click down here in this cell.
| | 07:51 | Let's try another one 0003, hit tab,
let's do an SVG Cable, 10 ft, tab over,
| | 08:04 | let's put 22 of those in stock and
they are a lot cheaper to 10.99.
| | 08:11 | So that's creating a table from scratch, pretty
much as using the table tool to create the table
| | 08:16 | and then making a few minor adjustments along the way.
| | 08:19 | There are lots more we can do with tables.
| | 08:21 | We take a peek here at the Table menu.
| | 08:23 | You can see we can Create New Tables from this menu.
| | 08:26 | We can Insert Rows and Columns if we wanted to.
| | 08:30 | We can Select Rows and Columns.
| | 08:33 | We can Delete Rows and Columns or the Entire Table.
| | 08:36 | And then there is this Distribute option
to distribute rows or columns evenly.
| | 08:40 | That's what we started with so if we
want to go back to that, we could.
| | 08:44 | Another option down at the bottom will
allow us to convert this entire table
| | 08:48 | to paragraph text or removing the borders so to speak.
| | 08:51 | So I'm going to click down here in this
last cell and that closes up my menu.
| | 08:57 | And let say we wanted to create a shading for our top row.
| | 09:01 | Well all we have to do is select the top row.
| | 09:03 | If I click anywhere up here in the top row it
doesn't really matter what cell, can go up to Table,
| | 09:09 | down to Select, you can see I can select the entire row.
| | 09:12 | And when I do that it shows up with those
diagonal lines to indicate it's selected.
| | 09:18 | Now all I have to do is go over to my Color palette, let's put
in a nice light gray here for the background or click anywhere
| | 09:24 | in the table to deselect that top row,
you can see I have changed the appearance.
| | 09:29 | Another way to select an entire row is just a move over to
the left edge when you see your I beam turned into an arrow,
| | 09:37 | just double click or one click will do the job
actually and select the entire top row here.
| | 09:43 | And now if I want to make a change to perhaps the
text, maybe it would be good if it was bolded.
| | 09:49 | Well I could go up to my Text menu if my docker's not
already open for Character Formatting, give that a click,
| | 09:56 | you can see I have got Arial, Normal
as I scroll down, Character Effects.
| | 10:01 | We're going to get into modifying text
a little bit later on in this title.
| | 10:05 | I've got some options here for formatting if I
wanted to Underlining, Strike through, Upper Case,
| | 10:11 | the Position but I'm just going to come up here
and I click this little dropdown and choose Bold.
| | 10:16 | I get a real time preview.
| | 10:18 | I like it so I click.
| | 10:20 | Deselect the top row by clicking anywhere in the table itself.
| | 10:24 | Shift+F4 is going to take us back out so you
can see entire page and the effect of our table.
| | 10:30 | Now we're going to move over to Page 2, down at the bottom.
| | 10:33 | Here we've already got text so I'm going to click on my Pick tool
up here in the Toolbox, I'm going to select this paragraph text
| | 10:39 | by clicking on its border and go up to my Table menu now.
| | 10:44 | Maybe I should zoom in first do I'm going to click
my Zoom tool and so zoom into this area right here.
| | 10:50 | And when I go back to my Pick tool you can see
that this paragraph text is still selected.
| | 10:56 | And now I'm going to up to my Table
menu and choose Convert Text to Table.
| | 11:01 | Now just before I click on this take a look at the text.
| | 11:04 | You can see Item Number, Description, Quantity and Cost are
all separated by commas, same thing for the actual item numbers
| | 11:10 | and the descriptions down below,
each of them separated by commas.
| | 11:15 | That's called a Delimiter and it's important when we choose
Convert Text to Table now, we have to choose the separator.
| | 11:21 | And you can see some options include Commas, Tabs,
| | 11:25 | Paragraphs which are basically just people
hitting the Enter key or user defined separator.
| | 11:30 | So if I decided dashes was going to
be the separator I could choose dashes
| | 11:35 | by choosing User Defined and typing in my dash right here.
| | 11:38 | But commas is what's being used so keep it at commas,
click OK, and that didn't take long, we've got our table.
| | 11:45 | And you can see the column widths are equal, the
row heights are equal, all of that can be adjusted.
| | 11:50 | We know we can go inside a table here and
start working with those column borders.
| | 11:55 | I'm going to double click to get inside any
cell and when I click and drag Item Number over
| | 12:01 | and Cost over to the right, same thing for the Quantity.
| | 12:05 | I'm starting to get the look I'm after.
| | 12:07 | You can see now all of that description
text is starting to show up.
| | 12:11 | I'm going to go my Pick tool, I'm going to
click outside the table and there is quick way
| | 12:16 | to create a table if you've already got the contents.
| | 12:19 | And let's double click inside the top row, one click
here with our arrow showing on the left border,
| | 12:26 | we'll go a little bit of shading here with our light gray.
| | 12:29 | While we've got our Character Formatting
open let's change the Bold option.
| | 12:34 | Maybe it should be Centered so I'm going to
close up my Character Formatting docker here
| | 12:39 | and if you don't already have the Paragraph Formatting
docker open go up to Text, Paragraph Formatting,
| | 12:46 | we'll change our Alignment here to Center, and Center.
| | 12:52 | Some quick and easy changes to our table to make it look good.
| | 12:55 | Back to the Pick tool, click outside
the table to see the end result.
| | 13:00 | So if you've worked with tables and other
applications maybe you've used WordPerfect,
| | 13:04 | Microsoft Word, maybe Pages on the Mac, for example.
| | 13:08 | All of them allow you to work with tables and now
you can do it here in CorelDRAW and you can see much
| | 13:12 | of the techniques you use are exactly the same as
working with tables in those other applications.
| | 13:18 | So experiment with this new feature in CorelDRAW X4, Tables.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
4. Working with ObjectsSelecting and deleting objects| 00:00 | This next chapter is all about working with objects.
| | 00:03 | So the objects we were creating in the previous
chapter, now it's time to manipulate those objects.
| | 00:08 | So in this chapter, we'll be doing things like showing you ways
to select various objects on your page, moving and sizing them,
| | 00:15 | deleting them, modifying their appearance, arranging objects so
they lined up nicely on your page, working with multiple objects
| | 00:23 | and stacking orders, converting them, locking them,
lots to do in this chapter and we're going to start
| | 00:29 | in this lesson by examining a few selection techniques.
| | 00:32 | Obviously, if you want to make changes to
an object, you need to select it first.
| | 00:36 | And there is a few techniques that will come in handy when
working with objects especially multiple objects on a page.
| | 00:42 | So I've opened up a file here, it's
called GreenOnionFile1, it's a CDR file.
| | 00:46 | If you've got the exercise files, you'll find this in the Lesson4
folder if you'd like to follow along, you can open this one up.
| | 00:53 | So here we're on a page 1 which is our window sign, you
can see the Green Onion Bistro up at the top has a logo.
| | 00:59 | This is a fairly large page, it goes from 0 to 24 inches across
and it is 36 inches tall, this is going to go in the window
| | 01:07 | of the Bistro and it displays our Daily Specials.
| | 01:11 | Notice all of the different types of objects we have here, we got
the logo and the text below it, we've got this beige rectangle
| | 01:17 | which is on a background of a green rectangle, we've
got a couple of images down here, we got peas in the pot
| | 01:24 | and looks like a nice cool glass of
water with lemon wedges, beautiful.
| | 01:29 | And now it's time to make some changes,
modify our window sign here and to do that,
| | 01:35 | we'll need to be able to select certain objects.
| | 01:38 | So the easiest way to select an object, we've been doing it
in previous lessons is to make sure the Pick tool is selected
| | 01:45 | and just click on the object you want to modify.
| | 01:47 | Let's say I want to change this beige
background to a different color.
| | 01:50 | Well I click anywhere on the beige background, handles
appear around the outside, it tells me it's selected
| | 01:57 | but even more important is what appears down
below in the Status Bar, Curve on Layer 1.
| | 02:03 | So that's one object selected, it's called a
curve, so it was converted to curve so it's one
| | 02:08 | of those objects I could manipulate in its shape, in
its size, for example, we'll do some of that later on.
| | 02:13 | But now I know it's selected and I can start
doing things like changing the background.
| | 02:17 | Let's go to a nice maybe orangy color.
| | 02:20 | Well that doesn't work, so I'm going to click Undo right up here
on the Toolbar, click the Undo button or Ctrl+Z on your keyboard
| | 02:27 | if you like using the keyboard to set it back,
so maybe that's the best color for our rectangle.
| | 02:32 | So that's selecting one object, if I come down to
the peas in the pot and click that image is selected.
| | 02:39 | You can see down below, it's actually a JPEG and notice that
the other selection, my beige rectangle, is no longer selected.
| | 02:47 | If I click on the glass of water, well now it's selected.
| | 02:51 | Water in Bistro sign, its a GIF file, I get that information
down below here and if I wanted to select both of these images
| | 02:58 | and maybe do something special with like add an
effect, I need to be able to select multiple objects.
| | 03:05 | So here, I might just hold down my Shift key with one
object already selected, holding down Shift allows me
| | 03:11 | to select another object and keep the previous selection.
| | 03:15 | Now down below, it's telling me I've got 2 Objects Selected.
| | 03:18 | This is very important down here because if I look at the
handles, it looks like maybe Salad Bar Buffet is included
| | 03:25 | in that selection but it's not; it's
just the two objects on layer 1.
| | 03:29 | Don't worry about layers right now,
we're going to get into layers later on.
| | 03:33 | A great way to stay organized but we can select
multiple object on different layers as well.
| | 03:38 | Alright, what if I wanted to select my logo and the text
underneath it, I could click on the logo, hold down my Shift key,
| | 03:46 | click on the text below it, I've got two objects selected.
| | 03:49 | That's one method.
| | 03:50 | I'm going to press F4 on my keyboard
just to zoom in a little bit further.
| | 03:54 | Another method would be to marquee select the
objects that I want to select multiple objects.
| | 04:02 | So in this case, I'm going to click outside my page to de-select
anything, I'm going to start up here off the page and I'm going
| | 04:09 | to click and drag with my Pick tool and you
can see how it's drawing a little marquee.
| | 04:14 | When I let go, once I've surrounded totally the Green Onion
logo and the text below it, it is not partially covered;
| | 04:23 | it's actually fully included inside the marquee, when I
let go, you can see I've actually selected three objects.
| | 04:30 | The three objects are the logo, the text and this
little fade effect you see in the background.
| | 04:37 | So by using a Marquee select, I get one of
those objects I didn't even know was back there
| | 04:42 | and then I could start doing things with
this group of objects if I needed to.
| | 04:46 | What about all of the text, maybe I wanted to change
Vegetarian Lasagna, the chili, the Eggplant Parmesan
| | 04:53 | and the Salad Bar Buffet to different color, well
in that case my Marquee select probably won't work.
| | 04:59 | That's because I've got these dollar amounts in between.
| | 05:02 | So I'm going to press Shift+F4 to zoom back
out a little bit so I can see the entire page.
| | 05:08 | Let's say I started down here and clicked and drag up.
| | 05:12 | You can see if I wanted to get all of that text that's in
there, I have to encompass all of these dollar signs as well.
| | 05:19 | So the dollar amounts, I don't want to
make changes to, just the actual text.
| | 05:24 | So here's a little trick for you; holding down your Alt
key means you don't have to fully encompass an object,
| | 05:31 | all you have to do is touch it with your marquee.
| | 05:33 | So I'm going to hold down my Alt key, I'm going to click
and drag and you can see I'm just touching a little bit
| | 05:38 | of the text portions of the Daily Specials and when I look over
my mouse button first, you can see what gets selected here.
| | 05:45 | Well I get all of my text and my background because I did touch
my background and I did touch this beige rectangle as well.
| | 05:55 | So I've got six objects; one, two, three, four, five, and six.
| | 06:01 | Now if I want to de-select certain items without
de-selecting everything, I can hold down my Shift key,
| | 06:07 | I'm going to just click on the background, it's no
longer selected, see how I'm down to five objects.
| | 06:11 | I'm going to hold down Shift and click on the beige rectangle and
now I'm down to just those four objects that I wanted selected
| | 06:19 | and now I could change maybe the text color to something darker.
| | 06:22 | I'm going to come over here to my green, I'm going to hold it
down with my mouse button displays the extended color palette
| | 06:29 | and go to a darker green here in the middle on the far right.
| | 06:33 | And you can see that makes it a just a little bit easier
to read, so that's a little selection technique as well.
| | 06:40 | Do you want to select everything?
| | 06:42 | No problem, just double click your Pick tool.
| | 06:44 | Double clicking the Pick tool selects
everything that's on the page
| | 06:48 | and down below you can see that mean
16 objects across multiple layers.
| | 06:54 | Alright de-selecting is as easy as
clicking outside the selected items.
| | 06:58 | Another way to select is to go to your Edit menu.
| | 07:00 | If we go up to Edit, you'll see that we've got a Select
All option and Select All what is what appears over here
| | 07:08 | in the flyout menu; Objects, Text, or Guidelines.
| | 07:13 | Now we do have guidelines that are kind
of showing us the borders of our page.
| | 07:18 | If I click on Guidelines, you can see they
turn red, all four of them have turned red.
| | 07:24 | So now with those selected, if I didn't need them
anymore, for example, I could hit my Delete key.
| | 07:29 | Hitting my Delete key removes them so I don't have to see them
anymore, maybe I'm done with this page and no longer need them,
| | 07:36 | this gives me a better view of my finished work.
| | 07:39 | Let's go back up to the Edit menu, come down to Select All,
maybe I just want to select text objects, come down to Text
| | 07:47 | and only objects that contain text are selected.
| | 07:51 | So you can see them down here that includes
the dollar amounts, the descriptions.
| | 07:55 | It also includes up here underneath
my Green Onion logo, any text objects.
| | 08:01 | Let's go up to Edit, down to Select All and
over to Objects, this selects all objects,
| | 08:08 | very similar to double clicking the Pick tool.
| | 08:11 | I prefer a double click on the Pick tool rather than clicking
a menu down to a sub menu and making my selection from there.
| | 08:17 | But whatever your preference, whatever you are used
to, get comfortable in that method and keep it.
| | 08:23 | So those are some selection techniques.
| | 08:25 | Now obviously, we're going to use those techniques to modify
our objects, one way to modify an object is to simply delete it.
| | 08:33 | Maybe we don't want the peas down
here, while just clicking on an object,
| | 08:37 | the easiest way to delete is to hit
your Delete key on the keyboard.
| | 08:42 | Gone! that's my preference.
| | 08:44 | I'm going to undo that Ctrl+Z or click
your Undo button to bring it back.
| | 08:48 | Another method with a selected object is to right
click and you'll find Delete up here as well,
| | 08:54 | there is the keyboard shortcut, your Delete key, clicking
that deletes the object, Ctrl+Z to bring it back.
| | 09:02 | One last way is to go up to your Edit menu
and you'll see Delete down here as well.
| | 09:07 | So lots of different ways to delete objects, I
don't really want to delete the peas in the pot,
| | 09:12 | I'm going to de-select by clicking outside my
selected object and there is my finish product.
| | 09:18 | So you should be feeling pretty comfortable now with
selecting objects whether it's one or two or more objects,
| | 09:24 | various different ways to select objects, you'll find a method
that suits your needs best and probably stick to that method
| | 09:31 | but you should be familiar with all of
the different ways to make selections.
| | 09:35 | Now it's time to use those techniques to make
changes to our objects and in the next lesson,
| | 09:40 | we're going to start by looking at
ways to move and size your objects.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Moving and sizing objects| 00:00 | Now that you are comfortable with
various techniques for selecting objects
| | 00:04 | on your page, it's time to start manipulating them.
| | 00:08 | So in this lesson we're going to start
with moving and resizing objects.
| | 00:13 | There is a few different ways to do it
depending on how precise you need to be.
| | 00:16 | we're going to explore those using the same file we were
working with in the previous lesson, our GreenOnion file.
| | 00:22 | If you've skipped to this lesson and you want to get caught
up, you can go to the Lesson4 folder of your Exercise_Files
| | 00:28 | if you've got them and open up GreenOnionFile2,
it's a CorelDRAW file.
| | 00:33 | We're on our first page here, our Window Sign
and we're going to focus in on this image
| | 00:37 | down in the bottom left hand corner, the peas in a pot.
| | 00:41 | So let's zoom into that area using our Zoom tool, the
fourth button down in the Toolbox, now we'll just click
| | 00:46 | and drag over that area to zoom in to our image.
| | 00:50 | Now we know that when we use our Pick tool so click on
the Pick tool and click on an image, it becomes selected.
| | 00:57 | Now there is a number of things we can
do this, such as move it and resize it.
| | 01:02 | So let's start with moving this object.
| | 01:04 | If I want to move it over to the right
and up, I can simply click and drag.
| | 01:09 | So you can see clicking and drag,
I've got the four pointed arrow.
| | 01:12 | I can just move it into a location
where I want, by clicking and dragging.
| | 01:18 | If I want it maybe right at the very
bottom left hand corner of the page.
| | 01:22 | Well I can try and get it there but notice
that I'm allowed to overlap the edges.
| | 01:27 | So a good way to make sure that you're right
in the right spot is to use Guidelines.
| | 01:32 | We talked about those in the previous lesson.
| | 01:34 | We'll move over to the ruler on the left,
click and drag over and it snaps to the edge
| | 01:39 | of the page there, it also says edge on my mouse pointer.
| | 01:43 | And I'm going to drag one down as
well right into that spot right there.
| | 01:49 | Make sure from my View menu that Snap to Guidelines
is selected and it is, it's checked off right there.
| | 01:56 | So I can go back to my image, click on it and now when I move
it into the bottom left corner of the page see how it snaps
| | 02:03 | into position like a little magnet
just pulling in into that spot.
| | 02:06 | And when I release I know it's in
the exact location where I want it.
| | 02:10 | Now that's one way to move an object.
| | 02:13 | Let's click on our Guideline and a click here,
hit your Delete key, click on the other Guideline,
| | 02:19 | it turns red, hit your Delete key to remove those.
| | 02:22 | Another option is to choose a precise
co-ordinate for this actual image.
| | 02:28 | If you look up the Property Bar, for example, when the image is
selected so I will click on it, you're going to see the exact X
| | 02:35 | and Y co-ordinates according to the
Ruler and the center of this object.
| | 02:40 | The center it appears is at about 2.161 inches
and the Y-axis, you can see up about 3.317 inches.
| | 02:51 | And sure enough if I look at the Ruler
its over 3 inches here at the center
| | 02:54 | and it is pass the 2 inch markup here on my Horizontal Ruler.
| | 02:59 | So if I wanted the center point to
be exactly, let's say, 2.5 inches in,
| | 03:05 | I can just highlight everything after
the 2 point and type in a 5.
| | 03:09 | And maybe down below I want to bump this up to 3.8, change that
3.317 to an 8 and hit Enter and that's locked into position,
| | 03:19 | right where I want the center point to be so very precise.
| | 03:24 | So that's another way to move an object into a precise location.
| | 03:28 | There is yet one other way to move an object.
| | 03:30 | I'm going to move my pointer out here so it's
out of the way and we're going to move our object
| | 03:35 | with the keyboard using the actual keys on the keyboard.
| | 03:39 | So if I hit the right arrow, you can see how my
image is moving ever so slightly to the right,
| | 03:44 | if I hit the up arrow you can see it's slightly moving up.
| | 03:48 | Now it's not moving very far, where is this coming from.
| | 03:51 | Well I'm going to click out here off the page and from
my Property Bar over here you'll see our little symbol
| | 03:58 | for movement is set to 0.01 inches as our Nudge Offset.
| | 04:04 | That's exactly what we're doing, we're
nudging the object and with each tap
| | 04:08 | of the cursor key it's moving 0.01 inches on a very large page.
| | 04:13 | So we can change that if we want, I'm going to
change that from 0.01 to 0.1 by taking out the zero.
| | 04:20 | I'll hit Enter to lock that in and now when I click
on my object and start moving it with my up arrow,
| | 04:26 | you can see it's really moving much faster and much farther.
| | 04:30 | Now there are some other options for moving that if you need
| | 04:33 | to be even more precise there is Super
Nudging and Micro Nudging as well.
| | 04:39 | The easiest way to see those settings is
just to double click here on our Ruler,
| | 04:43 | I'm going to go to the Top Ruler and double click.
| | 04:45 | This is going to open up our Options under
Rulers, we can access that too from menus,
| | 04:50 | but you can see the nudge is now
set to 0.1, that's my new setting.
| | 04:55 | Super Nudge is 10 times of that.
| | 04:57 | So that means holding down my Shift
key while I hit the cursor keys
| | 05:01 | on my keyboard I'm going to move it
10 times 0.1 inch or a full inch.
| | 05:05 | Micro Nudging is divided 10.
| | 05:08 | So let's try those out and of course we
can change those values if we wanted to.
| | 05:11 | I'm going to bump that down to 5 and I'm
going to bump this one down to 5 as well.
| | 05:17 | There we go and when I click OK I've changed those settings.
| | 05:20 | So if I hit my down arrow I know it's going to move 0.1 inches.
| | 05:24 | If I hold down Shift and the down arrow
it's going to move a full inch, there we go.
| | 05:31 | Now if I hold down Ctrl you can see each tap
of the up arrow, its not moving very far.
| | 05:37 | So you've got all those options for being very precise and
of course you also have the ability to just click and drag,
| | 05:43 | another easy way to move to a specific location.
| | 05:47 | So I'm going to overlap both of those borders
ever so slightly and just leave it right there.
| | 05:52 | Alright, now it's time to talk about resizing your object.
| | 05:56 | We got a couple of options there as well.
| | 05:58 | The current size of my selected object
does appear here on the Property Bar
| | 06:02 | and you can see its set to 4.563
inches wide by 6.868 inches tall.
| | 06:09 | That represents about 68.7% of the actual size.
| | 06:14 | Now this little lock here is very important.
| | 06:17 | If I deselect the Lock and that might be your default,
you look closely at it, it toggles on and off.
| | 06:23 | If the Lock appears to be open, that means
I can change the proportions of my object.
| | 06:30 | But if I want to keep the proportions and just make it a little
bit smaller or little bit larger, this needs to be locked.
| | 06:36 | So I'm going to click on it, it appears
locked, the button appears to be pressed in
| | 06:40 | and now I can choose a percentage or an actual figure here.
| | 06:44 | Maybe it has to be exactly 4.8 inches wide.
| | 06:48 | Well I'm going to take out everything after the 4 point and put
in an 8 and when I hit Enter, look what happens to the size,
| | 06:54 | it's automatically adjusted to 7.225 so it keeps its proportions.
| | 07:00 | Now if I turn this lock off, and I
change this back to 4.5, hit Enter,
| | 07:06 | notice that the height did not change,
now I've got a taller skinnier graphic.
| | 07:11 | So I'm going to undo that because right now you can see the
percentage width wise is smaller than the percentage height wise.
| | 07:18 | So I'm going to undo that, and I'm going to lock my
proportions and I'm going to change this back to 4.5.
| | 07:24 | I'm going to take out the 8, put in the
5, hit Enter and everything is perfect.
| | 07:28 | So that's one way to size, obviously,
we can use the handles as well.
| | 07:34 | The sizing handles, they're really called Selection Handles.
| | 07:36 | I call them Sizing Handles, it's easier to remember because we
can go to these handles and when we see the double arrow appear,
| | 07:42 | we can click and drag to change the
height, that's squeezing it down.
| | 07:47 | We can change the widths by going to either side.
| | 07:51 | I'm going to go to the right side and
squeeze it in and pull it back out.
| | 07:55 | We can go to the corners and click and drag
and that's going to maintain proportions.
| | 08:00 | So whatever the proportion was when I started to click and
drag it's going to maintain those proportions unless I hold
| | 08:06 | down my Alt key, then I can overwrite that and
change both the width and the height simultaneously.
| | 08:12 | So let's go back here, change this to 67%,
tab down, change that to 67% and hit Enter.
| | 08:20 | You can see what happens it has already changed my height to keep
the proportions so I need to unlock to change this back to 67.
| | 08:29 | When I hit Enter, that's the size I want and now
I'll lock it so I never lose those proportions.
| | 08:34 | I'm also going to move it up slightly so that it's closer to
my beige rectangle and that's the spot I want it right there.
| | 08:42 | And deselect by clicking Off of the object.
| | 08:45 | So there are a couple of different
methods of moving and resizing an object.
| | 08:50 | I'm going to hold down Shift and press F4 to zoom back
out and try once more now but with multiple objects.
| | 08:57 | In this case I want to move all of these items
under Daily Special with there dollar amounts,
| | 09:01 | I want to move it down a little bit so I'm
going to use my Marquee Select that we learned
| | 09:05 | in the previous lesson, to highlight just those items.
| | 09:08 | There, they're all selected, eight objects
in all, says so down here on my Property Bar.
| | 09:13 | And I'm just going to use my Nudge key.
| | 09:16 | So the down arrow on my keyboard allows me to
move it down, there we go, 0.1 inch with each tap
| | 09:21 | and when I get to the spot where I want to be I stop.
| | 09:24 | I deselect by clicking out here on
the page and there is my end result.
| | 09:29 | Perfect. So all of those techniques for Moving
and Resizing apply to a single object as well
| | 09:34 | as many objects, just depends on what you've selected.
| | 09:37 | So that's just a couple of things
we can do with selected objects.
| | 09:40 | In the next lesson we're going to move
on to Rotating and Skewing those objects.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Rotating and skewing objects| 00:00 | Continuing to work with our Pick tool in this lesson,
we're going to move on now to selecting an object
| | 00:06 | and then rotating that object as well as skewing it.
| | 00:09 | A couple of things you can do with
just a few a clicks of your Mouse.
| | 00:12 | we're still working with our Green Onion file here.
| | 00:15 | If you've skipped to this lesson and you've got the exercise
files and you like to follow along and get all caught up,
| | 00:21 | go to the Lesson4 folder and open up GreenOnionFile3.cdr,
you'll have exactly what I have here on my screen.
| | 00:27 | Now just to experiment a little bit before
we work with our Daily Specials here.
| | 00:32 | Let's add a new page in front of the current page.
| | 00:35 | So I'm going to go down here to the bottom left corner,
click the plus sign left of where it says 1 of 3.
| | 00:40 | That adds a new blank page ready for me to work.
| | 00:44 | Right, let's just draw a simple object.
| | 00:46 | I'm going to go to this button here which is currently showing
my Spiral tool, but it's really the Polygon tool that I'm after.
| | 00:53 | I'm going to click on the Polygon tool, I'm going to come over
here, I'm going to click-and-drag, I'm going to hold down Ctrl
| | 00:59 | to keep it proportional, let go up my
Mouse first and now I've got my polygon.
| | 01:05 | Now I'm going to go to Shape tool.
| | 01:07 | This is all review and go to one of the
nodes up here and click-and-drag that in.
| | 01:12 | You can see I'm going to drawing a star here.
| | 01:15 | I hold down my Ctrl key, I'll constrain it.
| | 01:19 | Let go of the Mouse button first and there is my star and I guess
it should be filled with Yellow, so I'm going to click on Yellow
| | 01:26 | over here and I'm going to right-click up here on
Black which creates a black border around the outside.
| | 01:33 | Back to my Pick tool now and I'll deselect
that object to see what it looks like.
| | 01:37 | This is the perfect object for us to
work with for rotating and skewing.
| | 01:42 | So I'm going to click on the object.
| | 01:43 | Now we've seen this before, we've got our handles
around the outside, we use them for sizing,
| | 01:48 | and of course I can move this just by clicking-and-dragging
from anywhere inside the actual object that I've drawn,
| | 01:54 | but when I click a second time, look what happens.
| | 01:58 | Those handles have now changed in the corners to
rotation handles and at the mid points of the top,
| | 02:04 | bottom, left and right, I've got skewing handles.
| | 02:07 | So let's start with rotating.
| | 02:09 | As I click-and-drag to rotate you can see an outline
of what the end result will be when I let go.
| | 02:16 | And this is rotating around the center of the
Star, you can see that circle in the middle.
| | 02:20 | I'm going to rotate right to about there and let
go, and if you are wondering what that angle is,
| | 02:26 | look up here at your Property Bar, 90.9 degrees for me.
| | 02:30 | You'll have a different value there
depending on where you let go.
| | 02:33 | So it has to be exactly 45 degrees,
just click-and-drag up here, type-in 45,
| | 02:37 | hit Enter and you can see it's rotated
around to 45 degrees exactly.
| | 02:42 | Now like I said that's around the center,
we can move this point if we need to.
| | 02:46 | I'm going to move the center point down to the bottom
left point here of my star and now when I start rotating
| | 02:55 | by clicking-and-dragging, you can see
it's going around that rotation point.
| | 02:59 | So that's going to show up with different
values at the top, but the same degrees.
| | 03:05 | OK, so let's try 90 degrees, and Enter, there we go.
| | 03:11 | I'm going to move my point back into the center, tells me
when I hit the center I'll let go and I'm ready to rotate.
| | 03:21 | Beautiful!
| | 03:22 | So that's rotating, what about skewing?
| | 03:25 | Skewing is going to give a little
bit of perspective to your object.
| | 03:29 | Let's start at the top.
| | 03:30 | When I move up to this handle, at the top center, you can
see my pointer changes into that double arrow pointing
| | 03:36 | in two directions here, half arrows and I
can click-and-drag to skew or stretch it.
| | 03:41 | It's almost like I'm giving it perspective.
| | 03:43 | I can do that on the sides as well if I wanted
to and at the bottom, same thing, left side.
| | 03:52 | Until I get exactly what I'm looking for and then
I'm going to click again to move this into the center
| | 03:59 | of my page having rotated and skewed that object.
| | 04:03 | Must we talk about adding shadows later on, you can see the
real effect of skewing and adding perspective to an object.
| | 04:10 | Let's go down to where it says Page 1 here, right Mouse click
and choose Delete Page, you'll have to confirm this, there we go,
| | 04:18 | and we're back now to our first page, window sign and we're
going to make a change to this beige rectangle in the center.
| | 04:26 | So using what we just learned let's click on it and
then click on it again to see those rotation handles.
| | 04:33 | We'll keep rotation center point at the center
and we'll click-and-drag from the top left corner.
| | 04:39 | I'm going to hold down my Ctrl key
here, you can see it's constrained
| | 04:43 | to 15 degree increments and I'll
let go when it appears to be on 45.
| | 04:48 | So it'd be three clicks, I let go my Mouse button and you can
see now I have turned this on inside, I've got a diamond shape.
| | 04:55 | I'm going to click on it again and I'm going to size
it down, but I want to size it down from the center,
| | 05:00 | so I'm going to the top right-hand
corner here, hold down my Shift key.
| | 05:05 | So I'm going to hit Escape here.
| | 05:07 | Hold down my Shift key, didn't catch,
there it's catching this time.
| | 05:11 | Until I surrounded just the Daily Special items down below,
| | 05:15 | I'm not too worried about encompassing
the actual title Daily Special.
| | 05:19 | So right there it's pretty good.
| | 05:21 | Want to make sure I'm inside my borders, and let go, you can
see that's a totally different look for my Daily Specials.
| | 05:27 | So I click outside to see the end result.
| | 05:30 | Very nice!
| | 05:31 | Might have to do a little bit of altering
with my title, so it shows up better.
| | 05:35 | But that stuff we'll talk about in the upcoming lessons.
| | 05:38 | So rotating and skewing, very handy.
| | 05:41 | You know this when I was holding down my Ctrl
key and rotating it was in 15 degree increments.
| | 05:46 | If you are wondering why 15 and can you change that.
| | 05:48 | Well, absolutely, you can, just by going up to
tools on the tools menu to selecting Options,
| | 05:54 | all your CorelDRAW options appear here somewhere.
| | 05:57 | We're going to go to our Workspace, click the plus
sign and then click on Edit, the third one down.
| | 06:03 | There is our Constrain angle, so anytime you hold down Ctrl
| | 06:06 | to constrain something it's going to
be using that 15 degree increment.
| | 06:10 | Would you prefer to have 18, you can change that to
whatever you want and also use your Up and Down arrows.
| | 06:17 | Once you've got it set to what you want, clicking
OK will save those changes, I'm leaving mine at 15.
| | 06:24 | There we go.
| | 06:25 | So that's rotating and skewing.
| | 06:28 | Not very difficult but really changes the look and the feel
of your objects and if they are combined with other objects
| | 06:34 | such as our Daily Specials window sign here
you really start to see the difference.
| | 06:38 | And next, we're going to talk about
arranging objects on your page.
| | 06:42 | There are some helpful tips for getting things lined
up and centered and exactly where you need them
| | 06:46 | to be, we'll cover all of that in the next lesson.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Arranging objects| 00:00 | This next lesson is all about arranging objects on your page.
| | 00:04 | When you are working with multiple objects it's important you
understand how to arrange them properly as well as stack them
| | 00:10 | in the right order, so we're going to be
looking at both of those options in this lesson.
| | 00:14 | Here you can see in my Green Onion file for example,
I do have multiple objects on my window sign.
| | 00:20 | Got the logo and some text under that at the top.
| | 00:22 | They are nicely centered on the page,
that's an alignment feature.
| | 00:26 | Then I've got the Daily Specials in text which happens to be on
top of this beige rectangle turned on inside which happens to be
| | 00:32 | on top of the green rectangle in the
background, that's the stacking order.
| | 00:36 | So obviously it's very important that I'd be able to read my
text and that it not be behind either of those rectangles.
| | 00:43 | So we're going to look at these options using this file, the
GreenOnionFile that we have been working within previous lessons,
| | 00:48 | if you've jumped to this lesson, oh no sweat.
| | 00:50 | If you've got the exercise files you can get all caught up by
going to the Lesson4 folder and opening up GreenOnionFile 4,
| | 00:57 | you'll have exactly what I have here on the screen.
| | 01:00 | We're actually going to go over to the last page in this
document, so you can see I'm currently on Page 1 of 3,
| | 01:06 | clicking the arrow with the bar after it will take
me to the last page here which is my Business Card,
| | 01:11 | and you can see I've got some objects on this
card ready to start creating my Business Card.
| | 01:16 | So the order that these were brought in or
created on this particular page is very important.
| | 01:24 | For example, if I drag the broccoli here over the
onion, just partially covering the onion and let go,
| | 01:30 | you can see that I can only see part of the onion and
that's because the onion came first and then the broccoli.
| | 01:37 | If I move the broccoli over the tomatoes over here
on the right, just so it's partially covering,
| | 01:42 | may be totally covering that first tomato and let go.
| | 01:46 | I've actually moved it in behind the tomatoes.
| | 01:48 | Why? Well, the tomatoes came after the
broccoli and that's the default order.
| | 01:53 | So I'm going to move that back where it was.
| | 01:56 | This is also important when you are creating
something like this logo and text inside a rectangle.
| | 02:02 | So the order that they were created is important
and you need to understand how to change that order.
| | 02:07 | So that's we're going to do first.
| | 02:08 | I'm going to move this onion up here,
down in between my broccoli and tomatoes.
| | 02:13 | I'm going to click on this rectangle, I'm
just going to move it half way over the text
| | 02:18 | so you can see there is actually no fill here.
| | 02:20 | Now if I'm going to be changing the color of
my background or if I want to change the color
| | 02:25 | of this actual rectangle then it might not show up.
| | 02:30 | So let's see what happens if I change the
fill of my rectangle to a nice green color.
| | 02:37 | See how it overlaps my text and I can't see the text anymore.
| | 02:40 | Let's go to a lighter color.
| | 02:42 | I'm going to click-and-hold the green color.
| | 02:45 | So watch down and just move over here to a
lighter green in my extended palette, there we go.
| | 02:51 | And I'm going to move this up into the top left corner
of my Business Card; in the very top left corner there.
| | 02:59 | Alright, I might want to use guidelines if I want
to be precise, but that's a good spot right there.
| | 03:03 | Now, I'm going to move my text on top of this but
I know that I'm not going to be able to see it.
| | 03:08 | So the first thing I need to do is arrange
it so that it appears on top of my rectangle
| | 03:13 | by keeping it selected and going up to the Arrange menu.
| | 03:18 | Everything we need for arranging and aligning objects is here.
| | 03:22 | Click Arrange, go down to Order and here you'll
see some options with keyboard shortcuts.
| | 03:27 | If I want to move it on the page right to the
very front, so it's top of every other object,
| | 03:33 | I would choose To Front Of Page,
Ctrl+Home is the keyboard shortcut.
| | 03:37 | If I'm working with layers which we'll talk about later
on, I could use Shift+Page Up or click To Front Of Layer
| | 03:43 | to bring it to the top of that particular layer.
| | 03:46 | Forward One will step it through the various objects, so if
it was the third object created, Ctrl+Page Up moves it up,
| | 03:54 | so it's like it was the second again like it was the first.
| | 03:57 | So you can move it up and down using Forward One and Back One.
| | 04:00 | Back One is currently not available because
this is actually right at the very back.
| | 04:04 | So it can't go back any further.
| | 04:06 | And I also have the ability to put it in front
of or behind another object, this is great.
| | 04:12 | If for example I choose in Front Of, I now
have to select the object I want to move it
| | 04:18 | in front of and that happens to be my rectangle.
| | 04:21 | So click on it, now I can see all of my text, that's nice.
| | 04:25 | Alright, so that means I can go to the text right in the
center here and move it onto the rectangle, there we go.
| | 04:31 | I might want to change the color of this to
something lighter so I'm going to go over here
| | 04:36 | to my Color palette and click on White, that looks good.
| | 04:39 | Now for my Green Onion logo, I'm going to click on it.
| | 04:43 | I'm going to drag it over here on top of
the rectangle, and again I can't see that.
| | 04:49 | So do you remember the keyboard shortcut.
| | 04:51 | Well, Ctrl+Page Up will always move it to the top of
the page, and now I can see my logo here at the top.
| | 04:59 | So I've got my three items.
| | 05:00 | They are all stacked in the right
order, but are they aligned properly?
| | 05:05 | Well, for example if I wanted the vertical
axis of my text and my rectangle to be aligned
| | 05:11 | up perfectly I would select both of those items.
| | 05:13 | I'm going to click on the text first, with it selected I'm
going to hold down my Shift key and click on the rectangle.
| | 05:19 | So I've got those two selected.
| | 05:21 | Now I'm going to go up to the Arrange menu, but this
time I'm going to go down to Align and Distribute.
| | 05:27 | Do I want to align their left sides,
right sides, their tops, their bottoms?
| | 05:31 | No, none of those, but I could if I wanted to.
| | 05:34 | Do I want to Align their Centers Horizontally?
| | 05:36 | That's going to make them lined up perfectly in the center
horizontally, not exactly what I want but the next one there
| | 05:43 | out Align their Centers Vertically, yes, that is what I want.
| | 05:47 | So I'm going to click on this one.
| | 05:49 | You can see it just shifts over ever so slightly
to be perfectly centered inside the rectangle.
| | 05:54 | So I'm going to click out here to see the end result.
| | 05:57 | I can do the same now with my logo.
| | 05:59 | Click on the logo, hold down my Shift key, click on
the rectangle, I could have selected all three of them
| | 06:04 | but it's little bit easier to do them separately when
you are aligning them vertically down the center.
| | 06:10 | So it's a same procedure, Arrange, Align and Distribute.
| | 06:14 | Align centers Vertically, and it just shifts the onion over a
little bit and there is the top left corner of my Business Card.
| | 06:22 | Let's talk about distributing now.
| | 06:24 | I'm going to click-and-drag my broccoli down
towards the bottom here and my onion comes next.
| | 06:32 | I'm going to leave it little bit higher and my
tomatoes down here off to the right-hand side.
| | 06:38 | So let's say this is as far left as I want my broccoli to go,
it would be nice if these three items were lined up perfectly
| | 06:46 | across the bottom of my card and the
equal amount of space in between them.
| | 06:51 | I could try to manually do that, eye ball it so to speak
by clicking-and-dragging or I can marquee select all three
| | 06:58 | of these items and I click-and-drag
making sure that I select all three items.
| | 07:03 | It should say, 3 Objects Selected down below, and
with that done I can go up to my Arrange menu now.
| | 07:09 | Down to Align and Distribute.
| | 07:12 | And I can do a couple of things.
| | 07:14 | I can align their bottoms, I'm going
to do that first, Align Bottom,
| | 07:17 | you can see how they are all perfectly
lined up by their bottoms now.
| | 07:21 | I'm going to go back up to the top to Arrange, down to Align
and Distribute, and now I want to distribute them evenly.
| | 07:29 | So in other words, I want to center them may be on my
page, and down below you can see I've got Center to Page,
| | 07:35 | Center Page Horizontally and Vertically, but
really what I want to do is make sure they have
| | 07:39 | that equal amount of space in between them as well.
| | 07:42 | So in that case I need to go down to Align and Distribute.
| | 07:46 | When I click on this I get the little dialog box.
| | 07:48 | So this is going to allow me to do multiple things at once.
| | 07:52 | So for example if I wanted to align up their
bottoms here I could, just by choosing Bottom,
| | 07:57 | that's already have been done, but I could do it from here.
| | 08:00 | Next, I can go over to the Distribute
Tab and what do I want to do here.
| | 08:05 | To the extent of the selection that means, this
is as far as the selections will go left or right.
| | 08:10 | The broccoli to the tomato or do I want to
use the whole page for distributing them.
| | 08:16 | I want to use extensive selection, so
I don't want the page involved here.
| | 08:20 | I said that as far as I want my broccoli to go and my tomato
to go, it's the onion that needs to get fixed up in the middle.
| | 08:28 | So now what do I want to do.
| | 08:30 | Spacing, you can see I've got Left,
Center, there's Spacing and Right,
| | 08:36 | or over here if I was twice doing it vertically
I've got Top, Center, Spacing and Bottom.
| | 08:40 | So let's get them centered.
| | 08:43 | Click Apply, you can see how the onion
just moves right into the center,
| | 08:47 | everything is perfectly centered
across my selection not the page.
| | 08:52 | When I click Apply that happens, I can close it now and then
I'm just going to move this down by hitting my Down Arrow
| | 08:59 | on the keyboard that's my Nudge key remember, and use Ctrl to
nudge it up ever so slightly and that's perfect right there,
| | 09:06 | I click to deselect and that is Align and Distribute.
| | 09:10 | So stacking order and aligning and distributing,
something you can do with multiple objects on a page,
| | 09:16 | it's going to be very important especially
when we start working with layers later
| | 09:20 | on to understand stacking order, aligning and distributing.
| | 09:24 | So we've got a good head start now on our Business
Card and we're ready to move on to the next lesson.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Grouping and ungrouping multiple objects| 00:00 | In this lesson we're going to explore a concept here in
CoralDRAW X4 that's extremely important when it comes to working
| | 00:06 | with multiple objects and that is Grouping and Ungrouping.
| | 00:10 | Typically when you are creating objects those objects are
made up of several other objects, and then to treat the group
| | 00:16 | as one they need to be officially grouped together.
| | 00:20 | So we're going to look at Grouping
and Ungrouping now in this lesson.
| | 00:22 | We are going to continue to use the file we've been
working with in the previous lessons our Green Onion file.
| | 00:27 | If you've skipped to this lesson though and you'd like
to follow along and you do have the exercise files
| | 00:32 | in the Lesson4 folder is a file called GreenOnionFile5.
| | 00:36 | If you open that one up you will be all
caught up, we're on the third page here,
| | 00:39 | the last page of our document, our Business Card.
| | 00:43 | So in the previous lesson we were talking about stacking
order and we stacked these three objects over here,
| | 00:48 | so it looks like we've got our rectangle in the
background, our text and our Green Onion logo on top.
| | 00:54 | Now if I was to go to this green rectangle and click-and-drag
it over to the right, you can see I've just moved the rectangle.
| | 01:00 | All of those objects are not yet officially grouped together.
| | 01:04 | Ctrl+Z will move it back and behind my white text and my logo.
| | 01:09 | So if I want to be only treat this area as one object
I need to group all three of these objects together.
| | 01:15 | So I'm going to click-and-drag around the
outside to marquee select, all three objects.
| | 01:19 | How do I know it's three objects?
| | 01:21 | Take a look down below, 3 Objects are now selected.
| | 01:24 | There are three separate objects but
we're going to put them together.
| | 01:27 | Now there are three different ways to group objects together.
| | 01:30 | You can go to your Property Bar there
is a Group button right here.
| | 01:33 | Since you select multiple objects you've got your
Group button, Ctrl+G on the keyboard, easy to remember,
| | 01:39 | G as in Group or you can go up to the Arrange
menu and you'll find a Group there as well.
| | 01:44 | So I'm going to click on Group which groups these together
now and if I look down at my Status Bar, it now says,
| | 01:51 | Group of 3 Objects, not 3 Objects
Selected but Group of 3 Objects.
| | 01:56 | That means if I come over here and click-and-drag the
green rectangle, look at that, everything moves together.
| | 02:02 | Ctrl+Z is going to pop it back into its right spot there.
| | 02:06 | So grouping objects together, pretty easy.
| | 02:08 | Sometimes though when you need to
work on individual pieces of an object
| | 02:12 | that are already been grouped together, you need to ungroup them.
| | 02:16 | Let's use our tomatoes down here for an example.
| | 02:18 | I'm going to click on the tomatoes, there are two tomatoes
here and you can see it's really one object as I move them
| | 02:24 | around at least it's been treated as one object.
| | 02:26 | If I look down below, it's actually a group of two objects.
| | 02:30 | It looks like two tomatoes, two separate objects.
| | 02:33 | So may be I just wanted one tomato, well,
in that case I need to ungroup these first.
| | 02:38 | So again, we have a couple of different ways to ungroup.
| | 02:41 | Up on my Property Bar, I'll find an Ungroup button,
Ctrl+U is the keyboard shortcut and just next
| | 02:49 | to that is another option it's called Ungroup All, and this
works differently than just simply ungrouping the two objects.
| | 02:57 | It's time to talk about nested groups.
| | 03:00 | We go back to our logo over here, the Green Onion Logo which
is inside now this green rectangle along with the text.
| | 03:06 | There are three objects grouped together, but the logo itself is
also made up of several objects, so we call this a Nested Group.
| | 03:14 | So same thing goes for our tomatoes.
| | 03:16 | You can see the tomatoes are probably made up of
several objects each and then created as one group
| | 03:22 | and then the two tomatoes grouped together give us
our single object here or a group of two objects.
| | 03:29 | So when I go up to Ungroup, I know I'm just going
to be ungrouping the two objects currently selected.
| | 03:35 | I'm going to give it a click.
| | 03:37 | Now I'm going to deselect and I'm going to
go this tomato here and just click-and-drag.
| | 03:41 | You can see I was able separate it from the other tomato.
| | 03:44 | But if I look at this tomato down below on my
Status Bar, it's actually a group of 11 objects.
| | 03:50 | So these 11 objects in here make up my tomato.
| | 03:54 | If I do a Ctrl+Z to move the tomato back into position
and I select both of these with our marquee select
| | 04:02 | and group them back together, Ctrl+G
or click the Group button right here.
| | 04:07 | Let's talk about Ungroup All now.
| | 04:09 | Ungroup All is actually going to ungroup not just the two
objects, but all 11 objects in this tomato and all the objects
| | 04:16 | in the other tomato that make it appear the way it does.
| | 04:19 | So let's try that.
| | 04:20 | I click Ungroup All, now if I come down and deselect
and I want to move this tomato click-and-drag.
| | 04:27 | Now I have only moved this red circular shape, you can
see the other objects in here have all been separated
| | 04:34 | and there are many objects that make up this
one tomato, same thing for the other one.
| | 04:39 | So Ctrl+Z, the Undo shortcut a number of times will bring that
all back together and now I'm going to marquee select both
| | 04:47 | of my tomatoes and group them back together, there we go.
| | 04:53 | Now I notice that it's a group of 22
objects not two objects but 22 objects.
| | 04:59 | So it's important to understand the difference between
Ungroup and Ungroup All and then if you ungroup everything
| | 05:05 | and then just group everything back together,
it's not two objects anymore, it's 22 objects.
| | 05:09 | So that's good if you want to be able to work on individual
pieces, if you don't want that, then go back to Ungroup All,
| | 05:16 | and then you want to make sure you marquee select just
the pieces that you want to be able to group together.
| | 05:23 | So if I wanted just this tomato here, I want to make sure I get
just that piece of the tomato and then try to group that together
| | 05:30 | as one object by clicking my Group button, and
then I come over here, select the other tomato,
| | 05:37 | group that together and now I've got my two objects.
| | 05:40 | So when I select both of those and click the group button once
more I'm back to a group of two objects as opposed to 22 objects.
| | 05:50 | So I hope that makes sense.
| | 05:51 | Let's re-enforce that with our logo over here.
| | 05:54 | When I click over here on my logo, you can see down below it
is part of a group of three objects, my text and my background.
| | 06:02 | So if I click on the Ungroup button, I'll
ungroup those three, I want to do that, OK.
| | 06:07 | Now I'm going to go to my logo and just
drag it out here where you can see it
| | 06:12 | and show you down below that's a Group of 7 Objects.
| | 06:15 | So clicking Ungroup now would ungroup those seven objects, but
of course, if I've done the Ungroup All from the beginning,
| | 06:22 | I would have not just three objects, I would have all seven
of my logo objects plus these two for a total of nine.
| | 06:30 | So it really depends on what part
of the group you need to work on.
| | 06:33 | I'm going to move that back into position right there and I want
to group those three together, I don't want to ungroup my logo,
| | 06:40 | I want to keep it together so I'm going to group those together
| | 06:43 | and with them grouped together now I can do
things like move all three around together.
| | 06:48 | I can click again and rotate this if I wanted to.
| | 06:51 | Everything rotates not just the rectangle
but the text and the logo.
| | 06:56 | I could also size it.
| | 06:58 | If I want to size it down or size it up I could
do just that by clicking-and-dragging handles.
| | 07:02 | I'm going to hold down Ctrl and press
Z several times until I get it back
| | 07:07 | in the top left corner as a group
of three objects, so there we go.
| | 07:12 | Now you should understand Grouping, Ungrouping and
the difference between Ungroup and Ungroup All.
| | 07:18 | This will become very handy as we start creating our own
objects as we move through the lessons in this title.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Converting objects| 00:00 | In this lesson we're going to dive deeply into
converting objects, something we touched on briefly
| | 00:05 | in a previous lesson when we discussed the Shape tool.
| | 00:08 | But this time we're going to talk not only about
converting objects to curves so we can have more flexibility
| | 00:14 | in manipulating those objects, but we're also going to look at
converting outlines into objects, and even creating boundaries.
| | 00:21 | So we're going to use this file here that's called Go1.cdr,
you'll find it in the Lesson4 folder of your exercise files
| | 00:28 | if you've got them, you can see I've got two characters
here a G and an O and I've got a shape here as well
| | 00:33 | that was created using the perfect shapes collection.
| | 00:36 | So I'm going to start with this shape right here.
| | 00:38 | If I click on it, you can see it's selected
and if I want to change the color I just go
| | 00:42 | over to my Color palette for example and click.
| | 00:45 | If I want to change the boundary or the border around the outside
also known as the Outline, right-click on the color that I want
| | 00:52 | over here in the palette and it changes the color nicely, OK.
| | 00:55 | So there are some things I can do.
| | 00:56 | Now if I want to change the shape of this.
| | 00:58 | There is a node that appears in here.
| | 01:00 | So let's go to our Shape tool, second button down
over here, just one click to select the Shape tool.
| | 01:06 | And now if I go to this node you can see
I can make the arrow head longer, shorter.
| | 01:12 | I can also increase or decrease the width of the tail behind
the arrow until I get the shape I'm after, one single node.
| | 01:19 | If I want to make some other alterations
like may be change the actual shape,
| | 01:23 | you can see I don't have any other nodes that I can edit.
| | 01:26 | Nodes appear as I hover over the mid section here of this
line for example but I can't click-and-drag to do anything.
| | 01:32 | Not unless I convert it to something called a curve.
| | 01:36 | So let's do that, now we'll go up to Arrange, Convert To
Curves, down near the bottom Ctrl+Q is the keyboard shortcut,
| | 01:45 | and now all of those nodes are visible and with my Shape
tool, I can go to those nodes now and start making changes.
| | 01:53 | So if I really wanted to alter the shape I can now.
| | 01:57 | Things I couldn't do without converting it first to curves.
| | 02:01 | I'm going to drag these nodes up and out
a little bit just to change that shape.
| | 02:08 | I can hold down my Ctrl key if I want to try and constrain
some of the angles but I think that's a good angle right there.
| | 02:15 | So it's a little bit wider at the end
than at it is up near the arrow head.
| | 02:19 | So converting an object like this to curves will definitely
give me more flexibility when manipulating the object.
| | 02:26 | Well, the same goes for text.
| | 02:27 | So I'm going to go over to my G right
here, click on it and this is text.
| | 02:32 | I can tell when I go up to my Property Bar it's using the
font Arial Black 200 points and down below it's Artistic Text.
| | 02:40 | It's not really an object, there are no nodes for me to edit.
| | 02:43 | Yes, I can change the shape by changing the
size and I can move it around a little bit,
| | 02:48 | but that's about if for the single character.
| | 02:50 | If I really want to make some manipulations to the
shape of this character I have to convert it to a curve.
| | 02:57 | So again, up to Arrange and down to Convert
To Curves, now I'm going to have the ability
| | 03:03 | to make all those adjustments I could
to any other object using my Shape tool.
| | 03:08 | Click on the Shape tool, look at all the
nodes around the outside and in fact if I look
| | 03:12 | down at the bottom there are actually
25 nodes I can edit at this point.
| | 03:16 | So if I want to alter the shape of G I could
start dragging out nodes, really change the look
| | 03:27 | and fiddle up this character creating
my own character so to speak.
| | 03:35 | Now this is not any font that you would be
able to find, so just play around a little bit
| | 03:39 | with the nodes you can create whatever shape you
want out of the G if you are following along.
| | 03:45 | I'm going to drag that out a little bit too, there we go.
| | 03:49 | It's kind of a rugged looking G and I can do the
same with the letter O if I wanted to of course.
| | 03:54 | I need to select it first, go up to a Arrange and convert
it to curves before I can make any of those adjustments.
| | 04:01 | Now with my Shape tool look at all
the nodes down here 18 altogether.
| | 04:06 | So I'm just going to squeeze in the sides
here a little bit by dragging these nodes in,
| | 04:12 | and then that's probably good enough right there.
| | 04:14 | I'm going to click on my Pick tool.
| | 04:15 | Now I've really altered the look of those characters.
| | 04:18 | The only drawback of course is that they are no longer
characters so I can't change fonts and apply character attributes
| | 04:24 | like I could to text because they aren't text,
they are actually objects that have been converted.
| | 04:28 | Now I'm going to look at another feature, I'm
going to move this out of the way a little bit,
| | 04:32 | just move it over towards the G and click on my arrow again.
| | 04:35 | Now the border that goes around the outside is
quite thick, I'm going to make it even thicker,
| | 04:39 | I'm going to go to my dropdown here
and bring it up to 10 millimeters.
| | 04:44 | So you can really see, it stands out here.
| | 04:46 | Now if I want to change the color, we already know I right-click
on the color over here on the Color palette to do that.
| | 04:51 | What if I wanted to treat that outline,
that border like any other object.
| | 04:56 | So I could do things to it like change the
fill and put a pattern in there for example.
| | 05:01 | Well, I can't do that unless I separate it from the
object and create its own object out of the outline,
| | 05:07 | and I do that by going up to the Arrange menu, you
can see I have got a convert outline to an object.
| | 05:14 | Ctrl+Shift+Q is the keyboard shortcut for that.
| | 05:16 | So I give that a click, and now this outline is
actually its own object, meaning I can move it away
| | 05:22 | from the rest of the arrow and make alterations to this.
| | 05:26 | So if I just want to make alterations for example to the shape,
| | 05:30 | I could go to my Shape tool, and
got all these nodes I can work with.
| | 05:34 | Drag that out a little bit if I needed to, or remove
node just by right-clicking and choosing Delete.
| | 05:39 | I'm going to delete a couple here in the bottom corner and
I'm going to drag this corner just out a little bit there.
| | 05:47 | That's kind of what I was after.
| | 05:49 | If I want to change the fill, it's an object now, so I could.
| | 05:53 | This is a little bit of a preview for your Fill tool, I'm going
to click on the Fill, hold it down and go down to a Texture Fill.
| | 06:00 | So I can fill this up with a texture.
| | 06:02 | Look at all the samples to choose
from here as we go through them.
| | 06:05 | I'm going to choose Air brush and click OK.
| | 06:08 | You can see now I've got that Air brush Fill
inside what used to be the outline around my arrow.
| | 06:14 | Now I can go back to my Pick tool and I can move that
back down, get it close to my arrow, there we go.
| | 06:21 | And when I let go you can see the
effect that that has, very cool stuff!
| | 06:25 | I think I'll change the fill here for the inside arrow now which
is its own separate object to something a little bit darker,
| | 06:32 | I'm going to go up to Blue here and I like the looks of that.
| | 06:36 | One more feature to look at and that's creating boundaries,
something I came around in the last version of CorelDRAW,
| | 06:41 | I'm going to take my O and I'm going to move it right
in here, I'm going to take my G, move it in here,
| | 06:50 | I'm going to size this up, a little bit bigger.
| | 06:57 | With O, same thing I'm going to go
to the corner up here and deselect.
| | 07:03 | You can see now I've got my three objects they are kind of piled
on top of each other, I can see the arrow in the background,
| | 07:09 | I can see the G and the O, and now what we're
going to do is create a boundary that will go
| | 07:13 | around the outside of all three of these objects.
| | 07:17 | This is really handy for people doing underlays
if you are into vinyl sign making or engraving.
| | 07:23 | This allows you to create the outline that's
going to be created by these three objects.
| | 07:29 | So all I have to do is marquee select them, click-and-drag around
the outside of all three of those objects with my Pick tool
| | 07:35 | and go up to the Effects menu here to find Create Boundary.
| | 07:39 | Clicking Create Boundary is going to do just that,
it creates an outline around the outside of all three
| | 07:45 | of these objects creating a new shape, so if I go to
the center here where I see the X and with my Mouse,
| | 07:52 | just drag that out you can see I've got
the outline of all three of those objects,
| | 07:58 | and like I said if I was an Engraver for
example this could come in very handy.
| | 08:02 | I can move that back into position at least as close
as I can and just deselect by clicking outside.
| | 08:09 | So there is a totally different effect
by being able to create that boundary.
| | 08:13 | So you should be feeling quite comfortable now
converting objects, converting them to curves,
| | 08:17 | converting your outlines into their own objects which
can come in very handy as well as creating boundaries.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Locking objects| 00:00 | In this lesson we're going to explore the importance
of being able to lock objects on your drawing page.
| | 00:07 | So we're going to work with the file that we have been using
through most of the lessons in this chapter our Green Onion File
| | 00:13 | and if you are jumping to this lesson or you
have closed up your other file no problem,
| | 00:17 | you can go to the Lesson4 Folder of the exercise files.
| | 00:20 | If you have got them open up GreenOnionFile6.cdr you
will have exactly what I have here on our first page.
| | 00:27 | So this is our Window Sign and I'm going to show
you the importance of being able to lock an object.
| | 00:32 | Let's say we wanted to select our Daily Specials here,
so each one of the specials as well as the title.
| | 00:38 | We know we can do a Marquee select which is just simply clicking
and dragging around the outside of those objects, right?
| | 00:44 | So if I click and drag across -- when I let go I have
actually moved an object which is my background here.
| | 00:53 | It's a green rectangle, so I'm going to do a
Ctrl+Z a couple of times to move that back.
| | 00:59 | So it's very difficult to actually click
and drag around the outside of those objects
| | 01:03 | when I'm actually clicking on a green rectangle and moving it.
| | 01:06 | So it might be very handy if I could lock that,
meaning it's almost like it's not even there
| | 01:11 | and be able to Marquee select other objects on my page.
| | 01:14 | So to do that we just click on the object that we want to lock.
| | 01:18 | There is a couple of options, we can go up to our
Arrange menu, you will see Lock Object right there.
| | 01:23 | Another option I'm going to click off the menu
here, is just to right click on the object,
| | 01:28 | right mouse click and choose Lock Object from there.
| | 01:31 | As soon as you do, look what happens to
those little handles around the outside.
| | 01:34 | They turn into little padlocks.
| | 01:37 | That means now if I try to click and drag I'm not going to be
able to move that object in fact I'm doing a Marquee select.
| | 01:44 | So if I wanted to I can come in here now and Marquee select all
| | 01:47 | of my Daily Specials including that
title without moving the background.
| | 01:51 | So that's a very typical application for locking
objects when you have got a background there.
| | 01:57 | Now you can also try to lock multiple objects onto
a page if you wanted to, again just Marquee select.
| | 02:03 | Let's say I don't want this logo, the text underneath it and
that effect in behind it ever move; it has to stay right there.
| | 02:10 | I can Marquee select that and you see say I
have got all three objects selected down here,
| | 02:15 | three object selected across multiple layers and then I can go
up to my Arrange menu or right click whatever you like to do.
| | 02:22 | I'm going to go up to Arrange, choose Lock Objects
and now they are locked into position as well.
| | 02:28 | I will never be able to come in here and actually move those.
| | 02:31 | See how they are locked.
| | 02:32 | I can select them but they won't move.
| | 02:35 | Now if I click on a locked object like
my background or my text here for example
| | 02:41 | and I try to make a change like change the color of that text.
| | 02:44 | Notice what happens the Uniform Fill dialog box shows up
here because it's as if I don't have anything selected.
| | 02:51 | So CorelDRAW is thinking do you want
to set up a Default Filled Color?
| | 02:55 | I'm going to hit Cancel.
| | 02:56 | So I can't even make changes to the appearance
of those objects once they are locked.
| | 03:00 | Now to unlock an object I can right click on it and choose Unlock
Object and when you have got multiple objects that are locked
| | 03:09 | like we have our logo here, the little
background as well as our green background,
| | 03:13 | we can actually go up to the Arrange menu
and choose to unlock all the objects.
| | 03:17 | Unlock All Objects right there will unlock everything.
| | 03:21 | So I'm back where I started, in fact I could move that background
or make changes to it if I needed to, Ctrl+Z will move that back
| | 03:28 | in position and that is one I definitely want locked, so I'm
going to right click on it and I'm going to keep it locked
| | 03:34 | and I'm going to keep everything else unlocked.
| | 03:36 | So now I have got my background sitting
there, it won't move, it can't be changed
| | 03:40 | and I can continue working on the other objects on my page.
| | 03:44 | So you should have a good understanding of the importance of
being able to lock objects on your page here in CorelDRAW X4.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Cutting and copying objects| 00:00 | As you continue to work in CorelDRAW X4, one of the things you
will be doing on an ongoing basis I guarantee it is cutting,
| | 00:07 | copying and pasting, whether it be objects
or the properties in those objects,
| | 00:12 | you need to know some of the techniques
you can use to save some time
| | 00:15 | when borrowing objects and their properties to create duplicates.
| | 00:19 | So I have opened up a file here called CCP1.cdr, it's in
the Lesson4 folder of the exercise files, if you've got them
| | 00:26 | and want to follow along you can
open this one up, it's a two-pager.
| | 00:30 | I'm on Page 1, I've got several shapes.
| | 00:32 | On Page 2 you can see it's just a blank page.
| | 00:35 | I'm going to go back to Page 1.
| | 00:37 | Let's start with just a simple copy.
| | 00:40 | I'm going to click on my red rectangle here which happens
to be a perfect square and if I want a copy of this,
| | 00:46 | I can go up to the Edit menu and
you'll notice that Copy appears here.
| | 00:50 | The keyboard shortcut if you prefer using the keyboard is Ctrl+C.
| | 00:54 | I'm going to just click out here outside
the menu to close it up and show you
| | 00:57 | that from the Standard toolbar you also have a Copy button and
even faster if you are using the Mouse already is to right-click
| | 01:05 | on an object and you'll notice that Copy also appears here.
| | 01:08 | Four different ways to copy this object.
| | 01:10 | When you click on Copy, whichever method
you choose, you are actually taking a copy
| | 01:15 | of the selected object and placing it in the Windows Clipboard.
| | 01:19 | That's important because if you were to flip over to
another application, may be Microsoft Word for example,
| | 01:25 | you can paste right into your Word document out of your
CorelDRAW file here, or vice versa if you've got images
| | 01:32 | in another application that can be
copied and pasted here in CorelDRAW.
| | 01:36 | We're just going to work on our page for now and
then we'll talk about multiple pages in a moment.
| | 01:41 | So once I have copied, it's waiting to be pasted
I can choose where it's going to be pasted.
| | 01:45 | If I go up to my Paste button, you'll notice that Ctrl+V
is the keyboard shortcut, I could also go to the Edit menu,
| | 01:52 | I'm going to click Paste here and it appears as though nothing
has really happened, but because I copied the rectangle
| | 01:59 | and pasted it without choosing a location,
it's pasted in the exact same position,
| | 02:04 | meaning if I click-and-drag this little square out of
the way you can see I've got an exact duplicate now.
| | 02:10 | So that's copying.
| | 02:11 | What if I want to copy to another page?
| | 02:14 | Well, all I do is copy clicking the
Copy button go to the next page,
| | 02:20 | in this case I'm going to go to Page
2 and click your Paste button.
| | 02:25 | There it is, and it's in the exact
same location where I copied it from.
| | 02:30 | So I copied the second object when I pasted it appears in
the same location, so imagine if you've got multiple pages
| | 02:36 | and you need an object like a logo for example to appear
on the exact same location you get consistency this way.
| | 02:42 | I'm going to hit Delete though to delete
this, I'm going to go back to Page 1.
| | 02:46 | What if I actually wanted to remove this
second copy from Page 1 and put it on Page 2?
| | 02:52 | There are a couple of options here.
| | 02:54 | One is to cut it using the scissors up here or going to
the Edit menu, choosing Cut, right-clicking, choosing Cut,
| | 03:01 | Ctrl+X is your keyboard shortcut, lots of options.
| | 03:04 | When you cut an object, it's removed
from its current location placed
| | 03:08 | in the Windows Clipboard and now it's waiting to be pasted.
| | 03:11 | So I could go to Page 2 and paste it by clicking my Paste button,
Ctrl+V would work, and it's pasted in the exact same location.
| | 03:19 | I'm going to click Undo, I'm going to flip over to Page 1 and
undo the cut so it's right back and show you another method
| | 03:29 | for moving an object from one page to another,
and that's really what cutting and pasting does.
| | 03:34 | Removes it from one location to put it in another.
| | 03:36 | Well, an easier way might be just to
click-and-drag it down to the Page 2 tab.
| | 03:42 | When you hit the Page 2 tab you're
actually switching over to Page 2.
| | 03:45 | You are going to see little nodes representing
the original location of this object.
| | 03:50 | If you wanted to place it there, you could, but if you want
to put it in another location like the center of the page,
| | 03:55 | just release your mouse button and you will have
removed it from Page 1 and placed it on Page 2.
| | 04:01 | If I go back to Page 1, notice that that duplicate is now gone.
| | 04:05 | So that's a handy little feature as well for taking
objects from one page and putting them on another.
| | 04:10 | Now let's talk about copying properties.
| | 04:12 | You see I've got some other shapes
and they've got different fill colors.
| | 04:16 | The border around the outside, they
are all black and the same width.
| | 04:19 | Down below though this rectangle has a fill attribute
| | 04:23 | and you can see it's got a thicker broader
and a different color around the outside.
| | 04:27 | If I wanted to take these properties and put it into my
circle, one way would be to right-click and drag this rectangle
| | 04:36 | and drop it right here in the center of my circle.
| | 04:39 | And when I let go I see a little
menu pop-up giving me some options.
| | 04:43 | Well, I actually don't want to move the rectangle or copy
it to that location, I'm interested in the properties.
| | 04:49 | Notice I've got three options for that, Copy the
Fill here, the outline or all of the properties
| | 04:56 | which would be both the fill and the outline.
| | 04:58 | So when I click on Copy All Properties, look what happens.
| | 05:01 | It's got that thicker broader now, changed color and
has the same fill that I see here in my rectangle.
| | 05:08 | Now another way to do that is to copy the object and
then choose where you want to get the properties from.
| | 05:14 | So if I click on my triangle now and I go up to
the Edit menu and choose Copy Properties From,
| | 05:23 | I now have to select which properties
and where I'm going to get them from?
| | 05:27 | So if it's just the Fill or if it's
the Outline Color and the Pen,
| | 05:32 | which is that thickness of the border I can choose
all three of those or any combination of those three.
| | 05:37 | Let's say I just want the fill, I click OK and now I choose the
object where I want to get the fill from, if it's my rectangle,
| | 05:46 | I click on the rectangle with the arrow and the fill
only in this case is transmitted over to my triangle.
| | 05:54 | So I've got the exact same fill showing up in these two objects.
| | 05:57 | So couple of different ways for copying
properties from one location to another.
| | 06:02 | Well, you should be feeling comfortable now with the
different methods of cutting, copying and pasting,
| | 06:06 | not just objects but object properties as well.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Duplicating and cloning objects| 00:00 | In the previous lesson we explored cutting and copying and
pasting, and in this lesson we're going to look at another couple
| | 00:07 | of versions of copying and pasting
known as Duplicating and Cloning.
| | 00:11 | They work a little bit differently, it can really save you a lot
of time when you need to repeat objects somewhere on your page.
| | 00:17 | So you can see a foot back to my Green Onion file here, if
yours isn't open or you've skipped to this lesson, no problem.
| | 00:23 | If you've got the exercise files go to the
Lesson4 folder, open up GreenOnionFile6.cdr
| | 00:29 | and click on Page 3 our Business Card you will be caught up.
| | 00:32 | Alright, I'm going to marquee select my onion and
tomatoes and I'm just going to move them up here
| | 00:38 | out of the way temporarily and focus in on my broccoli.
| | 00:41 | Now if I want to duplicate this piece of broccoli and
repeat it across the bottom of my Business Card let's say.
| | 00:48 | Well, I know that I can go up to the Edit menu, choose Copy and
then if I needed to paste it and position it where it needs to go
| | 00:55 | and then repeat that process for
as many pieces of broccoli I need.
| | 00:59 | Well, in this case I'm going to use duplicating
which is faster and doesn't even use the Clipboard.
| | 01:04 | So I can go up to the Edit menu if I need to and select
Duplicate, but notice that the keyboard shortcut is Ctrl+D.
| | 01:11 | Another one that's easy to remember D as in Duplicate.
| | 01:14 | When I click on it you can see what happens, the Duplicate
Offset dialog box will appear here the first time.
| | 01:20 | Now in this case the default offsets are going to tell me
something about my piece of broccoli and it's duplicate.
| | 01:27 | The duplicate we're about to create will be horizontally offset
by a quarter inch, meaning it's going to move over to the right
| | 01:35 | by a quarter inch and the vertical
offset is also a quarter of an inch.
| | 01:39 | So it's going to move up a quarter of an inch.
| | 01:41 | In other words, my duplicate will be up on an angle to
the right and above my original sprig of broccoli here.
| | 01:49 | So if the defaults are OK with you, you just click OK,
otherwise, you can manipulate these values here if you needed
| | 01:55 | to create a larger or a smaller value, you can use
your arrows or just type-in the value you want.
| | 02:01 | I'm just going to click OK to see
what happens with the duplicate.
| | 02:04 | See how it's moved up and over.
| | 02:06 | So it's over to the right by quarter
inch and up by a quarter of an inch.
| | 02:11 | And now if I duplicate this again by
pressing Ctrl+D, look what happens.
| | 02:15 | That one is over and up by quarter inch both ways.
| | 02:19 | It's called Smart Duplicate.
| | 02:21 | That means if I was to drag this down here watch
what happens, Ctrl+D now moves it in relation
| | 02:27 | to the previous one very similar offset to the
previous one, if I move this down and try Ctrl+D
| | 02:34 | and Ctrl+D you can see the angle that it's taking.
| | 02:37 | So it's very smart, it remembers the last offset and repeats it.
| | 02:41 | Alright, I'm going to hit Ctrl+Z a number of
times to go back to my original sprig of broccoli.
| | 02:47 | Now let's say I want to duplicate this straight across.
| | 02:51 | Well, Ctrl+D we know is going to use the
default offset, so I'm going to delete that.
| | 02:55 | I'm going to click on my sprig and just show you
where you can change your offsets if you need to.
| | 03:01 | You go up to tools and then down
to Options right here at the top.
| | 03:04 | I'm going to go over to my Document Options here on the left
and click the plus sign because under General when I click
| | 03:11 | on that I see my Duplicate Offset and
horizontally may be a quarter of an inch is OK.
| | 03:17 | I'm going to bump that up actually to 0.4 inches and
vertically I'm going to knock that down to 0, there we go.
| | 03:25 | So it's not going to go up, it's just going to
go over when I click OK, and now I do my Ctrl+D,
| | 03:32 | you can see I've just moved over to the right.
| | 03:35 | Ctrl+D again and again and again repeats my
broccoli as across the bottom of my Business Card.
| | 03:41 | Now those are a little bit too big.
| | 03:42 | So Ctrl+Z to undo them.
| | 03:46 | Now I want to show you the difference
between duplicating and cloning.
| | 03:50 | Cloning is also available from the Edit menu, when
I go up to the Edit menu and choose Clone from here.
| | 03:58 | Something similar happens, you can see the offsets the same.
| | 04:01 | I've got the duplicate, but this works a little bit
differently when it comes to changing your objects.
| | 04:07 | This cloned object is now related to the original which is known
as the master object and that means if I click on my master
| | 04:15 | and make any changes to it such as to size it
down, watch what happens to the cloned object.
| | 04:22 | It too is size down, if I size it back
up, now my cloned object is also sized up.
| | 04:29 | So if I wanted to duplicate the cloned
object I'll end up with a bunch of clones.
| | 04:34 | So I'm going to use Ctrl+D here, go
all the way across my Business Card.
| | 04:39 | I'll even go pass the edge, click on my original,
the master and size that down, watch what happens.
| | 04:47 | They all get sized down.
| | 04:50 | A little bit further, there are my tiny little broccolis and
now I've got them in almost the exact spot where I want them,
| | 04:59 | I can marquee select all of these and just move it into position.
| | 05:06 | Now when I deselect I see the end result that's kind of cool.
| | 05:09 | Now just keep in mind that when you make a change
it has to be the master to affect all of the clones.
| | 05:15 | If I want to make this middle one a little bit
bigger, well, I could do that, I could size it up,
| | 05:19 | I'm going to size it up from both corners just a
little bit, deselect and it's the only one that changed
| | 05:25 | because it is a cloned object, it's not the master.
| | 05:28 | So if I wanted it to revert back to its master I can click
on it and go through the menus or just simply right-click,
| | 05:34 | I like this option and come up to Revert To Master.
| | 05:39 | When I select this I get to choose what I'm reverting to, in
this case, it was just a transformation where I changed the size
| | 05:45 | so I click in the only checkbox that's available,
click OK and it's back down to the original size.
| | 05:52 | Now I can move it into a position if I want it up
with the rest, and may be that's the end result.
| | 05:58 | But I do like having it a little bit bigger, just the middle one,
| | 06:02 | I like that effect just like that,
and there is my finished product.
| | 06:07 | So you can see there is a little bit of a difference between
duplicating and cloning, both of them though are time-savers,
| | 06:13 | they save you a lot of time over doing the Copy and
Paste option we talked about in the previous lesson.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Step and Repeat docker| 00:00 | In this lesson I'm going to show
you another way to do what we did
| | 00:03 | in the previous lesson using duplication and cloning techniques.
| | 00:06 | This time though we're going to use a Docker, the Step and
Repeat Docker and we're still working with our Green Onion file.
| | 00:13 | If you have skipped to this lesson or you don't have
the file open you can get all caught up by going
| | 00:18 | to the Lesson4 folder and opening up GreenOnionFile7.
| | 00:21 | You can see here I'm on my Business
Card which is at the third page.
| | 00:25 | Down across the bottom we were duplicating
some of these broccoli sprigs here.
| | 00:29 | Well I'm going to Marquee select all of the broccoli sprigs
after the first one here just by clicking and dragging
| | 00:35 | around them and hit my Delete key to remove them.
| | 00:38 | Now I'm going to work with this one piece of
broccoli down here on the bottom-left hand corner.
| | 00:43 | Now instead of using Duplication, Ctrl+D and setting
Offsets and so on, I can do it all from one docker by going
| | 00:49 | up to the Edit menu and selecting Step and
Repeat, Ctrl+Shift+D is the keyboard shortcut.
| | 00:57 | So that opens up my docker over here on the right hand side
and you can see I have got three sections one for the number
| | 01:03 | of copies I want to make and then I have got my horizontal
and vertical settings that I can set all form one spot.
| | 01:09 | So let's say we want to copy this across the bottom and
we want those broccoli sprigs to be very close together.
| | 01:15 | Well we have to guess first of all on the number of copies,
you can probably take an educated guess using the actual ruler
| | 01:21 | across the top, how many we're going to need.
| | 01:24 | If there is one every half an inch and we have got over
three inches, we're probably looking at maybe six or eight.
| | 01:30 | So I'm going to start with eight up here.
| | 01:32 | I'm going to change my copies to eight.
| | 01:34 | Now I do want a copy it to the right horizontally so I'm
going to go down to my Horizontal Settings and show you
| | 01:40 | that we can set an offset, that's the
distance between here at 0.25 inches.
| | 01:45 | Notice down below we also have Vertical Settings.
| | 01:48 | But we also have other options, by clicking the Offset dropdown,
I can choose No Offset whatsoever or Spacing Between Objects.
| | 01:55 | Here is where I get to choose the exact
space in between one object and the next.
| | 02:00 | And here I'm going to change this to 0.1 and actually
I just highlight what was there, type in my one.
| | 02:07 | The direction is already set correctly to
the right, notice the only other option is
| | 02:10 | to the left but I do want it to go the right.
| | 02:14 | Vertically I don't want it to do anything.
| | 02:16 | So where it says Offset here I'm going to click and choose No
Offset and all I have to do now is click Apply, and when I do,
| | 02:23 | you can see that eight is actually not quite enough
using distance that I choose in between these.
| | 02:29 | The beauty of the docker is all I have to do is
undo what I did and change this to another number.
| | 02:37 | So I might try to 12, all the other settings are still there,
I click Apply you can see 12 is actually just one too many.
| | 02:45 | That's no problem I can undo that and try 11 or I can just
deselect click on the last sprig and delete it, it's gone.
| | 02:53 | So now I have got my broccolis all away across the bottom and
what if I want to copy them up across the right hand side.
| | 02:59 | Let's try this, click on our sprig of
broccoli, you can see it's a group of 18 objects
| | 03:04 | so it's grouped together already that's perfect.
| | 03:06 | And now I'm going to choose the number
of copies I think I'm going to need here.
| | 03:10 | Now that's probably around eight.
| | 03:11 | I'm going to type in eight here.
| | 03:14 | You can also use the arrows to bump that up or down.
| | 03:17 | In this case the horizontal settings
will have no offset whatsoever.
| | 03:21 | It's all vertical.
| | 03:22 | So in this case I'm going to choose spacing between
objects, so I can make it the exact same thing as what I did
| | 03:28 | across the bottom 0.1 and the Direction is already
set to Up, that's the direction I want to go,
| | 03:33 | I click Apply and you can see I have got a few too many here.
| | 03:36 | No problem, I can start over or just deselect, marquee select
the last two that I don't need and hit Delete, here we go.
| | 03:45 | So that's a nice little effect.
| | 03:47 | Now of course you can combine Horizontal
and Vertical Settings to get things going.
| | 03:51 | On the diagonal if you wanted to, you can
use the Offsets that are at the defaults
| | 03:55 | of a quarter inch both going to the right and up.
| | 03:59 | So in this case it would be similar to using Ctrl+D, your
Duplication tool that we talk about in the previous lesson
| | 04:05 | where those offsets are set for you, but instead
of having to hit Ctrl+D a whole bunch of times,
| | 04:09 | you just set the number of copies and
it's done for you, just like that.
| | 04:13 | So just another way for duplicating or cloning objects,
thanks to this docker called the Step and Repeat docker.
| | 04:20 | You can combine all of those commands in one little
area, click your Apply button and you are done.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using Undo, Redo, and Repeat| 00:00 | In this lesson we're going to look at some very important
commands here in CorelDRAW X4, we've been around forever
| | 00:06 | but they'll save you a lot of time and a lot of
headaches, if you know how to use them properly.
| | 00:10 | I'm talking about Undo, Redo and Repeat.
| | 00:13 | We are going to look at all three in this lesson using
the file I already have opened here called UndoRedo1.cdr.
| | 00:19 | So if you've got the exercise files and you want to
follow along, you'll find this one in the Lesson4 folder.
| | 00:25 | You can see down below I've got some text.
| | 00:27 | I've got my logo on a background with some
text and I've got my tomato over here.
| | 00:32 | So before we can start undoing things
obviously we have to do something.
| | 00:36 | So the first thing I'm going to do is
marquee select my green onion logo here.
| | 00:42 | I'm going to duplicate it.
| | 00:43 | So Ctrl+D on the keyboard will duplicate that.
| | 00:46 | I'm going to move it into position right beside the original.
| | 00:51 | Let's go right there.
| | 00:52 | I'm going to group all of these objects together, notice down
below it's three objects, I'm going to group them together.
| | 01:00 | Now I'm going to click on the X in the middle now I'm
just going rotate that over to the right ever so slightly,
| | 01:06 | so it's overlapping the original there, perfect!
| | 01:10 | So we've done a few things, now it's
time to talk about undoing them.
| | 01:13 | I'm going to deselect by clicking on a blank space here,
and let you know there are a few different ways to undo.
| | 01:19 | If you've been using CorelDRAW for sometime in previous
versions you probably have your preferred method.
| | 01:24 | A lot of people like to use the keyboard, Ctrl+Z
and we've done that in the previous lessons already.
| | 01:30 | Ctrl+Z is a fast way to Undo the last thing you did.
| | 01:33 | Now in our case it was the rotation.
| | 01:35 | So if I hold down Ctrl and hit the
letter Z, you can see it's rotated back.
| | 01:39 | Another way to undo is to go to your toolbar.
| | 01:41 | There is an Undo button right up here.
| | 01:44 | Now in this case clicking Undo will do
the last thing I did before the rotation.
| | 01:48 | So clicking Undo, you can see ungroups everything.
| | 01:51 | And if I go up to Edit menu you'll notice Undo
shows up here, but not just the word undo,
| | 01:57 | it'll show you that the last thing I did before I
grouped those things together was to move the objects.
| | 02:03 | So if I click Undo move you can see it goes back
to where it appeared when it was duplicated.
| | 02:09 | Now if I want redo those things, in other
words, if I undid something I didn't mean
| | 02:13 | to undo I can undo the undo which is also known as redo.
| | 02:18 | And the Redo button appears right next to the
Undo button, that's one way to redo the last step.
| | 02:23 | I'm going to redo that move.
| | 02:25 | I have another option form the Edit menu, if I click Edit
you can see I can redo and it tells me it's the ungroup.
| | 02:33 | So when I click redo the ungroup, I'm actually
grouping them back or ungrouping them.
| | 02:39 | And you may have noticed from the Edit
menu there is a keyboard shortcut for that.
| | 02:42 | Ctrl+Z is easy to remember for Ungroup, redoing
is Ctrl+Shift+Z, so you could do that as well.
| | 02:49 | I'm just going to click on Redo Rotate.
| | 02:53 | So there we go, let's rotate it.
| | 02:55 | Alright, so those are the three steps, notice my Redo buttons
are no longer accessible, there is nothing left to redo,
| | 03:00 | I have undone everything, and redone everything.
| | 03:03 | Now there is another option and that is from the dropdown.
| | 03:07 | If you want to undo multiple steps, instead
of one at a time, you can go to the dropdown.
| | 03:12 | Check this out up here on my toolbar next to the Undo button,
this little arrow pointing down will show me a list of steps.
| | 03:19 | So you can see rotate was the last
thing I did, the ungrouping before that,
| | 03:23 | moving was done before that and duplicating
was the original command.
| | 03:28 | So if I want to undo everything I just click on
Duplicate, and I'm right back where I started.
| | 03:33 | Same thing for redo, if I click the dropdown I want to redo
everything except for the rotate, I could go down to Ungroup
| | 03:40 | for example, and those three steps are redone
for me and I don't have the rotation in there.
| | 03:45 | So that's an easy way to undo and redo.
| | 03:48 | Great time-saver.
| | 03:49 | Next, is another option for seeing all of that in one
spot, very convenient, it's called the Undo Docker,
| | 03:56 | and to access that we go up to the Window
menu, down to Dockers and over to Undo,
| | 04:02 | and when I click on that you can see my Undo Docker appears here.
| | 04:06 | So all of the steps are in reverse order,
now Rotate, Ungroupm Move and Duplicate;
| | 04:11 | Duplicate was the first thing I did after I opened up this file.
| | 04:14 | So if I go back to Duplicate you can see
that's where I left off after the duplication.
| | 04:20 | If I go right up to the top there is my brand new
file that I opened up just the way it started.
| | 04:25 | So again, I can undo or redo any number of steps from here.
| | 04:29 | When I'm done with Docker I close it up.
| | 04:32 | I'll deselect and that's my end result.
| | 04:35 | So that's undo and redo.
| | 04:37 | Lot's of different options here for
undoing and redoing, a great time-saver.
| | 04:40 | Now we're going to talk about another
time-saver which is the repeat command.
| | 04:44 | Now we're going to use our tomato.
| | 04:46 | So I'm going to marquee select just the tomato here.
| | 04:49 | And it is actually eleven objects grouped -- actually
ungrouped but they are grouped together to create this tomato.
| | 04:57 | We haven't grouped them together yet, because
we're going to work with parts of the tomato.
| | 05:01 | So for example if I wanted to change the fill color here.
| | 05:04 | I'm going to click on the red in the tomato.
| | 05:06 | I'm going to zoom in with my Zoom tool.
| | 05:09 | I'm going to give it a click here right on the
Zoom tool, and just marquee select my tomato.
| | 05:16 | You can see the nodes around the outside, so I've got
my backgrounds selected here, back to the Pick tool.
| | 05:21 | It's selected, I'm going to change
the fill to a nice gradient fill.
| | 05:24 | So I'm going to my Fill tool here and click
the little black arrow, there is the flyout.
| | 05:29 | I'm going to go to this Fountain Fill.
| | 05:32 | I want to give that a click, I see the Fountain Fill dialog box.
| | 05:36 | I'm going to change the type to Radial.
| | 05:39 | I want it to go from this Red color not to
White but maybe to Dark Pink or something.
| | 05:46 | Something lighter than the Red, and over here is a Deep Pink.
| | 05:49 | I'm going to click on that swatch there.
| | 05:51 | You can choose whatever colors you like.
| | 05:53 | Radial is selected, it's kind of hard to see but it's a nice
little gradient there, I'm going to click-and-drag that up
| | 05:58 | to the corner so it looks like light is coming
from the top right corner, and when I click OK,
| | 06:03 | you can see the difference here with my tomato.
| | 06:05 | It's not just one solid color.
| | 06:08 | Alright, I'm going to deselect that.
| | 06:10 | Shift+F4 zooms me back out to see the entire page.
| | 06:14 | Now what if I wanted to apply that fill to maybe
the background here of my Green Onion Bistro logo.
| | 06:21 | Well, in that case all I have to do is select the object
which is the rectangle and repeat that Fill command.
| | 06:27 | So if I go up to my Edit menu you'll see that Repeat
is the third one down in this case it does say Fill.
| | 06:33 | Ctrl+R as in Repeat as an easy one to
remember if you like using the keyboard.
| | 06:37 | I'm going to click on Repeat Fill, you can see it's repeated
for the background here on my Green Onion Bistro logo.
| | 06:45 | And of course if I want to do that for this one as
well, Ctrl+R changes the background there as well.
| | 06:52 | So once you go through a command especially one that requires
a number of clicks and a number of steps to apply it,
| | 06:57 | using the Repeat command can save you a lot of time if
you want to apply the exact same thing to other objects.
| | 07:03 | I'm going to deselect to see the end result.
| | 07:06 | So you should be feeling comfortable with the Undo and Redo
options as well as the Repeat function for saving you lots
| | 07:12 | of time when working with objects here in CorelDRAW X4.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating and using symbols| 00:00 | When you start creating your projects in CorelDRAW
and you are duplicating multiple objects throughout
| | 00:05 | that project file size could become a concern.
| | 00:09 | And if that's the case for you what we're
going to cover in this lesson will really help.
| | 00:13 | First of all we're going to use this
file called GreenOnionmenu1.cdr.
| | 00:18 | If you've got the exercise files, it's in the
Lesson4 folder if you'd like to follow along.
| | 00:22 | Let's say down at the bottom where
I have a menu Legend showing me
| | 00:26 | that Healthy Choices will have a tomato
next to them and Spicy Selections a pepper.
| | 00:31 | So I'm going duplicate those objects throughout this document.
| | 00:33 | You could see how if I had multiple duplications,
| | 00:36 | the original file size of the object will be repeated
throughout my document increasing the overall file size.
| | 00:43 | So if I want to keep it down my alternative
is to create a symbol out of that object.
| | 00:49 | That way one symbol is stored with the document and then many
instances of that symbol maybe visible throughout my document.
| | 00:56 | So let's just zoom down into that area.
| | 00:58 | F2 on your keyboard accesses the Zoom tool.
| | 01:01 | I'm going to click-and-drag down here
at the bottom, and there is my tomato,
| | 01:04 | for healthy choices and my pepper for spicy selections.
| | 01:07 | I want to start putting those up here next to some of my items.
| | 01:11 | So the first step is to create the symbol itself.
| | 01:13 | I'm going to click on the tomato over here
which is actually a group of eleven objects.
| | 01:17 | So you could see the file size just for
the tomato itself could be quite large
| | 01:22 | when I start duplicating it throughout my
document all it increases my file size.
| | 01:26 | So I'm going create the symbol by going up to the
Edit menu down to Symbol and over to New Symbol.
| | 01:34 | As soon as I click on New Symbol, I get to give it a name.
| | 01:37 | I'm going to call this one HealthyChoice and click OK.
| | 01:42 | See what happens to the handles.
| | 01:46 | They turn from black to blue, and that's just to remind me,
| | 01:49 | I'm now working with the symbol as
opposed to the actual original object.
| | 01:53 | Let's do the same for our pepper, and when
we go up to the Edit menu and down to Symbol,
| | 02:00 | you'll notice the only two choices here
are to create a new symbol from this
| | 02:03 | or access the Symbol Manager, Ctrl+F3 on your keyboard.
| | 02:07 | We are going to be going there momentarily to show
you how to stay organized with multiple symbols.
| | 02:13 | So I'm going to click New Symbol and
this one is going to be- and click OK.
| | 02:19 | So I now created two symbols and when I start duplicating these
I'm not duplicating the original object I'm just creating a new
| | 02:25 | instance of the symbol, a new image per se.
| | 02:29 | So if I want to put this tomato up next to some of my other
items in the menu here, all I have to do is duplicate the symbol
| | 02:36 | and I won't be taking up any extra file size.
| | 02:38 | So I'm going to press Shift+F4 to zoom out and then I'm going
to press F4 actually so I can see a little bit more of my page.
| | 02:47 | My symbol is selected my tomato down below.
| | 02:49 | I'm going to do a Ctrl+D just like
I did for duplicating an object.
| | 02:53 | Ctrl+D creates a duplicate of the symbol, I'm going to take that
tomato and I'm going to put it up here next to my Garden Salad.
| | 03:01 | And when I let go, I've got a new instance of that symbol.
| | 03:06 | Alright, this symbol is selected so I'm going to do a Ctrl+D,
you can see how it automatically steps up to this location.
| | 03:14 | I'm going to bring that down next to my Cobb
Salad, and another Ctrl+D to get it duplicate.
| | 03:21 | I'm going to bring this one out next to
my Veggie Stir Fry here, there we go.
| | 03:25 | Let's go down to our other symbol, the Spicy Selection,
we'll duplicate that, Ctrl+D, the duplicate is selected.
| | 03:32 | I'm going to bring that up next to my Taquitos.
| | 03:37 | Ctrl+D will duplicate that and probably send
it way up here where I can't see it just
| | 03:43 | because of where I duplicated my first one, here we go.
| | 03:47 | I'm going to drag that one down here next to my Nachos.
| | 03:53 | They are little bit spicy as well.
| | 03:54 | Scroll back down so I can see the whole page and the
others, well, let's say that's good enough for now,
| | 04:00 | I'm going to deselect just by clicking off the page and you
can see, I've got my symbols now repeated throughout this page.
| | 04:06 | So to work with those symbols and the beauty behind working
with symbols so that if you make a change to one of the symbols.
| | 04:13 | Well, it's the master and all of the other symbols that have
been duplicated throughout your project will also change.
| | 04:18 | So maybe the pepper needs to have a different fill.
| | 04:21 | Well, in that case I need my Symbol Manager.
| | 04:24 | So we go up to Edit and down to Symbol,
this time across and down to Symbol Manger,
| | 04:30 | Ctrl+F3 on your keyboard will do the same thing.
| | 04:33 | Opens up your Symbol Manager Docker over here on the right-hand
side, and look at that, we've got two symbols showing up here
| | 04:39 | in our Green Onion menu and you can see
the first one is selected my HealthyChoice,
| | 04:44 | that's the name of the symbol, it is a symbol, look at this.
| | 04:47 | There are four instances tells me right here in
this project of my symbol called HealthyChoice.
| | 04:54 | If I look around, one, two, three and four.
| | 04:57 | How about my spicy symbol?
| | 04:59 | If I click on it, there are three instances and
as I look at my menu, that's absolutely right.
| | 05:05 | So what happens if I want to make a change to this pepper.
| | 05:08 | Maybe change the fill a little bit.
| | 05:09 | Well, then I would want to edit it.
| | 05:11 | Couple of ways to edit it, I could double-click on the pen
over here, just left of the actual thumbnail of my symbol,
| | 05:18 | or come down to the bottom, there are some buttons down below.
| | 05:20 | I could insert this symbol, again if I wanted to right from my
Symbol Manager or I could go to this next button to edit it.
| | 05:28 | When I'm done with it I can also delete the symbol.
| | 05:31 | Deleting the symbol though is a little bit dangerous
because it's not just deleted from the Symbol Manger.
| | 05:36 | It's deleted from your document as well.
| | 05:38 | So I'm going to the middle button click on Edit
Symbol, you can see that's really tiny there
| | 05:43 | in the middle of my page, so I'm going to zoom into it.
| | 05:46 | You can press F2 or click your Zoom
tool and zoom in to the pepper.
| | 05:50 | I'm going to go to my Pick tool, it's almost
like we're working on a new document here.
| | 05:53 | I'm going to click on the pepper,
I'm going to ungroup it, there we go.
| | 05:59 | Now I can click right on the red part
of the pepper and change the fill.
| | 06:03 | So I'm going to go down to my Fill tool,
I'm going to change it a Fountain Fill,
| | 06:07 | I'm going to keep those same colors right
there, but change it from Linear to Radial.
| | 06:12 | we're going to talk about fills later on.
| | 06:15 | I'm going to move this, Center offset and click OK.
| | 06:19 | You can see the different effect now I got.
| | 06:21 | So when I'm done editing I have a couple of
options first of all I'm going to click-and-drag
| | 06:25 | around the outside to marquee select and regroup it.
| | 06:28 | When I'm finished editing I can come down here and click Finish
Editing Object or right-click and choose it from pop-up menu.
| | 06:36 | Alright, this takes me back, Shift+F4
allows me to see the entire page.
| | 06:40 | Look at my symbol over here.
| | 06:42 | It's changed and look at it in my menu, it's
changed everywhere where it was already duplicated.
| | 06:48 | I'm going to zoom into this area
under appetizers to show you that,
| | 06:53 | that change has updated throughout
my project, a nice little time-saver.
| | 06:57 | Shift+F4 zooms me back out.
| | 06:59 | When you are done with the Symbol Manager you can close
it up, remember deleting symbols, little bit dangerous,
| | 07:05 | it will remove the symbols from your document
as well including the original object.
| | 07:09 | So another option might be to revert one of the
symbols back to the original object by clicking on it.
| | 07:15 | Use your Pick tool, click on one of the symbols.
| | 07:19 | Now when you go up to the Edit menu and down to Symbol,
you've got some other options that appear on this pop-up menu
| | 07:25 | like Edit Symbol right from here or Revert to Objects.
| | 07:29 | So I'm going to click on Revert to
Objects to see how the handles turn black.
| | 07:33 | I'm going to do the same for down here and I'm going
to go up to Edit, down to Symbol and Revert to Objects.
| | 07:44 | Now we've got objects showing up throughout our document.
| | 07:49 | So symbols will save you a lot of space, also a
lot of time when it comes to editing those objects.
| | 07:55 | So it's really up to you if you need to conserve a flyout space.
| | 07:59 | A great option is to convert them to symbols, and
of course if you are going to be making changes
| | 08:03 | to all those duplications having a symbol and editing one symbol
| | 08:08 | and seeing those changes throughout your project can
really save you a lot of time and a lot of effort.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
5. Working with TextCreating artistic text| 00:00 | Well it's time now to dive into the world of text here in CorelDRAW
X4. As you are creating your project, your master pieces, here in
| | 00:08 | CorelDRAW, odds are pretty good you are going to be using text
along the way and there are a couple of different of kinds of text
| | 00:14 | we are going to explore in this chapter.
| | 00:15 | One is artistic text.
| | 00:17 | The first half of this chapter will be dedicated to working
with that type of text and then the second half of the chapter
| | 00:23 | we'll look at working with paragraph text
| | 00:26 | and depending on what you are creating, you'll probably need to use one
or the other or both in a project. So you can see I've already opened up
| | 00:33 | a file here called ArtisticText1.
| | 00:36 | It's a CDR file found in this Lesson5 folder of your exercise
files. So if you have got the exercise files and you want to
| | 00:43 | follow along open this one up, it's a one pager
| | 00:46 | and you can see across the top I have got the word Artistic Text
| | 00:49 | using, you guessed it, artistic text.
| | 00:53 | That's a good example where we might use artistic text, in a
title or a label, for example. Paragraph text on the other hand
| | 01:00 | is just like it sounds where you would be creating
paragraphs of text like in a newsletter for example.
| | 01:06 | So we are going to be using our Text tool to create both kinds.
Now depending on what you do with your Text tool will determine
| | 01:12 | the type of text you are about to create.
Let me show me what I am talking about.
| | 01:16 | I am going to go over here to my tool box and click
the Text tool. F8 on your keyboard is the shortcut
| | 01:22 | and if I come into my page here and just click once,
| | 01:25 | I'll be adding artistic text like a title or a
label, for example. If I click and drag an area
| | 01:33 | I'll by default be creating what we
call paragraph text and the paragraph text
| | 01:36 | goes inside this frame. Like I said we are going
be saving that for later on in this chapter.
| | 01:43 | So I am going go to my Pick tool,
| | 01:45 | you can see here it says, "Click here with your Text tool to add
paragraph text," but I am just going to hit Delete key to remove that.
| | 01:52 | I am going to go back to my Text tool and
this time, I am just going to click once.
| | 01:57 | When I click once now I am ready to start
inserting what we call artistic text.
| | 02:02 | On the Property Bar there are some options before you start
typing. Of course you can modify your text after you've
| | 02:09 | typed it in. We're going to do that in this chapter as well.
| | 02:12 | But before you leave and start typing you might want to check up
here on the Property Bar for the font that you're using and the size.
| | 02:19 | You've also got these Attributes and
Justification or Alignment options.
| | 02:24 | So I'm going to change my font face here to Arial Black
| | 02:29 | and 24 points is actually a pretty good size maybe a little
bit bigger. I am going to go up to 36 points right here,
| | 02:36 | from the dropdown. I don't need to bold or underline this.
I am just going to type now the text that I want to appear.
| | 02:42 | You'll notice that I have got an
image here. We've got an ear of corn
| | 02:46 | and we've got lines coming out. Those would be good for labels,
| | 02:49 | and the first one it looks like the husk here. So I am going to type
in, in capital letters, I am going to turn my caps lock key on, Husk.
| | 02:57 | Just like that.
| | 02:58 | Now when I go back to my Pick tool, watch what happens.
It's just like any other object we have been working with it.
| | 03:04 | It's got handles around the outside.
| | 03:06 | I can click and drag those handles to change the size.
| | 03:09 | You see the point size is changing up here.
| | 03:12 | I can make the change after the fact.
| | 03:14 | I'm going to go back 36 points. As I hover over it, I see preview.
| | 03:18 | That's good and I can go right into the
center here when I see my four sided arrows
| | 03:22 | click and drag that over towards
| | 03:24 | the line that's coming away from the husk and deselect by
clicking outside. Let's try that out a couple of more times.
| | 03:31 | We'll go over to our Text tool.
| | 03:33 | Notice that Arial 24 is my default so I
might want to change that to Arial Black
| | 03:39 | and with nothing typed, you can
see I am about to set my new default,
| | 03:42 | for artistic text or for paragraph text or both if I wanted to.
| | 03:47 | I am just setting the new default in this
document for artistic text so I am going to click OK.
| | 03:51 | And I am going to change the size as well
to 36. I'll be prompted for the same thing.
| | 03:56 | And when I click OK- now when I click,
| | 03:59 | I am going to be typing in Arial Black 36 point.
| | 04:03 | So I am going to type in Cob.
| | 04:06 | Now when I move to the center and notice I
don't actually have to select my Pick tool.
| | 04:10 | That's the beauty of CorelDRAW. Still using my Text tool,
as long as I am hovering over that X in the middle right in
| | 04:16 | the center of the O here in Cob,
| | 04:18 | I get the four sided arrow so I can click and
drag that over next to that line right there.
| | 04:24 | There we go. Let's try that one more time. Now I am
just going to click over here and I am going to type in
| | 04:30 | Kernal
| | 04:32 | and I am going to go to the center and just move
that down ever so slightly and that is artistic text.
| | 04:39 | Now when I deselect with my Pick tool,
| | 04:42 | I've got the end product. Obviously I can go back at any time,
select these objects using selection techniques like holding
| | 04:49 | down Shift to select them all.
| | 04:51 | Make changes, I can go up to my Property Bar to make changes.
| | 04:55 | Of course I have got colors that I can apply as well.
| | 04:58 | We are going to get into formatting your artistic
text as we move through the lessons in this chapter.
| | 05:03 | The very next thing that I want to show you
| | 05:06 | also involves artistic text, but fitting it to a path that you
create. That is exactly what we are going to do in the next lesson.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Fitting text to a path| 00:00 | If you were following along with me in the
previous lesson you saw just how easy it is
| | 00:04 | to add Artistic Text to your page here in CorelDRAW.
| | 00:07 | Quite simply you click the Text tool, click on
your page and type, that's all there is to it.
| | 00:12 | Of course there is a lot of formatting that we can do
with artistic text, we're going to cover that in detail
| | 00:16 | in the next lesson, but first, I want to show you another way
to add Artistic Text to your page, but this time have it fit
| | 00:23 | to a path, we call it Fit Text to Path and we're going
to look at a few different methods for doing that.
| | 00:29 | A path could be a shape that you've drawn away the line.
| | 00:32 | It could be an existing object like this ear of corn for
example, if I want a text flowing around the outside of it.
| | 00:38 | So we're going to do that with this file that
we were working with in the previous lesson.
| | 00:42 | If you jump to this lesson and you want to get caught
up, go to your exercise files, if you've got them,
| | 00:46 | Lesson5 folder open up ArtisticText2.cdr,
you'll have what I have.
| | 00:52 | Next, we need a new page, so I'm going to come down
here to my Navigation buttons, where I see 1 of 1,
| | 00:56 | I'm going click on the plus sign just to the right.
| | 00:59 | I've got my new page, I see the content from my template down
at the bottom, that's okay, I've got this drawing area here.
| | 01:05 | And next, I want to borrow that Artistic Text that I have
already entered on Page 1, so I'm going to go to Page 1
| | 01:11 | and click on this right at the top, artistic text.
| | 01:14 | I'm going to copy it by clicking my Copy button, you can
do Ctrl+C or use your Edit menu whichever you prefer.
| | 01:20 | Once it's copied to the Windows Clipboard
we can now paste it onto Page 2.
| | 01:24 | So let's go over to Page 2, clicking the Page 2 tab, and now
I'm going to click on my Paste button, Ctrl+V is the shortcut,
| | 01:31 | and I'm going to click it again to get a second copy.
| | 01:34 | But now I'm just going to click-and-drag from the center
here to show you I've got two copies of my artistic text.
| | 01:40 | Now all I need is the path that I want to put this text on.
| | 01:43 | So I'm going to start with my Ellipse tool.
| | 01:47 | Come over to the Ellipse tool here and I'm going to
draw an ellipse from over here and down, nice wide one.
| | 01:53 | And you can see now I've actually got the path that I
might want to fit my text to, maybe outside the ellipse,
| | 01:58 | inside the ellipse, that's totally up to you.
| | 02:01 | And there are a few different ways to do this.
| | 02:03 | So I'm going to go back to my Pick tool and I'm going
to click on my artistic text, the bottom one here.
| | 02:08 | One way to get it to fit to a path that's already
being created is to go up to the text menu.
| | 02:14 | Next, we come down to Fit Text to Path.
| | 02:18 | Now my Mouse pointer has changed, you can see it's an
arrow with the capital letter A below it and a wavy line.
| | 02:24 | That means now as I get close to my ellipse
which is going to be the path watch what happens.
| | 02:30 | As I get close all of a sudden I see a real-time preview
of what that might look like if I was to click right here.
| | 02:37 | Don't click quite yet because you can
move around, rotate it around the outside
| | 02:42 | of your ellipse to get in to the position you want.
| | 02:46 | And you see that red line up here in the center
it means that your text is perfectly centered.
| | 02:50 | As I go to the left you can see it's no longer centered.
| | 02:53 | I can move away from my ellipse, if I want
to leave a space between it and the path.
| | 02:57 | I'm going to come down to about 0.25 inches and
centered, right there, and now I'm ready to click.
| | 03:05 | When I do that, you can see now my text has
moved and it fits along the path of my ellipse.
| | 03:11 | So what you might want to do next is remove the ellipse.
| | 03:14 | Well, that's a little bit tricky.
| | 03:15 | If I was to click on the ellipse and just hit Delete, watch what
happens, little bit scary, I've lost my Artistic Text as well.
| | 03:22 | Luckily we have Ctrl+Z or your Undo button to bring that back.
| | 03:28 | What I really need to do is convert this ellipse to curves
so that it becomes a separate object that I can then delete.
| | 03:34 | So with the ellipse selected I can
right-click, I can go up to Convert to Curves,
| | 03:41 | it now becomes a separate object that I can delete.
| | 03:44 | Now there is another way to delete objects like that
as well, but you can see I'm left with my Artistic Text
| | 03:50 | which is now its own object, of course, I can size that down,
do things with the handles, squeeze it up if I wanted to,
| | 03:56 | or stretch it out, totally up to you, and
you can move it around, and delete it.
| | 04:02 | With it selected let's hit our Delete key to remove
it because we're going to try another method now.
| | 04:06 | This time though our path is going be a wavy line, so let's go to
our FreeHand tool here, F5 on the keyboard will also access this.
| | 04:14 | Now let's click-and-drag to create a wavy line, just like that.
| | 04:19 | Now it's going to get smoothed out for us by Corel, look at that
CorelDRAW smoothed it out nicely so that we've got our wavy line,
| | 04:25 | and now we want to get this text fitting that path.
| | 04:29 | Another method is to go to the Pick tool, with Artistic Text
selected and click right on it, I'm going to go to the centered X
| | 04:37 | and I'm going to right-click and hold down my right
mouse button this time to drag it down towards the path.
| | 04:44 | Now eventually I'm going to see my Mouse
pointer in the center there turn into,
| | 04:49 | see that a crosshair with a large circle around it.
| | 04:53 | When I see that it means I'm on the path and I can
release my right Mouse button now and see a pop-up menu.
| | 04:58 | It allows me to do things like move the text or copy it there.
| | 05:02 | Copy the properties like the fill outline etcetera,
but, more importantly down here is Fit Text to Path.
| | 05:08 | And when I click on that with my left Mouse
button you can see now it's fitting that path.
| | 05:14 | I'm going to click off of it to see what that looks like.
| | 05:17 | Don't be worried about any remanence you might see, we're
going to adjust this now by clicking on our actual text,
| | 05:23 | if I wanted to I could start playing around with this.
| | 05:25 | Notice for one thing, I've got this little
node over here, that red node that allows me
| | 05:30 | to push it along the path till I get it
exactly where I want, I can also pull it away.
| | 05:35 | I can pull it underneath the path if I wanted to.
| | 05:38 | If I let go down here that's what it's
going to look like, I get that preview.
| | 05:42 | I'm going to go just a little bit higher and
over to the right a little bit and release.
| | 05:48 | So there is my Artistic Text.
| | 05:49 | Now remember I said, you could separate it from the path.
| | 05:52 | Well, I'm going to click down here, I'm going
to click on the path which is my wavy line,
| | 05:57 | I see that red node which means right now the two are together.
| | 06:00 | I'm going to click again on my path.
| | 06:03 | Notice that the red node disappears.
| | 06:05 | So really what I've got is a converted to curves
wavy line that I can hit Delete now to remove that,
| | 06:12 | and now I've got my Artistic Text left behind.
| | 06:15 | I'm going to move this down a little bit on the page towards
the bottom so I can create another wavy line up above.
| | 06:23 | Alright, let's do that, we'll go to our FreeHand tool.
| | 06:26 | Let's try another wavy line, this one is
going to be more gradual, there we go.
| | 06:31 | And another way to add Artistic Text is just to use your Text
tool, if you don't already have the text, you can go to the path
| | 06:38 | and watch what happens to my Mouse pointer as I come close, you
can see there, I've changed it from the capital letter A to an a
| | 06:45 | with a wavy line under it, that means I'm on the
edge, I can click and start typing in my text.
| | 06:51 | So I'm just going to type-in all caps, THIS
IS ARTISTIC TEXT and it flows along the path.
| | 06:59 | Now I'm going to go to my Pick tool here.
| | 07:02 | As I want to show you another way that we can edit things.
| | 07:05 | Using the Property Bar we don't have to go the node
to do, that's nice way to get a visual but if you need
| | 07:10 | to be more precise or you want to change the effect.
| | 07:12 | Check out the Property Bar up here.
| | 07:14 | First of all, we've got our Text
Orientation, if I click this I can
| | 07:17 | down through these options to see
a real-time preview of the effect.
| | 07:22 | You can see there it's slightly different,
here there is no rotation
| | 07:25 | of the characters, but they do still flow along the path.
| | 07:29 | That one is kind of cool, I like this one,
it's almost a three-dimensional effect
| | 07:32 | so I'm going to click on it to change the orientation.
| | 07:35 | I can also move text away from the path or below it, if I
wanted to using my arrows here and the distance from path field.
| | 07:43 | So I'm going to bump that up and you can see it's
smoothing away with the each click from my line.
| | 07:47 | I can also adjust the Horizontal, you can see
over here I've got a field for Horizontal Offset.
| | 07:53 | Right now it's at 1.464 for me, you
may have different value in there.
| | 07:58 | So we can move that to the right using the up arrow,
we can move it to the left using the lower arrow,
| | 08:04 | and of course you could type-in an
exact value in here if you wanted.
| | 08:07 | For example I'm going to click-and-drag over that
type 1.75 and hit my Enter key to lock that in,
| | 08:14 | you can see it's in the exact location what I typed.
| | 08:17 | So there we go.
| | 08:18 | I click on my path.
| | 08:19 | I still see the red node, I click again, I can
delete it and I'm left with my Artistic Text.
| | 08:27 | Very cool stuff.
| | 08:28 | So if you need your text to flow along a path there are lots
of applications for that, you can have the special effects
| | 08:34 | when you are creating some of your projects having your text flow
along a path can really add some visual excitement to your work.
| | 08:41 | So you should be feeling comfortable now with the
various methods for adding Artistic Text to a path.
| | 08:47 | Now we're going to get into formatting
our Artistic Text in the next lesson.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Formatting characters and live text| 00:00 | It's time now to start formatting our artistic text.
| | 00:04 | In the last couple of lessons we looked at ways to bring artistic
text into a page here in CorelDRAW, now it's time to format that.
| | 00:10 | And there are a few different ways we
can do this, some very handy tools.
| | 00:14 | we're going to continue to use the same file we've been working
within the last couple of lessons our artistic text file.
| | 00:20 | If you've skipped to this lesson though and you want
to get caught up, you can go into the Lesson5 folder
| | 00:24 | of the exercise files if you've got
them and open up ArtisticText3
| | 00:29 | that will get you all caught up with
me and I'm on the first page here.
| | 00:32 | You can see we've got Artistic Text all over
this page, we've got the title up at the top
| | 00:36 | which already has some formatting applied,
the special effect that we'll get into later
| | 00:40 | on when we start examining the Interactive
tools that you have in the Toolbox.
| | 00:44 | But down below you can see I've got some plain old text
that I've entered here as labels for my ear of corn.
| | 00:51 | I'm just going to add one more piece of text, I'm going to go
over to my Text tool here and I'm going to click over here just
| | 00:56 | to the right of my ear of corn just once, and
type-in just what I said in capital letters, EAR OF,
| | 01:05 | I'm going hit Enter here, CORN, just to have it on two lines.
| | 01:10 | Go back to my Pick tool now and you can
see I've got artistic text on two lines,
| | 01:16 | I'm just going to move it here above KERNEL, perfect!
| | 01:19 | Alright, so let's start formatting some of this
text, I'm going to start with the HUSK over here.
| | 01:23 | I'm going to click right on that,
I'm going to press F2 on my keyboard,
| | 01:27 | that allows me to use my Zoom tool
now to zoom in to the word HUSK.
| | 01:32 | And let's see what happens when we do some simple
formatting, of course, we've got our Property Bar,
| | 01:36 | an easy way to change things like
the font face and the point size.
| | 01:40 | I've also got some of these attributes like bolding, underlining.
| | 01:44 | Italics is not available for this
particular font called Arial Black.
| | 01:48 | So if I wanted to change this font to
something else like just plain old Arial,
| | 01:52 | watch what happens as I hover over these options.
| | 01:55 | See down below in behind my menu, I'm getting
a live preview of what that's going to look
| | 02:01 | like if I was to select one of these options.
| | 02:04 | I'm going to leave it at Arial Black,
same thing goes for the point size.
| | 02:08 | If I wanted to bump this down to 10, you
can see how small it gets and as I hover
| | 02:13 | over these different point sizes you can see it growing.
| | 02:15 | I'm going to leave it at 36 points.
| | 02:18 | If I want to bold that you can see it gets a little bit
thicker, I can turn that Off, same thing for underlining,
| | 02:24 | turn it On and Off with these toggle buttons, and then I've
got some alignment options here from this little dropdown menu.
| | 02:31 | Now this won't apply to a single piece of artistic text like this
it's on one line, but when we get over to our new artistic text
| | 02:38 | that we just entered which is on multiple
lines we'll be able to see the difference.
| | 02:41 | Now there is an even better way to
have access to all of these options.
| | 02:45 | You'll notice over here in the far
right-hand side of my Property Bar,
| | 02:49 | I've got something called Character Formatting,
Ctrl+T on your keyboard is the shortcut.
| | 02:54 | You can also access this from the Text menu.
| | 02:57 | Character Formatting is a Docker that's going to open up.
| | 02:59 | So let's go down to Character Formatting.
| | 03:01 | Give it a click and check out over here on the right-hand
side, we've got our Character Formatting Docker open now,
| | 03:07 | and we've got lots to choose from here including the font face.
| | 03:11 | So here's our font list that we saw
earlier and we have our live preview.
| | 03:15 | It used to be you just see a sample piece of text flyout here
| | 03:18 | on the left showing you what this might
look like if you were to make the selection.
| | 03:22 | Now we see it right in our document here in CorelDRAW X4.
| | 03:25 | So you are getting a real live preview of what that
might look like if you were to change the font.
| | 03:30 | So I'm going to go down to this one Bookman Old Style and you
can see there is a little flyout here too, Light, Light-Italic,
| | 03:37 | SemiBold and SemiBold-Italics, I'm
going to choose SemiBold, there we go.
| | 03:42 | That now appears up here at the very top with SemiBold selected
| | 03:46 | and of course I could change those
options just by coming down here.
| | 03:49 | As I hover over those again I get that live preview.
| | 03:51 | I'm going to leave it at SemiBold.
| | 03:54 | Now the point size is still 36 points,
but I can change point size.
| | 03:57 | It's all from one convenient location, thanks to this Docker.
| | 04:00 | I could bump that up, I'm going to go up to 40 points.
| | 04:04 | You can see I've got my underline and my alignment options
all from this Docker, and then down below you'll notice
| | 04:10 | that I've got some Character Effects
as well and Character Shifting.
| | 04:14 | Now these sections can be collapsed,
notice the double arrows here.
| | 04:18 | If I click on the double arrows I collapse those sections,
| | 04:20 | to expand them I click the double arrows
that are now pointing down to open them up.
| | 04:25 | So Character Effects can be applied
to the selected artistic text.
| | 04:29 | The other options that are not available right now require me
| | 04:33 | to actually select the individual
characters, we'll do that momentarily.
| | 04:37 | But you can see here I've got underlining styles
and as I hover over these I see a live preview, yes,
| | 04:42 | I see the sample text just left of my
pointer, but look at the text in the document.
| | 04:46 | I'm getting a live preview of what it would look
like, if I were to make any of these selections.
| | 04:51 | I'm going to leave it at single thin line and give that a click.
| | 04:55 | Strikethru is another option, so if you want a line going through
it, you've got lots of different options for the line style,
| | 05:01 | but I don't want any, so I'm going to select (none).
| | 05:04 | You can see Overline is another option,
if you want a line over I like that effect
| | 05:08 | with the single thin line to match my underline, that's cool.
| | 05:12 | And then I've got some options here for the case.
| | 05:15 | Now I've typed this in all caps.
| | 05:18 | So if I go to small caps or all caps
really nothing happens there.
| | 05:21 | If I type in the word husk in lower case
then I'd be able to use these options
| | 05:26 | and see a live preview of what they might look like.
| | 05:28 | Position, same thing, I've Subscript and Superscript.
| | 05:32 | Now typically you are going to select individual characters here
and choose which characters need to be subscript or superscript,
| | 05:38 | think of H2O where the 2 is a little bit smaller and
lower than the rest of the text, that would be Subscript
| | 05:45 | and then if you want ?r2 where the 2 is smaller
and higher that would be our Superscript.
| | 05:51 | In this case we don't want any change in position.
| | 05:54 | Now I'm going to go over to my Text tool here and I'm going to
click-and-drag, it's called Swipe Selecting the entire word husk,
| | 06:02 | and when I do that, notice that my Character
Shift options are now available to me.
| | 06:05 | So if I want to angle each individual
character I can use my arrows.
| | 06:10 | So If I want to tilt them back I can change
the character angle by clicking the up arrow.
| | 06:14 | See how they start to tilt back 5 degrees with each click,
and I can tilt them back down, I can go pass horizontal
| | 06:21 | or 0 degrees tilt them in the other direction.
| | 06:24 | Look my Underline and Overline though,
I think I should leave that at 0.
| | 06:28 | Horizontal Shifting can also be applied, you can see I can move
it a little bit over to the right, over to the left if I want
| | 06:35 | to move it further away from that line that was drawn.
| | 06:38 | I also have a Vertical Shift, if I like to see it go up or down,
it's a percentage value, and of course you could come in here
| | 06:45 | and type in an actual value, just by typing in the 5 for
example and hitting Enter actually applies that change.
| | 06:52 | So I'm going to bump that down to 2, just like that.
| | 06:56 | So those are a number of changes that I've
made to selected or swipe selected text.
| | 07:01 | Another option, one, you've swipe selected your text is to
change the spacing between the characters called Kerning,
| | 07:07 | you can see it set to 0%, if I want to bump that
up to spread them out, that's a good way to do it.
| | 07:13 | You can see with each click 5% is being
added or subtract, when I hit the down arrow,
| | 07:18 | and I can go below 0 as well, if
I want to squish things together.
| | 07:22 | Eventually they will get too close and it
almost looks a little bit too uncomfortable.
| | 07:27 | So I'm actually going to go below 0, but I'm going to go to -5.
| | 07:32 | That gives me a little less space being taken up
by my text, but it's the same text and I'm done.
| | 07:37 | So I'm going to come over here to my Pick tool now.
| | 07:40 | My artistic text is still selected.
| | 07:42 | One last change we can make is from our Color palette, and if
I wanted to change the color of this to may be a Dark Blue,
| | 07:50 | I just click on the color that I want, including
the over and underlines everything changes color.
| | 07:56 | Shift+F4 on your keyboard will zoom you out to the Full Page,
deselect by clicking on a blank spot to see those changes.
| | 08:03 | Now let's go over to our ear of corn here, again,
| | 08:06 | that is artistic text F2 accesses my Zoom
tool and then zoom into this area right here.
| | 08:12 | And let's look at some other changes we can
make from our Character Formatting Docker.
| | 08:18 | Well, if we go over to our alignment
options, our horizontal alignment,
| | 08:22 | this will apply because we've got
two lines of artistic text here.
| | 08:26 | So for example, if I go to left which is the current default.
| | 08:29 | You can see everything is aligned up on
the left side of the text box so to speak.
| | 08:35 | If I go down the center there is a real live preview of
what centering would like to see how corn moved over,
| | 08:41 | centered underneath ear of right alignment, characters are lined
up on the right Full justification doesn't work in this case
| | 08:48 | because the second line only has one word in it, but it would add
extra spaces between words so that text is flushed on the left
| | 08:55 | and the right-hand side and force justified is doing exactly
what I was talking about, but inserting spaces in between
| | 09:02 | that single word at the bottom so that
it is flushed on the left and the right.
| | 09:06 | I'm going to go up to Center and click on that.
| | 09:09 | All the other options are available to me as well, and of
course if I wanted to change character shifting and kerning,
| | 09:15 | I would have to swipe select that text using my Text tool.
| | 09:19 | When I'm done with the Character Formatting, I
just click this button up here to turn it Off.
| | 09:23 | Shift+F4 will zoom me back out and
I'll deselect by clicking out here.
| | 09:27 | Now what about some of these fancy effects that
you see like artistic text across of the top.
| | 09:32 | Well, those are not applied through our Character Formatting
Docker, but rather through some of the interactive tools
| | 09:38 | that we'll be talking about in a separate chapter.
| | 09:41 | So we'll save that for later, but now
you should have a good idea about how
| | 09:44 | to format your artistic text using Character Formatting.
| | 09:48 | Paragraph Formatting is a little bit different
and requires some different types of formatting.
| | 09:52 | So we're going to be getting into the Paragraph
Formatting in this chapter as we move through the lessons.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating paragraph text| 00:00 | Well, if you've been following along in this chapter you
should feel comfortable now working with artistic text.
| | 00:05 | Now we're going to move over to working with paragraph text.
And you can see I have opened up a file here it's called GOmenu1,
| | 00:12 | GreenOnionmenu1.cdr from the Lesson5 folder of the exercise files.
| | 00:16 | If you want to follow along and you've got
the exercise files go ahead and open this up.
| | 00:20 | This particular page here, this menu, does
contain both artistic text and paragraph text.
| | 00:26 | So you can see the word menu for example when I click on it
| | 00:28 | is artistic text.
| | 00:30 | Look down at the bottom on the Status
Bar tells you it's artistic text using
| | 00:34 | a certain font on a certain layer. Now if we look down below
at the Appetizers, the Lighter Fare and the Main Dishes,
| | 00:42 | these all have frames around them, borders around them.
| | 00:46 | Those don't print, but they are frames to help us when working
with paragraph text just to show us what the margins are.
| | 00:52 | And when I click on that you can see down below on my Status Bar
that it's paragraph text using a certain font on a certain layer.
| | 01:00 | So how do we add paragraph text to a page?
| | 01:04 | No problem.
| | 01:05 | We're still going to use our Text tool from the Toolbox,
| | 01:09 | give it a click,
| | 01:10 | and all we have do now, and I am going to try and line this up
nicely with the box just above, is click-and-drag across and down.
| | 01:17 | So we don't just click once- that would create artistic text.
| | 01:21 | Just click-and-drag and when we've got the
frame selected the way we want it, we let go.
| | 01:25 | You can see my cursor is now flashing on the
inside waiting for me to start typing in text.
| | 01:30 | But check it out. It's flashing up here at the
top center, it looks like it's going to be quite large.
| | 01:35 | Sure enough the default font for this particular
document is 57, almost 58 points large.
| | 01:41 | And if I wanted to match some of my other text up here, well,
I can just click inside that paragraph text to see what it is.
| | 01:48 | Same font, but 16 points.
| | 01:50 | Look what happens to the new frame that I just created because I
didn't enter any paragraph text, it says "Click here with the Text tool
| | 01:57 | to add paragraph text."
| | 01:59 | Well, when I clicked inside this particular frame
notice that my Text tool was automatically selected.
| | 02:06 | So with it selected I come in here, click inside
| | 02:09 | and I am just going to change this to 16 points.
| | 02:13 | This way it will match the others and I think it should be left
aligned. If I look at most of the text in the other paragraphs,
| | 02:20 | it's lined up on the left-hand side, aside from the actual title.
| | 02:24 | So let's just put our title in here,
I'm going to type in capital letters,
| | 02:28 | DESERTS/DRINKS.
| | 02:33 | Now when I hit Enter you can see it goes down to the next line
| | 02:36 | and there is a certain amount of space, and that's all defined
in the paragraph formatting that we are going to get into shortly.
| | 02:42 | When I hit Enter again I leave an extra space, an extra blank
line. Now I need to go to Left Alignment. So I am going to
| | 02:49 | go up to my Property Bar here,
| | 02:51 | and you could see over here I've got my Alignment dropdown
| | 02:56 | currently set to Center. If I want it to change it to Left, Ctrl+L is
the keyboard shortcut for that, but I'm just going to click on Left
| | 03:03 | and now I'd start entering my items. I also want you to see
something up here at the top. In the Ruler, you'll see the area
| | 03:09 | that's been taken up this particular frame.
| | 03:12 | So you can see it's just going from one to about three inches.
| | 03:16 | So not too wide,
| | 03:18 | but I've got all of these little Ls in there as well representing
left tabs. We're going to be talking about setting up
| | 03:23 | your tabs and the indents and so on momentarily.
Let's just get our items in here for now though.
| | 03:28 | I want Soft Drinks in here, better turn the Caps Lock key pff.
| | 03:33 | Put Soft Drinks,
| | 03:35 | I'm going to hit Enter twice so leave a blank line. Probably not
the best way to do this, we'll be talking about line spacing when we
| | 03:42 | format our paragraph text. Coffee/Tea will be the same price. Let's
just add some desserts, so couple of Enter taps on the keyboard.
| | 03:52 | Pie, Enter, Enter, Cake, Enter, Enter. Do we have enough room?
| | 03:57 | Obviously not, something's happened to my frame. It's turned red. Now
it indicates that I'm not seeing all of the text that I am entering here.
| | 04:04 | Watch what happens when I type Cookies.
I don't see anything that I am typing.
| | 04:09 | Well, as I move down to my frame notice
that this little black arrow down below.
| | 04:13 | That's telling me that there is additional text that I am not seeing.
| | 04:17 | So if I click-and-drag that down Cookies appears, and when I let go
there's no arrow inside that little marker in the bottom center of my frame.
| | 04:26 | That's a reminder to me that I am seeing all of the contents
inside my paragraph frame. So that's all there is to entering text
| | 04:33 | into a paragraph frame that you've created.
| | 04:36 | Another option would have been to
| | 04:38 | select one of these existing frames just by going to your Pick tool.
| | 04:42 | You can click on any of these that already exists. If you
wanted to duplicate it, you know Ctrl+D on your keyboard
| | 04:48 | will duplicate an object including paragraph text
| | 04:51 | or copy and paste and move into position and just change
the content. So there are a number of different ways that
| | 04:57 | you can use to create paragraph text.
| | 05:01 | Of course you'll want to be able to format that text as well.
| | 05:04 | So in the next lesson we're going to talk about formatting your paragraph
text including how we get these prices over on the right-hand side
| | 05:11 | using some tab stops.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Formatting paragraph text| 00:00 | In this lesson we're going to explore
formatting your paragraph text,
| | 00:04 | which isn't much different than formatting your artistic text.
| | 00:07 | But when you are working with paragraph
frames and you've got multiple lines
| | 00:10 | of text there are some additional formatting
options that you need to know about.
| | 00:14 | So we're going to continue to work with our menu here,
we inserted a new paragraph frame in the last lesson.
| | 00:19 | If you are skipping to this lesson though and you want
to get caught up and you've got the exercise files,
| | 00:23 | go to the Lesson5 folder and open up GOmenu2.cdr,
you'll exactly what I have here on the screen.
| | 00:30 | So we've got some paragraph text here on our page and
we're going to format our desserts and drinks down below.
| | 00:37 | So we're going to change up some of the
formatting and we're also going to need to add
| | 00:41 | in some text and talk about talk about using tab stops.
| | 00:43 | So let's zoom into that area first, you can press F2
or access your Zoom tool, let's just click-and-drag
| | 00:50 | from about the center here down to the bottom right corner.
| | 00:52 | Alright, this is the area we want to work with, so the
first thing I'm going to show you is that you can click
| | 00:57 | on your Pick tool and select a paragraph
frame just by clicking on it.
| | 01:01 | And then all of that character formatting we did when we were
formatting artistic text can also be applied to paragraph text.
| | 01:09 | So if you wanted to, for example, you could open up the Character
Formatting Docker, just by clicking this little guy up here
| | 01:15 | on the Property Bar change things like your Font, and your Point
Size, apply Underlining and change positions strike through all
| | 01:22 | that stuff that we talked about using artistic
text also applies to our paragraph text.
| | 01:27 | But I'm going to close that up and
I'm going to go up to my Text menu
| | 01:32 | and show you there is another Docker called
Paragraph Formatting and I'm going to click on that.
| | 01:37 | Now here you are going to see options for
Horizontal and Vertical alignment within the frame.
| | 01:42 | You are also going to see some spacing options, now if yours
is collapsed just click the double arrows here to expand
| | 01:47 | or collapse any of these sections, we want them all expanded
so you can expand them all including the indents down below.
| | 01:54 | Under Spacing you can see we've got Paragraph and Line
spacing, we've also got Language, Character and Word spacing,
| | 02:01 | so spacing between characters and
between words can also be adjusted.
| | 02:04 | And then we've got indents down below, so if you wanted a Left,
| | 02:08 | Right or a First Line indent you can
apply them here using these figures.
| | 02:12 | So let's try some of this stuff out.
| | 02:13 | Now to apply to the entire frame
you don't actually select any text.
| | 02:18 | So for example if I go over to my Alignment here
notice that there is nothing showing up here,
| | 02:22 | that's because my paragraph frame contains two Horizontal
Alignment options inside, I've got a center title
| | 02:28 | and the Left Aligned items down the left-hand side here.
| | 02:32 | So if I wanted everything centered
I click here, come down to Center
| | 02:36 | and you can see a live preview of what happen if I select Center.
| | 02:40 | There is Left Align and None.
| | 02:42 | Now I'm not going to select anything, I'm just going to click
out here to keep it the way it was, I like the center title
| | 02:48 | and I like to have these items down the left.
| | 02:51 | What I'm missing are the dollar amounts that need
to be added and they should be right aligned,
| | 02:55 | but we're going to talk about tabs in a moment.
| | 02:57 | How about the spacing now?
| | 02:59 | You may recall when we're entering this text that we typed in
Soft Drinks, we hit Enter and Enter again to leave a blank line.
| | 03:06 | Well, let's go inside here with our Text tool.
| | 03:08 | I'm going to access the Text tool here and
just click between Soft Drinks and Coffee/Tea.
| | 03:13 | Now you can see my cursor over there on the left-hand side.
| | 03:15 | I'm going to hit Backspace to remove the blank line, I'm going
to do the same, click between Coffee/Tea and Pie, hit Backspace,
| | 03:22 | click between Pie and Cake Backspace, and
between Cake and Cookies do the exact same thing.
| | 03:27 | Because what we really should have done is adjusted the
Line Spacing as opposed to putting in our own spaces
| | 03:32 | because things can go wrong especially when you start
getting into tabs and trying to align things up,
| | 03:37 | if you've got extra lines in there they are treated as
separate paragraphs even though there is nothing there.
| | 03:41 | Each of these lines because we hit Enter at the end of the line
is treated as its own paragraph within our paragraph frame.
| | 03:49 | So now I'm going to click-and-drag from
Soft Drinks all the way down to Cookies.
| | 03:52 | So I've highlighted all of those lines or paragraphs, and
now when I come over to my Paragraph Formatting Docker,
| | 03:58 | I can do things like adjust the spacing
before or after paragraph.
| | 04:03 | Notice 100%, that represents single spacing,
so 200% would be double spacing, 300% triple,
| | 04:10 | we can also go in between, so we can use our arrows.
| | 04:13 | For example, if we want to create space after
each paragraph we can click the Up arrow.
| | 04:18 | Look what happens over there.
| | 04:19 | Little spaces appearing in between each of
those lines with each click of the Up arrow.
| | 04:25 | You can also come in here and type any value we want.
| | 04:28 | So I'm going highlight everything here, I just type-in 150%,
or 1.5 spacing, when I hit Enter you can see the end result.
| | 04:36 | And I kind of like that spacing better than what I was using
| | 04:39 | in the other paragraph frames where I
was hitting Enter a couple of times.
| | 04:43 | So that's perfect, just like that.
| | 04:45 | I've also got a little extra room if I need to add anymore items.
| | 04:48 | Let's go up to our title now.
| | 04:50 | I'm going to click-and-drag across the title and look
at some of the different horizontal alignments here.
| | 04:56 | Center is what's currently showing up in here;
Vertically, it's at the top of the frame.
| | 05:00 | I'm going to click on the horizontal dropdown here and
just hover over to some of these to see the results.
| | 05:06 | There is Center but there is Left, there
is Right aligned it doesn't make sense.
| | 05:10 | Full Justify isn't working because there is only
one line of text, but if I go down to Force Justify,
| | 05:16 | Force is that single line to fill the entire
width of my paragraph frame, I like that.
| | 05:20 | So I'm going to choose Force Justify, just like that, perfect!
| | 05:25 | Alright, a little bit more formatting to go.
| | 05:27 | I'm just going to scroll up a little bit so
I can see part of the other paragraph frame
| | 05:31 | above my desserts and drinks, my main dishes.
| | 05:34 | So I'm going to click up here, I
just want you to notice something.
| | 05:38 | Up here on the Ruler you can see it's pretty much
empty until we get to around the 3 inch mark over here
| | 05:43 | and there is a little character, it looks
like a backwards L that is a Tab Stop.
| | 05:48 | If I click down below next to Soft Drinks you can see I've got
a whole bunch of characters here which look like the letter L,
| | 05:55 | those are left aligned tab stops and they are the defaults.
| | 05:58 | So if I wanted to tab over and type-in a dollar amount I
would have to hit Tab a few times and I dotted with line
| | 06:04 | up perfectly here with my other paragraph frames.
| | 06:08 | So the next thing we're going to do is talk about tabs.
| | 06:11 | Now they are different from indents.
| | 06:12 | Down below here in our Paragraph Formatting we can add First
Line indents and choose the value so that the first line
| | 06:19 | of the paragraph is indented, sometimes you see that with
lengthy text if you're doing a newsletter for example.
| | 06:25 | You can also set left and right indents using your indent
command, you will indent to whatever you type-in here.
| | 06:31 | So if you didn't want to just do a first line indent, but be
able to indent any line you could set up both values here.
| | 06:37 | That's different from what we're going to do with tabs.
| | 06:40 | So I want the tabs to be applied
to all of these items down below.
| | 06:44 | So I'm going to click-and-drag from Soft Drinks all the way down.
| | 06:48 | Now I'm going up to Text and down to Tabs.
| | 06:52 | Here is what I see the default settings, every
half an inch I've got a left-aligned tab.
| | 06:57 | I don't want any of those, so I can click Remove All.
| | 07:00 | They are all gone and all I need is one at 2.961 inches.
| | 07:05 | I'll show you how I came up with that figure in a second.
| | 07:08 | Clicking the Add button adds one at the half
inch mark, it's left-aligned with no dot leaders.
| | 07:14 | I'm going to change this value by
selecting what's there and typing in 2.961.
| | 07:20 | Over here where it says Left I'm going to click
once, then click the dropdown to choose Right.
| | 07:25 | I also have some for Center and Decimal with this
little character in the dot appearing next to it.
| | 07:33 | But I want this to be right-aligned and I going to try
the dot leaders, I'm going to click where it says Off,
| | 07:38 | click again to see the dropdown list and select On.
| | 07:41 | Now I'm going to click OK.
| | 07:43 | So all I have to do now is start adding my amounts.
| | 07:45 | I'm going to click after Soft Drinks, hit my Tab
key, watch what happens, there are all those dots,
| | 07:50 | it takes me all the way to 2.961 inches on the
Ruler and when I start typing watch what happens.
| | 07:57 | There is the dollar sign ($) 1.99, it all moves
in towards the left taking the dots along the way.
| | 08:04 | Let's try it again with Coffee and Tea,
we hit Tab, put in our dollar sign, 1.25,
| | 08:11 | we click after Pie and hit Tab, let's put that at 3.99.
| | 08:15 | We'll do the same for Cake, dollar sign, and you can see
everything is lined up perfectly down the right-hand side here
| | 08:24 | with the dots making a little bit easier for us
to line up the items with the dollar amounts.
| | 08:29 | Cookies, we'll put in 1.99, there we go.
| | 08:33 | So where did I come up with that 2.961, well, let's click in
the frame just above our Desserts and Drinks just one click.
| | 08:40 | We'll go up to Text and down to Tabs, and you'll see in this case
I've got my first Tab which is right-aligned at 2.961 inches.
| | 08:49 | Now I've got a whole bunch after that which will never be
used, but if I want to take them out I can just click on one
| | 08:55 | and go down below where it says Remove, I don't
want to remove them all, I need that right-aligned.
| | 08:59 | So each time I tap the Remove button here I'm removing a
one below until I'm left with just the one, and I click OK.
| | 09:08 | Alright, so we've got a couple of different
formatting options that have been applied.
| | 09:13 | We've used our Force Justify for our title; we've got
a Tab with dot leaders; we've got 1.5 line spacing.
| | 09:20 | So now it's time to apply that to existing text.
| | 09:23 | Shift+F4 zooms us out and I'm going to zoom in
around my Main Dishes now clicking the Zoom tool
| | 09:31 | or F2 on your keyboard whichever you prefer, let's
zoom into that area and we'll go back to our Text tool.
| | 09:38 | So let's start with our Main Dishes, come across here, this
is where paragraph formatting comes in handy over here.
| | 09:43 | The Horizontal, Force Justify, here we go.
| | 09:47 | Now down below we know that the Tab stops are
okay, but we're just missing the dot leaders,
| | 09:51 | so we click-and-drag over the existing
text from Veggie Stir Fry all the way
| | 09:55 | down to price of our Curry Chicken and we go up to Text.
| | 10:00 | Down to tabs and turn On our dot leaders.
| | 10:04 | So up here where it's Off, I'm going
to turn them On, there we go.
| | 10:10 | Now watch what happens when I click OK.
| | 10:13 | Notice the extra dots down here.
| | 10:15 | Remember, I hit enter a couple of times
here so depending where you hit Enter,
| | 10:19 | look at that, I'm getting dot leaders on a blank line.
| | 10:22 | So with everything still selected I'm going to change
my Line Spacing for after each paragraph to 150%.
| | 10:31 | 150 over here in the Docker, highlight
what's there, just type over it.
| | 10:35 | When you hit Enter watch what happens to the frame, it turns red.
| | 10:39 | That tells me that I'm missing some
of the text, it's gone past the frame.
| | 10:44 | In fact, if I click on my Pick tool look down at the bottom
I got that little black arrow indicating that there is more.
| | 10:52 | Well, that's because I got all these extra blank
lines in here, I'm going to go back to my Text tool,
| | 10:57 | click between Veggie Stir Fry and
Chicken Wrap hit Backspace, perfect!
| | 11:01 | I'm going to click down here where I've got all these dot leaders
right at the beginning, hit Backspace, they disappear nicely,
| | 11:07 | Backspace, all of a sudden now my frame is no longer red.
| | 11:11 | As I move down notice that the black arrow
is missing from that tag at the bottom.
| | 11:15 | So now I know I'm seeing all of my text, hit the Backspace again,
so everything is lined up perfectly with the right spacing.
| | 11:22 | I've got the identical formatting now for
my Main Dishes as my Deserts and Drinks.
| | 11:26 | Shift+F4 zooms out, I'm going to go back to my Pick tool,
click out here off the page to deselect to see the end result.
| | 11:34 | Looks pretty good.
| | 11:35 | So if you want to practice that, go to your Appetizers
and your Lighter Fare and repeat those steps,
| | 11:40 | make everything look consistent, turn those dot
leaders On and setup up your single tab if you have to.
| | 11:45 | Take out the centering for your titles and put in Force Justify,
and remember the line spacing, take out those blank lines
| | 11:53 | and turn it into 150% after each paragraph,
and you'll have a nice consistent looking menu.
| | 11:59 | So that's Paragraph Formatting, there is
something brand new here in CorelDRAW X4.
| | 12:02 | Something you can now do with paragraph text and
that is to mirror it using an Interactive tool.
| | 12:10 | So in the chapter dealing with Interactive
tools we're going to come back
| | 12:13 | to our paragraphs and show you the interactive mirroring.
| | 12:16 | Right now though you should have a good
handle on formatting your paragraph text.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Linking paragraph text frames| 00:00 | When you start working extensively with
paragraph text here in CorelDRAW one scenario
| | 00:05 | that might pop-up is the text is
already been typed somewhere else.
| | 00:08 | Maybe it's in another application like Microsoft Word or
Corel WordPerfect; maybe it's just plain text in Notepad file.
| | 00:15 | So long as you've already got the text
you don't want to have to retype it.
| | 00:18 | So in those scenarios you might want to bring it into your
project in CorelDRAW by creating some paragraph frames
| | 00:24 | for that text and then flow that text from one frame to the next.
| | 00:28 | That flow can happen on the same
page or even across multiple pages.
| | 00:32 | So that's we're going to look at in this lesson using
this file that I've opened up, it's called Newmenu1.cdr.
| | 00:39 | If you've got the exercise files you'll find it in the Lesson5
folder, go ahead and open up that, you'll see it's a two-pager.
| | 00:46 | On the first page here we've got lots of images makes our file
size a little bit big, but we've also got some empty space here
| | 00:53 | for putting that text in that I was talking about.
| | 00:55 | Same thing on Page 2 if we click to Page 2 tab,
some images but some room for some additional text.
| | 01:02 | We'll go back to our first page, this is where we're
going to start by creating our first paragraph frame.
| | 01:07 | So I'm going to go over here to my Text tool, give
it a click and I'm going to use the Guidelines here.
| | 01:13 | If you're not snapping the Guidelines, go up to the View
menu and make sure Snap to Guidelines is checked off,
| | 01:19 | mine is so I'm going to click out here in my document.
| | 01:21 | I'm ready to use those guidelines to create my frames.
| | 01:24 | So I'm going to go up here close to this
top left corner here, click-and-drag across,
| | 01:29 | you can see I've Snaps to that Guidelines down, I don't
want to go too far that I overlap image down below,
| | 01:35 | I want to go just above the image and let go.
| | 01:38 | So there is my first frame, something is not
right though, you may have noticed right away
| | 01:42 | that this huge cursor flashing right in the center.
| | 01:45 | we're going to be creating menu items
with prices on the right-hand side.
| | 01:49 | So we need things to be lined up on the left and may be
use a right-aligned tab to get the prices on the right.
| | 01:54 | So we can do all of that formatting ahead of time,
so when we bring in our text, things look right.
| | 01:59 | So I'm going do that right now.
| | 02:01 | First thing that I don't like, that I see is that I'm centered.
| | 02:04 | So I can go up to my Property Bar
change it from Center Alignment to Left.
| | 02:09 | Step one complete.
| | 02:10 | The size is bothering me that's because it's
close to 58 points way too big for this menu.
| | 02:15 | We'll click the Size dropdown.
| | 02:17 | Well, let's go to -- well, I'd like 20
points, so I'm going to just click up here
| | 02:22 | and type over what's selected 20 and hit Enter.
| | 02:25 | So now I've got 20 point font in here, it wasn't on the list,
so you can just type-in your own values, 20 points is perfect.
| | 02:31 | The other thing I'm seeing that I don't like is on the Ruler
where I've all these Tab stops every half an inch, the default.
| | 02:37 | Like I said I'm going to have a menu
item on the left, a price on the right.
| | 02:41 | I know for a fact that the person who entered the menu text in
notepad used a tab to separate the menu item from the menu price.
| | 02:50 | So we need to fix our tabs.
| | 02:53 | Now what I like to do in these cases is just click on
my Pick tool and make sure the entire frame is selected,
| | 02:57 | that way I'm not just getting a portion of the contents.
| | 03:01 | So with it entirely selected let's go up to
Text and down to Tabs, we've done this before.
| | 03:07 | we're going to remove all these defaults by clicking
the Remove All button and just add one right
| | 03:12 | about the 3.75 inch mark up here on the Ruler.
| | 03:15 | So I'm going to click-and-drag, go for that type 3.75 and
when I add it, I need to change the alignment from left.
| | 03:23 | So I'll click on Left, click the dropdown and choose
Right, and let's use those little dot leaders.
| | 03:29 | I'm going to click on where it says Off,
click again to see the dropdown and choose On.
| | 03:34 | Also have Leader Options if I want to change the options, see
how we've got these little dots that's the character being used.
| | 03:40 | I could choose other characters if I wanted to.
| | 03:43 | None of those really makes sense, kind of like the dot.
| | 03:46 | So I'm going to leave it as our dot.
| | 03:49 | The spacing is Single Spacing you can see one character.
| | 03:52 | If I want to spread it out a little more I could bump it up to
2 or I could bump it down to 0 and look how many dots I get.
| | 03:58 | I'm going to leave it at 0 and click OK.
| | 04:01 | Here we go.
| | 04:02 | When I click OK the formatting of that frame is done.
| | 04:06 | So when I click on my Text tool, watch what happens.
| | 04:08 | In the inside of my paragraph frame, look at my Ruler,
| | 04:12 | no tabs until I get to about 3.75 inch mark I'm thinking
maybe that I could go over a little bit further.
| | 04:18 | So right here from my Ruler I'm going to click-and-drag
it over just a little bit closer to the 4, there we go.
| | 04:24 | That's perfect!
| | 04:25 | So all I have to do is bring in my text, but
before I do that I should add the other frames.
| | 04:30 | I want you to see something that happens here, with my Text
tool still selected I'm going to add another frame here
| | 04:35 | on the right-hand side, and I'm going to
do it right about here, across and down.
| | 04:41 | So on below that image all the way down to
the Guidelines that looks good right there.
| | 04:46 | Look what happened I'm back to the default, but I don't
have to worry about that when I flow text from one frame
| | 04:52 | to another the formatting comes along by default.
| | 04:55 | I'll show you where that set up.
| | 04:57 | Let's go to Page 2 first and add those additional frames.
| | 05:00 | I'm going to put another one in here close to the edge, and
across to that guideline and down to that guideline release.
| | 05:08 | Got another guideline here I'm going to use, I want to be just
below that image, across and down, that's good right there.
| | 05:17 | And another one for what looks like my desserts
according to the photos, they look good,
| | 05:23 | across and down and now I've got all of my frames.
| | 05:26 | So back I go to Page 1, my menu page.
| | 05:29 | I'm going to click inside, now I'm ready to start typing
| | 05:32 | or borrowing text that's already been
typed, that's what we're going to do.
| | 05:35 | Just before we do though, let's check out the tools and then
Options, we'll come up to Workspace click that plus sign
| | 05:43 | because we want to go down to text, click
that plus sign and we'll see Paragraph.
| | 05:47 | Clicking on Paragraph shows you what's
going to happen with linked frames.
| | 05:51 | First of all, we're going to show the
linking of the text frames by default.
| | 05:54 | You're going to know exactly what frame is linked to what frame.
| | 05:57 | Also the frames themselves show up and down below apply
paragraph frame formatting, so all that formatting we just did
| | 06:05 | in the first frame is automatically going to be applied
to selected and subsequent frames, to all linked frames
| | 06:12 | or to selected frames only is another option.
| | 06:14 | But I wanted to any selected and subsequent
frames from my fist one on, so that's perfect.
| | 06:20 | All I have to do is click OK here to accept those defaults.
| | 06:23 | Now to get my text, well, I've already
got notepad open down here.
| | 06:27 | I'm going to click on it, you can see my text
is selected, the quickest way to select it,
| | 06:31 | Ctrl+A on your keyboard selects all your text.
| | 06:35 | You could also do it from the Edit menu and you'll see select all
is currently not available because I've already got it selected.
| | 06:43 | So I click out here Ctrl+A again to make sure it's selected.
| | 06:47 | Now I'm going to copy it, Ctrl+C on the
keyboard is the shortcut or Edit and Copy,
| | 06:53 | your choice that puts it on the Windows Clipboard.
| | 06:55 | We'll minimize this, now if you've got the exercise
files by the way menuItems.txt is the Lesson5 folder
| | 07:03 | if you want to go grab this text from notepad.
| | 07:05 | I'm going to minimize this and I'm ready to start pasting now.
| | 07:10 | All I have to do is make sure I'm in that first frame which
I'm, click my Paste button and in it goes, look at that,
| | 07:18 | it's got the dots, it's got the right-aligned
dollar amounts and my frame is red.
| | 07:24 | Let's go to our Pick tool.
| | 07:26 | Frame is red because there is more
down below than what meets the eye.
| | 07:30 | If I come down here to that little arrow tab
at the bottom and click-and-drag that down.
| | 07:34 | You can see I get into Lighter Fare
and it's overlapping my images,
| | 07:39 | and that's no good, that's why I created my frame up here.
| | 07:42 | So I'm going to let go right up here,
and to get the remaining text to flow
| | 07:46 | into this frame all I do is I click on that Tab at the bottom.
| | 07:50 | Right on that Flow Tab, give it a click, look what happens I've
got this huge arrow waiting for me to select the next frame.
| | 07:58 | Well, it's this frame right here, so I click and there is my
Lighter Fare, look at that, if it's nicely in there, doesn't it?
| | 08:04 | And when I click on this paragraph frame it's got its own arrow.
| | 08:09 | If I drag that down you can see Main Dishes is coming up next.
| | 08:12 | So I want to scroll up above Main Dishes and click on the
arrow tab down at the bottom and now I'm going to flow
| | 08:18 | on to the next page, Page 2, it's going in here.
| | 08:22 | Click, notice that all of the formatting
comes along with it, that's perfect.
| | 08:26 | Tells me it's coming from Page 1.
| | 08:28 | Now it's part of our default setting
to show the link coming from Page 1.
| | 08:32 | I'm seeing the Beverages down here though, so I'm going
to drag the bottom border up until Beverages disappears.
| | 08:38 | Now I'm going to click on the Tab itself down below and
flow the remaining text over here to my Beverages section.
| | 08:44 | Look at that, they all showing up, I click
again on this frame, drag I get down,
| | 08:49 | there is Wine down below so I want
to make sure that shows up as well.
| | 08:53 | Now I'm going to click on the arrow one more frame
to go and when I click here there are my Desserts.
| | 09:00 | Click on this frame to select it, look at that, the Tab down
below has no more arrow in it, meaning I'm seeing all of my text.
| | 09:06 | Everything I copied from notepad now shows up here in my draw
file, and you can also see the linking, from Page 1 we go here,
| | 09:14 | there's that thin blue line, it's very difficult to see.
| | 09:16 | I'm going to zoom in to the middle area here
and I'm going to go back to my Pick tool.
| | 09:22 | See that thin line that's pointing up to this frame and then
there is a blue line pointing down to the next frame down below.
| | 09:29 | If I go back to Page 1 and Shift+F4 to zoom back
out I'm going to click on the first paragraph frame
| | 09:37 | and you can see there is a link going down
to this frame with a dotted link to Page 2.
| | 09:42 | Everything is linked up, I know exactly
where it's going and it's smart.
| | 09:46 | So when I resize those frames that might not be visible, become
visible, or if there is too much when I size it down it flows
| | 09:53 | onto the next frame, thanks to these links that we've setup.
| | 09:57 | So I'm going to click outside my document to see
the end result it looks like a pretty nice menu.
| | 10:02 | You might have a little bit of formatting you might want to do
at this point, maybe you want to format the titles to be centered
| | 10:08 | or stand out, that's up to you, you can use
Character and Paragraph Formatting at this point.
| | 10:12 | But with paragraph linking it's nice to know that if
you've already got the text you don't have to retype it,
| | 10:17 | just bring it in and flow from one frame to the next.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with columns| 00:00 | In this lesson, we're going to continue
to work with paragraph text.
| | 00:03 | But this time we're going to put it into columns.
| | 00:07 | Now, why would we put text into columns?
| | 00:09 | Why do you think when you read a newspaper or a
magazine usually that text appears in multiple columns?
| | 00:15 | Well, it's not just to make it look pretty
on the page, it's actually for your benefit.
| | 00:19 | The reader, if your eyes don't have to scan all the way
from the left side of the page to the right-hand side
| | 00:24 | of the page you won't get tired and you will
probably read more if the text is in columns.
| | 00:28 | So that's what we're going to do here
with your Green Onion Bistro Story.
| | 00:32 | You can see, I have opened up a file we're going to work with,
if you have got the exercise files, go to your Lesson5 folder,
| | 00:38 | you will find GOStory1.cdr, that is the
Green Onion story that you see down here.
| | 00:44 | With that opened, all we have to do now is
select the area where our text is going to go.
| | 00:50 | We know that that means creating a paragraph frame.
| | 00:53 | You should be an expert at this by now, we
go over to our Toolbox click on the Text tool
| | 00:57 | and then we just marquee select the area
here where we want our text to appear.
| | 01:02 | So I'm going to start up here on my
left ruler about the nine inch mark,
| | 01:05 | and I'm going to go in about a quarter inch from the border.
| | 01:09 | Click-and-drag to the opposite side and down and
try and maintain a quarter inch all the way around.
| | 01:15 | When I let go, I have got my frame.
| | 01:18 | This is where my text is going to go.
| | 01:20 | All I have to do is start typing it or I have already provided
you with some text if you've got the exercise files you can start
| | 01:27 | up Notepad and navigate to the Lesson5 folder and you
will have this the GreenOnionStory which is a txt file.
| | 01:34 | See not much formatting here, it's just sample text.
| | 01:37 | All we have to do is copy it and paste it into Draw.
| | 01:41 | So you can go up to your Edit menu to
select it all or Ctrl+A on the keyboard.
| | 01:45 | Next, you will copy it Ctrl+C on the keyboard will copy it to the
Windows clipboard or click at it and choose Copy right from here.
| | 01:54 | Then we can minimize Notepad, we're done with it.
| | 01:57 | Flip over to our text frame here, make sure we're
flashing away in the top left corner and paste it.
| | 02:02 | I'm going to go up to my Paste button and in comes my text.
| | 02:06 | When I go to my Pick tool, I look
at it and it doesn't look too bad.
| | 02:10 | But like I said, for our readers who have
to scan from the left side all the way
| | 02:14 | to the right side maybe this would
look better if it were in columns.
| | 02:18 | Now, the entire frame is still selected.
| | 02:20 | So all I have to do is go up to my
Text menu, and come down to Columns.
| | 02:27 | Now the Column Settings, you can see it's actually
already in columns, it's just one wide column.
| | 02:32 | It is about eight inches wide here,
the Number of columns is set to 1.
| | 02:37 | So here are my options down below when
I start creating multiple columns.
| | 02:42 | I can type in a number or use my arrows
to bump this up to another number.
| | 02:45 | But before I do, notice that there is a check box here with
a check in it next to Equal column width that is a default.
| | 02:52 | So if you want equal columns, may be you are going to
do two or three columns you want them the same width,
| | 02:57 | you can leave that checked off and then pay attention
to the Gutter or the space in between those columns.
| | 03:04 | Also, you have got Frame Settings, if you want to
Maintain the current frame width that we see here,
| | 03:09 | leave that radio button selected or if you
want the frame adjusted automatically for you
| | 03:14 | to fit all the text you can choose this one down below.
| | 03:17 | Preview is also checked off that means I'm going to
see it actually happen down here before I click OK.
| | 03:23 | So let's bump this up to 2 and see what happens.
| | 03:25 | There is two columns you can see what that looks
like, flows down the left and then over to the right.
| | 03:30 | Equal columns, because I have got a half inch as a
Gutter 0.500 inches is the space in between my columns
| | 03:38 | and you can see the two columns do have equal width right here.
| | 03:42 | If I bump that up to 3, again three equal columns
the Gutter can be adjusted if I want it to
| | 03:49 | and because I have got Equal column width selected,
if I change the Gutter to be something less.
| | 03:54 | Say as I bump this down to 0.4 and hit Enter.
| | 03:58 | I have got 0.400 inches here and now you can see I have got wider
columns, but it doesn't flow all the way down that third column.
| | 04:06 | I'm going to change my Gutter here to 0.7.
| | 04:10 | So I'm just going to change the four to a seven and hit Enter.
| | 04:14 | And you can see that change increases the space in between
and now my text flows a little further down that third column.
| | 04:21 | So I'm going to click OK to accept that.
| | 04:25 | Now I can make some additional adjustments right from here.
| | 04:28 | First of all, I'm going to change the
Alignment, right now it is all left aligned
| | 04:31 | and that looks a little bit jag it down the right-hand side.
| | 04:34 | So if I come up here and I change this to Full
Justification, look what happens as I hover
| | 04:39 | over that that looks nice and neat, doesn't it.
| | 04:42 | Extra spaces are inserted along the way to make it
flush on both the left and the right side of my column.
| | 04:47 | So I'm going to give that a click.
| | 04:49 | I'm going to bring this top note up here, I'm going to
drag it down a little bit to give me some extra space
| | 04:55 | and look how the columns flow now to create a little
more text on the third column as I drag it further down.
| | 05:02 | I'm going to go right to about there
and I go with that tab, perfect.
| | 05:06 | That looks good right there.
| | 05:08 | I can also adjust the Gutters and
Margin widths right from the inside.
| | 05:12 | So if I go to my Text tool, now I'm inside
don't worry about all of the red squiggly lines,
| | 05:17 | is because those words aren't recognize in the dictionary.
| | 05:20 | Something we're going to be talking about shortly
when it comes to working with the Spellchecker.
| | 05:25 | But right now you can see, there are Guidelines here for each
of my Gutters, the Column widths, and as I move my mouse pointer
| | 05:31 | over them I get the double arrow, which means
I can click-and-drag these in if I want it to.
| | 05:36 | Just by clicking-and-dragging, I'm going to decrease
the space in between or increase the space in between,
| | 05:42 | and because I have got Equal column width
setup automatically they will stay equal.
| | 05:47 | So I can click-and-drag that's too far and you can see now
they are actually touching, so I'm going to click Undo.
| | 05:54 | I can also come up to my ruler, I have got guides
up here and you can see as I click-and-drag
| | 06:00 | to squeeze these together what happens
to my text as it flows around.
| | 06:04 | So eventually I will get exactly where I want to be and let go.
| | 06:07 | And I will click on my Pick tool, click
outside the text to see the end result.
| | 06:12 | Thinking may be it is coming a little bit too close to the edges.
| | 06:15 | So I'm going to click on it one more time,
I'm going to take the Handles over here
| | 06:18 | on the left-hand side, I'm going to drag it in slightly.
| | 06:21 | Again, my third column is now scrolling down
a bit, I'm going to drag the right side in.
| | 06:26 | Same thing happens, my columns stay equal widths using
that Gutter space and all of my text is still visible.
| | 06:33 | I'm going to drag the bottom up as well.
| | 06:36 | Again, text will flow automatically,
deselect when it looks just right.
| | 06:41 | So there you go, using paragraph text you can actually put that
text in the columns if you got lots and you want to save the eyes
| | 06:48 | of your readers and also make it look good
on the page, why not think about columns.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with bullets| 00:00 | In this lesson we're going to explore something else
you can do with paragraph text that you can't do
| | 00:04 | with artistic text and that is create Bulleted list.
| | 00:08 | You can see we're still working with
the same file from the previous lesson,
| | 00:11 | so if you have skipped to this lesson
and you do have the exercise files.
| | 00:15 | Go to the Lesson5 folder, open up GOStory2.cdr, and
you will have what I have and get you all caught up.
| | 00:22 | Down here in the bottom right corner, we
have got some space for some additional text,
| | 00:26 | so maybe we should put our bulleted list down there.
| | 00:28 | When creating a bulleted list in
CorelDRAW it is has to be paragraph text.
| | 00:32 | But the text could already be there.
| | 00:34 | If you have got points that you have entered
already you can turn them into bulleted list
| | 00:39 | or you can create your bulleted list on the fly.
| | 00:41 | we'll look at both methods in this lesson.
| | 00:43 | First things first, let's zoom into this area down here I'm
going to press F2 on my keyboard, gives me my Zoom tool.
| | 00:50 | I'm going to zoom into this area by clicking-and-dragging
that is where I want my bulleted list to go.
| | 00:55 | So I'm going to click on my Text tool.
| | 00:58 | And I'm going to click down here in the bottom corner,
| | 01:00 | gets me inside my paragraph text happens
to be in columns and that's okay.
| | 01:04 | It doesn't have to be in columns
for you to create a bulleted list,
| | 01:07 | so it could be one wide column, multiple
columns like we have here.
| | 01:10 | Really that part doesn't matter just along as
you know when to turn on and off your bullets.
| | 01:16 | So let's hit Return or Enter a couple of times to
leave a blank line and we'll put in a title here.
| | 01:21 | I'm going to type in, in all caps
IMPORTANT POINTS, turn off my Caps Lock key,
| | 01:29 | hit Enter twice and that's where I want to start my bullets.
| | 01:32 | So all I have to do now is turn my bullets on.
| | 01:35 | A couple of different ways to do that.
| | 01:36 | I can go up to my Bullets button right
here, see it on the Property Bar.
| | 01:41 | You won't see this button be available
when working with artistic text.
| | 01:45 | In other words it will be faded out, but because
we're in paragraph text here we can click on it here,
| | 01:50 | Ctrl+M is your keyboard shortcut or you can go
up to the Text menu here and click on Bullets,
| | 01:56 | because we want you to see the Bullets dialog box here.
| | 02:00 | So first things first, we have to turn on Bullets.
| | 02:02 | Right in the top left corner, unless we choose
to use bullets by clicking this check box.
| | 02:07 | None of this options are available to us.
| | 02:09 | So we want to use bullets.
| | 02:11 | As soon as we do, the default appears.
| | 02:13 | And you can see what default shows up here for me.
| | 02:15 | I have got here from the Wingdings Font category
a round dot that's the symbol been used.
| | 02:21 | You can see the default Size 10.2 fairly close to the actual
size of my text which is at 12 point according to my Property Bar
| | 02:30 | and then there are other things we can adjust.
| | 02:31 | So let's start with the font itself.
| | 02:34 | From Wingdings, you can see there is bunch of other categories
where we'll find symbols all the way from Bookshelf Symbol
| | 02:41 | down to the bottom where we see several
Webdings and Wingding categories.
| | 02:46 | So let's leave it at Wingdings and let's
choose a different symbol clicking the dropdown
| | 02:51 | for this particular font category gives
us a number of symbols to choose from.
| | 02:55 | There is lots in here, and if we wanted to choose something else
| | 02:59 | like happy faces there is suns, lots
of different symbols to choose from.
| | 03:04 | I'm going to go to one that's kind of like a -- no
I like this one here which is my six pointed star.
| | 03:09 | I'm going to give that a click.
| | 03:11 | Right away you can see it over here in my text why because
Preview is checked off down here in the bottom left corner.
| | 03:18 | If yours isn't, you want to check that off to see
what it's going to look like in your actual document.
| | 03:22 | I like that.
| | 03:23 | Now, let's adjust the Size.
| | 03:25 | maybe you want it to be little bit smaller, we can hit the
down arrow or little bit bigger by hitting the up arrow
| | 03:31 | or we can just highlight what's there and type in our own value.
| | 03:34 | I want it to be 11.
| | 03:35 | I type in 11, I don't press Enter here that would be like
accepting all of the rest of these defaults and clicking OK.
| | 03:42 | I can hit my Tab key moves me to
next field and adjust my bullet size.
| | 03:47 | The Baseline shift means, is the bullet right
on the bottom line along with your text.
| | 03:52 | So lined up across the bottom right on the base
line or you want to move it up a little bit.
| | 03:57 | Well, since it's a little bit smaller than
my font size, I'm going to bump it up.
| | 04:01 | I'm going to bump it up just two points.
| | 04:03 | So two clicks of the up arrow bumps it up.
| | 04:06 | And you can see it just moved up
slightly next to my flashing cursor.
| | 04:10 | You can Use a hanging indent style for bulleted lists if
your bulleted points are going to be more than one line.
| | 04:15 | Well then they will all line up indented here from
your bullet leaving the bullet hanging out here
| | 04:21 | in the left-hand side, that's the hanging indent style.
| | 04:23 | Each of our bullets were about to enter as a single
line, so it doesn't apply we don't need to turn that on.
| | 04:28 | Now, let's adjust the Spacing.
| | 04:29 | You can see the bullet just like our
text is right up against the frame.
| | 04:33 | If we want to move it away a little bit,
we can use our Spacing options down here.
| | 04:37 | Text frame to bullet, I'm going to bump that up to 0.05.
| | 04:42 | So it indents my whole list.
| | 04:44 | Now, the space between the bullet
and my text can also be adjusted.
| | 04:47 | I'm going to bump that down.
| | 04:48 | In fact, I would like it to be 0.1.
| | 04:51 | So I'm going to select everything that's there, type in 0.1.
| | 04:54 | Now, I can hit Tab here or if I'm done hitting Enter,
will lock it in and accept all of these other changes.
| | 05:00 | So I'm going to click OK.
| | 05:02 | Same thing as hitting Enter.
| | 05:04 | Now I'm ready to start typing in my points.
| | 05:06 | So let's do that Caps Lock should be off
here and type in Friendly Staff, hit Enter.
| | 05:14 | How about Great Service?
| | 05:16 | These are all things we offer at the Green Onion Bistro.
| | 05:20 | Fresh, Tasty Food and let's add one more, Excellent Value.
| | 05:29 | There we go.
| | 05:30 | I have added my last bullet, if I was to turn the bullets
off by going back up to Text and Bullets or by coming here
| | 05:36 | to my Bullet button to show or hide the bullet, I
would actually loose this here next to Excellent Value.
| | 05:41 | So it's very important to hit Enter one more time to get
that blank bullet and then turn your bullets off by going
| | 05:48 | up to the Property Bar and clicking the Bullet button.
| | 05:51 | See how it turns it off and moves my flashing cursor
back to the left, so I can continue tying text.
| | 05:56 | So that's typing in bullets on the fly.
| | 05:58 | You're making a few choices, select
a few options and then start typing.
| | 06:02 | What if you don't like those options.
| | 06:04 | You decide maybe you made some wrong choices, maybe the bullet
is a little bit too high and you want to bring it down closer
| | 06:09 | to the baseline or choose a different symbol.
| | 06:12 | Well, in that case you click left to the first
bullet, drag down to the end of last line,
| | 06:17 | make sure all the bullets are selected
and then go up to Text and Bullets.
| | 06:24 | This accesses the dialog box.
| | 06:26 | Clicking the Bullets button would simply turn the bullets off.
| | 06:29 | So we need to come up to the Text menu to make changes.
| | 06:32 | So yeah, the Baseline shift is too
much, I'm going to knock that down.
| | 06:35 | Actually I going to go right down to 0.
| | 06:37 | I think I like that look better.
| | 06:39 | Thanks to Preview, I know what it is going to look like.
| | 06:41 | I could choose a different Symbol,
choose a different Font category.
| | 06:45 | Maybe I would like to try this star here.
| | 06:47 | Yeah, I like that better.
| | 06:48 | Once I have made my choice, I click okay to lock them in.
| | 06:51 | Here we go, click down here and that's the finished product.
| | 06:55 | I also mentioned that if you have already got the
points there, you don't have to retype them in bullets.
| | 07:00 | You just select them and turn the bullets on.
| | 07:02 | So the opposite of that would be selecting
all of these and turning the bullets off.
| | 07:08 | So this would be a scenario where you have got
your points in there already there is a Return.
| | 07:12 | In other words, some one has hit Enter at the end of each line.
| | 07:15 | That will make them good for bullets.
| | 07:17 | So clicking in front of Friendly Staff, clicking all the way down
to the last one Excellent Value you can go up to Text and Bullets
| | 07:24 | if you want to make some choices or just turn the bullets
on by clicking the Bullet button here on the Property Bar,
| | 07:30 | because it get turned on using the last options that we
selected and there is how you turn on bullets for existing text.
| | 07:37 | Let's zoom out, Shift+F4 now just to see the entire document.
| | 07:40 | I'm going to go back to my Pick tool and click outside
the page to see what that's going to look like, beautiful.
| | 07:47 | So now you know how to create bullets inside a paragraph text.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Integration with WhatTheFont| 00:00 | If you have been following along with me in this chapter, you have
probably figured out by now that we used text extensively in CorelDRAW.
| | 00:08 | It's a very important part of the creation process.
| | 00:11 | So we are going to go through a typical scenario using
a brand new tool available to you here in CorelDRAW X4,
| | 00:18 | it's called WhatTheFont?!
| | 00:20 | Here's our scenario. The Green Onion Bistro,
a client of ours, is going to give us an image,
| | 00:26 | a scanned image of their old logo and they want us to design
a new logo using the same font. Just to keep that consistent.
| | 00:34 | We ask them what font was used, and they have no clue.
| | 00:36 | So it's up to us to determine the font and thanks to this
new feature available to us right through our Text menu here
| | 00:42 | in CorelDRAW X4 we can identify fonts. Watch this.
| | 00:46 | I have got my brand new file started here,
you can click on the New button, Ctrl+N
| | 00:51 | to get your new page. Now, we're going
to bring in that image I was taking about.
| | 00:55 | So we go over to our Import button, Ctrl+I on the keyboard.
| | 00:59 | If you have got the exercise files, give this one a click
and navigate to the Lesson5 folder of those exercise files,
| | 01:05 | you will find OldGOlogo.
| | 01:08 | It's a TIF image. A bitmap, JPEGs, GIFs,
you name it all of them are going to work.
| | 01:14 | TIF images work exceptionally well.
| | 01:16 | So I am going to click on OldGOlogo here
| | 01:19 | and click my Import button.
| | 01:21 | Now I just have to draw it by clicking-and-dragging.
| | 01:24 | Choose a size. That's a good size right there.
| | 01:27 | I am going to press F4 on my keyboard to zoom
into that image and there is my text down below.
| | 01:33 | So I have no clue what font was used here. I am going to
use my new feature called WhatTheFont?! to find out for me.
| | 01:39 | So we go up to the Text menu, and by the way this doesn't
have to be selected, if you want to deselect it you can.
| | 01:46 | When we go up to Text and down to the very bottom
here, very close to the bottom we find WhatTheFont?!
| | 01:53 | When we click on it, the first step is going to be to capture
our text. You can see my crosshair as I move my mouse around.
| | 01:59 | It says "Click and drag to select a new capture area."
| | 02:02 | So I want to capture my text,
| | 02:04 | the more text the merrier, the more different characters the better.
| | 02:09 | So there's my text.
| | 02:10 | If I want to adjust this, I have got the handles. Maybe I accidentally
caught part of the onion. I want to drag that down with the double arrow.
| | 02:18 | Making sure I am just getting text.
| | 02:19 | When I am done I can press Enter or just
click anywhere inside the captured area
| | 02:25 | to confirm my selection.
| | 02:26 | Watch what happens when you click.
| | 02:29 | Your default browser should now launch taking
you to myfonts.com using the feature here called
| | 02:36 | WhatTheFont?! right there.
| | 02:38 | Your image will appear right at the top,
Green Onion Bistro in our case,
| | 02:42 | and down below we've got some prompts for character selection.
We want to make sure the characters are captured correctly.
| | 02:49 | So you can see as I go down each of the
character is represented or highlighted here,
| | 02:53 | and then on the right I want to make sure
that the right character shows up here as well.
| | 02:58 | Green so far so good.
| | 03:01 | As I scroll little further down you can see, oh. We've got some
thing wrong with and the N and the I are too close together,
| | 03:07 | so it's thinking maybe that's an M,
| | 03:10 | when really it's an N.
| | 03:12 | I am going to put in an N here.
| | 03:14 | Down here, I have got nothing selected. But down
below just the dot for the I, I am going to put in the I.
| | 03:20 | And a little further down,
| | 03:22 | looks like that happens again with Bistro.
Having trouble with the I's; it is not a one.
| | 03:26 | So I am going to highlight it by clicking
and dragging over it, type right over that I.
| | 03:32 | I will leave the dot alone. Bistro,
the rest looks good except this S.
| | 03:37 | It looks like a capital S. So I am going to
highlight that and put in a lower case S.
| | 03:41 | Here we go.
| | 03:42 | So once I have got my character matched up, I click the
Search button to go searching for the font that was used.
| | 03:49 | And as I scroll down, I get some matches.
| | 03:52 | And you can see I have got the top five here.
| | 03:55 | So the first one, Revival, doesn't even look
close. Garamond MT actually looks very close.
| | 04:02 | And in fact that's probably the right one right there.
| | 04:06 | The others, not so close.
| | 04:08 | When I click on Garamond MT, here I'm going to get more information
about the font and see my sample text at different sizes
| | 04:15 | and now I realize that is the closet one, that is the
perfect right there. There is the mini-map down below
| | 04:20 | if there are other characters I want to compare with.
| | 04:23 | There are available versions of this
font as well, you can see down below.
| | 04:28 | So I have got exactly what I'm looking for. I know it's Garamond MT.
| | 04:32 | So I close up my browser and back
to CorelDRAW. Shift+F4 zooms me out.
| | 04:39 | I can go to my Text tool now
| | 04:41 | and click on the page
| | 04:43 | and change my font from the Property Bar.
| | 04:46 | I am going to look for Garamond.
| | 04:49 | And as I scroll down the alphabetical list,
| | 04:52 | I come to the G's.
| | 04:55 | There it is right there.
| | 04:57 | I'm going to type in Green Onion Bistro. And I'm going
to go to my Pick tool- this is just for fun here-
| | 05:06 | drag it up here,
| | 05:08 | maybe change the size to something a little bit bigger.
| | 05:12 | 36 looks good, and I'm going to zoom into this area just
to compare myself to see how well a job WhatTheFont?! did
| | 05:20 | and look at that that's perfect.
| | 05:22 | The exact same characters. As I look at the R
especially, that's got some gliffs there. Kind of cool.
| | 05:28 | I like it. Shift+F4.
| | 05:29 | Now, I'm ready to use this text in
the new logo that I'm about to design.
| | 05:35 | I am done with this image, I can click on it, hit Delete
| | 05:38 | and I am ready to continue knowing that I have got the right font.
| | 05:42 | So brand new in CorelDRAW X4 is WhatTheFont?!
accessible directly from your Text menu.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Checking spelling and using QuickCorrect| 00:00 | Of course, whenever you are working with text in any kind
of application it's important that that text to be accurate,
| | 00:07 | accurately spelled you don't want typos, you don't
want the wrong word being used in the wrong area.
| | 00:13 | So in this lesson we're going to look at
some of the Writing tools that are built
| | 00:17 | into CorelDRAW X4 namely the Spell
Checker and something called QuickCorrect.
| | 00:22 | You can see, I have opened up a file that we're
going to use it is called GOB_Spelling1.cdr,
| | 00:27 | you will find that in the Lesson5 folder
of the exercise files if you have got them
| | 00:33 | and if you want to fall along just open that up.
| | 00:35 | we're going to go over to our Toolbox and click on our Text tool.
| | 00:37 | Right now you can see that there is actually two frames
here, and if I click on the first frame there is a line going
| | 00:43 | down to the second frame and if I click on the second frame the
line going back up to the first, so these are linked together.
| | 00:50 | If I will go over to my Text tool, watch what happens, because
I'm using by Text tool now, some of the words in this text
| | 00:57 | that flows from one frame to the
next has a red squiggly underline.
| | 01:01 | That represents words that are basically
not recognized in the spelling dictionary.
| | 01:07 | So sometimes those words are misspelt, sometimes
they are typos, sometimes there are words
| | 01:11 | that might need to be added to the dictionary.
| | 01:14 | So we're going to look at all of these options
as we make use of the Spell Checker now.
| | 01:19 | So when I go up to Text, and I come down from the Text menu
to my Writing tools we'll find those just past halfway,
| | 01:28 | you will notice that there are series of tools
available to me including the Spell Checker.
| | 01:32 | I have something called Grammatik allows me to
check grammar, Thesaurus for looking up synonyms.
| | 01:38 | There is QuickCorrect and we're going to check out
the Spell Checker and QuickCorrect in this lesson.
| | 01:42 | Let's start with Spell Check.
| | 01:44 | When I click on this, it actually launches my
Spell Checker you will see Writing tools is opened
| | 01:49 | up in the Spell Checker tab is currently selected.
| | 01:53 | Right away it goes to the first word
not recognized in the dictionary.
| | 01:57 | In this case you can see the word Onion is highlighted in my
document, it has got an extra n, so down below in the Replace
| | 02:05 | with field, the most likely replacement appears
there which is Onion without the extra n.
| | 02:10 | But down below there are other possible replacements
as well, just so happens the right ones been selected.
| | 02:16 | So now I have a series of options over here on the right.
| | 02:19 | Do I want to replace the word Onion with
that extra n with the selected replacement
| | 02:24 | which is Onion, the way it should be spelled?
| | 02:27 | Do I want to skip over that just
this one time and leave it as is?
| | 02:31 | If I choose Skip Once it will leave
Onion spelled the way you see it there,
| | 02:35 | but if it's misspelled again the same way
later on in this document it will stop there.
| | 02:41 | Whereas the next option, Skip All will always skip
over Onion spelt with the extra n, this time only.
| | 02:48 | The next time I run the Spell Checker it will stop there.
| | 02:51 | The only time, it won't stop on this word Onion
with the extra n is if I add it to the dictionary.
| | 02:56 | Clicking the Add button adds it to a supplemental dictionary
that is used in conjunction with the main dictionary.
| | 03:03 | So clicking Add is sometimes useful not in this
case, proper names though might come in handy.
| | 03:09 | Something called Auto Replace as well, if I choose Auto Replace,
Onion with the extra n will be replaced with the correct spelling
| | 03:16 | and that word will also be added to our QuickCorrect list.
| | 03:21 | In other words, every time I type Onion with an extra
n going forward, it will automatically be replaced
| | 03:27 | with the correct spelling of Onion down below.
| | 03:29 | we're going to examine QuickCorrect a little bit later.
| | 03:31 | So we're not going to choose Auto Replace at this time.
| | 03:34 | I do want to show you though that we have a couple of options
from the Options dropdown, some are selected, some are not.
| | 03:40 | Auto Start is selected as soon as we click on
Spell Check from the Text menu under Writing tools,
| | 03:46 | it automatically started checking
spelling, that's because of this.
| | 03:49 | We can have a beep every time we find a misspelled word.
| | 03:52 | You can Recheck All Text, so no matter where my flashing
cursor happens to be all of the text gets selected.
| | 03:58 | You can Check Words With Numbers, that's not selected.
| | 04:00 | Typically, when there are number involved you
don't want them to be included in the Spell Check.
| | 04:06 | For example, you might have an equation that combines characters
like letters and numbers together, should never be checked.
| | 04:12 | So if you do want to turn that on,
it just easy as clicking it here.
| | 04:16 | Checking for duplicate words we're
going to see that happen in a second.
| | 04:19 | Irregular Capitalization, sometimes you hold down the Shift key
a little to long and the first two characters gets capitalized.
| | 04:25 | Well the Spell Checker will check
that out, unless you turn it off.
| | 04:28 | Prompt Before Auto Replacement, yeah that's a good idea
otherwise the Auto Replacement feature we just talked about kicks
| | 04:36 | into gear automatically, you want that prompt.
| | 04:38 | Just in case you hear it by accident and you didn't
mean to otherwise you are adding to the list.
| | 04:43 | Show Phonetic Suggestions is another option that is turned
on, we might see some of the mess we go through our text now.
| | 04:50 | I'm just going to click out here though on the word Onion and
show you that down below checking Selected Text is the default
| | 04:56 | as well, but we could check just a Paragraph, a
Sentence or a single Word if we wanted to as well.
| | 05:02 | I'm going to leave it at Selected Text, which
is both my paragraph frames in this case.
| | 05:07 | Alright, so back to our word Onion, well we do want
to replace that so I'm going to click right up here.
| | 05:13 | Notice that because I went to my Check
options here, I need to start this over.
| | 05:17 | So I'm going to click the Start button, here we go
we're back in action Onions highlighted up there.
| | 05:22 | When I click Replace, it's replaced with the correct
spelling and automatically moves on to the next word.
| | 05:28 | In this case, you can see, Casperville is
highlighted and it's not in the dictionary.
| | 05:33 | Why would it be, it's a proper name?
| | 05:35 | So down below the replacement does not work, can't prevail.
| | 05:38 | In this case, I probably want to add it to the dictionary so that
every time I type in Casperville it's not going to stop there.
| | 05:45 | So clicking the Add button, adds Casperville to
the dictionary and it moves on to the next error,
| | 05:51 | which in this case happens to be you can see a double word.
| | 05:54 | The word and was typed in twice.
| | 05:56 | Sometimes you will see that happen with various words.
| | 05:59 | So the replacement is just the single occurrence of
the word and that's what I want when I click Replace.
| | 06:06 | Ingredients spelled incorrectly, the Replace with field is not
populated currently with the correct selection, this is plural.
| | 06:15 | So I need to select it from my list
in this case before clicking Replace.
| | 06:20 | Plenty of free parking, one extra e in there, perfect.
| | 06:24 | I'm going to close this up though
and just show you another option.
| | 06:27 | I'm going to click the Close button down here like I'm done,
| | 06:29 | and you will notice that free is still
highlighted with that red squiggly underline.
| | 06:35 | When you right-click, in other words hit the mouse button on
the right-hand side of your mouse while over the word free,
| | 06:42 | in this case with the red squiggly line,
you will see some replacement options.
| | 06:47 | There is the word free right down there, I could also
access the Spell Checker from here as well as thesaurus.
| | 06:53 | But this is the word I want free.
| | 06:54 | So when I click on it, it's replaced and there are
no further typos or spelling errors in this case.
| | 07:01 | So that's the Spell Checker, it works much like
any other word processor you may have used,
| | 07:05 | not a whole lot different there very, very
similar to what you see in WordPerfect.
| | 07:10 | Now, we're going to talk about QuickCorrect.
| | 07:13 | When I click back up here in my top frame those Casperville
is still showing up here with a red squiggly underline.
| | 07:20 | Well, QuickCorrect is a little bit
different than the Spell Check in dictionary.
| | 07:23 | QuickCorrect is automatically going to fix things on the fly
and it is all according to a list that's been complied for you
| | 07:30 | in a list that you can add to which is really cool.
| | 07:33 | So what I would really like to do in
this case is start a brand new file.
| | 07:37 | I'm going to click the New button up here,
Ctrl+N on your keyboard will also work,
| | 07:42 | and I'm going to click on my Text tool
and some paragraph text right in here.
| | 07:48 | Good. Now, F4 on your keyboard zooms into that area.
| | 07:51 | I'm going to change my font to something larger
so it is easier for you to see 18 points.
| | 07:56 | Now, I'm going to start typing some
words, I want you to watch what happens.
| | 08:00 | I'm not going to use a capital letter at this
time even on starting a brand new sentence.
| | 08:04 | I'm just going to type in a lower case this and
hit the Spacebar and you can see what happens.
| | 08:10 | It capitalize the word This, because
it's the first word in the sentence.
| | 08:15 | So that's one feature of QuickCorrect.
| | 08:17 | This is the word receive.
| | 08:21 | Now, the i before e except after c works with the word receive.
| | 08:25 | But let's ignore it for now ieve as soon as I hit the
Spacebar to move on, you can see how that was fixed for me.
| | 08:33 | I'm going to Backspace and hit the period (.), leave
two spaces and I'm going to type in double quotes.
| | 08:40 | So holding down the Shift key, doubles quotes
typically would be straight up and down,
| | 08:44 | but you can see how those are curved down under.
| | 08:47 | Hello there, period (.)
| | 08:50 | and a double quote (") at the end, and you
can see how those are curved up and in.
| | 08:54 | So these are called smart quotes and they are in
there automatically for just part of QuickCorrect.
| | 08:59 | All options you can modify if you so choose.
| | 09:03 | So leave a space and type in, we're
-- I'm going to say halfway there
| | 09:08 | by typing 1/2 leave a space, look at
that it gives me the symbol for 1/2.
| | 09:15 | There we go, and a period (.)
| | 09:17 | So let's check out this QuickCorrect.
| | 09:20 | When we go up to Text, down to Writing
tools and then over to QuickCorrect,
| | 09:26 | we'll see the list as well as some
options that are turned on or off.
| | 09:31 | First of all, Capitalize first letter of sentences.
| | 09:33 | We saw that in action.
| | 09:35 | Now, how does CorelDRAW X4 know what
is the beginning of the sentence?
| | 09:39 | Well, if it's the first word you type
or if it's the first after a period (.)
| | 09:44 | that you type.
| | 09:45 | Now, the problem with that is if you use abbreviations, sometimes
CorelDRAW gets mixed up and thinks that's the end of a sentence,
| | 09:52 | when it really isn't and you have to go back and fix.
| | 09:54 | So this is when I typically like to turn off.
| | 09:57 | If yours is off already perfect, if
not you might want to turn it off.
| | 10:00 | If you like that feature, leave it on by all means.
| | 10:04 | Correct two initial, consecutive capitals is turned on.
| | 10:08 | So let's just click OK down here and try that.
| | 10:10 | I'm going to hit Enter again, and l am going to type in my name
David, leave a space and you can see how that second letter,
| | 10:19 | the letter a was changed to lower case
automatically, thanks to QuickCorrect.
| | 10:24 | Back I go up to Text, Writing tools and QuickCorrect.
| | 10:29 | Let's look at some of the other options.
| | 10:31 | Capitalize names of days, so if you type in
Monday through Sunday they will be capitalized,
| | 10:36 | even if you didn't use a capital at the beginning.
| | 10:39 | Automatically Hyperlink is also turned on.
| | 10:41 | Let's click OK to check that one out.
| | 10:45 | Works for, let's type in www.lynda.com leave
a space, there is our Hyperlink right there,
| | 10:55 | you can see how the formatting changed automatically.
| | 10:58 | Back we go to Text, down to our Writing
tools and over to our QuickCorrect.
| | 11:05 | Now, down below you can see the language
that I'm using English US,
| | 11:09 | Change straight quotes to those typographic
or smart quotes, I talked to you about.
| | 11:13 | But sown below is really what's important and that's the
list down here where it says, Replace text while typing.
| | 11:19 | Remember the 1/2, as I scroll down this list, you will
actually see that 1/2 is replaced with the symbol for 1/2.
| | 11:29 | Look at the other ones a small (r) in round
brackets gives me the registered trademark symbol.
| | 11:35 | If I scroll up, look at that a small (c) inside
round brackets gives me the copyright symbol.
| | 11:41 | So this is the list you get, and if I go down to receive.
| | 11:45 | Let's go down to the r's recieve is a typical mistake
there it is and you can see it is replaced with receive.
| | 11:56 | Now, the neat thing is, is that you can add your own as well.
| | 12:00 | Notice the replace and the With field.
| | 12:03 | Let's say for example Green Onion Bistro.
| | 12:05 | we're tired of typing it all the time,
we could put in a replacement here.
| | 12:10 | I going to type in gob in lower case, I
would never use that word just like that.
| | 12:15 | So this will be replaced with Green
Onion Bistro, if I add to my list.
| | 12:23 | This is the list where auto replace adds things to as well.
| | 12:26 | So when I click the Add button, it's
now added alphabetically to the g's.
| | 12:30 | I'm going to click OK to test this out and type in as well
| | 12:36 | as gob space Green Onion Bistro, there
we go, and Casperville, beautiful.
| | 12:50 | So that covers Spell Checking and QuickCorrect.
| | 12:53 | A couple of Writing tools that will really make sure
that the text you type here in CorelDRAW X4 is accurate.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
6. Working with Color Outlines and FillsUsing color palettes| 00:00 | This next chapter is going to be entirely
dedicated to working with Color in CorelDRAW X4.
| | 00:06 | Now believe me when I say we could dedicate an entire title
to working with Color that is how powerful CorelDRAW is.
| | 00:15 | But the idea behind this chapter is to get you feel comfortable
things like Color palettes and some of the tools that we're going
| | 00:21 | to be use for filling objects and their outlines.
| | 00:24 | we'll look at the Eyedropper tool and the Paintbucket tool
as well as something called the Smart Fill tool later on.
| | 00:30 | Right now, though, in this lesson, let's build
our foundation by covering Color palettes.
| | 00:36 | Now Color palettes allow you to access millions and
millions of different colors and color combinations.
| | 00:43 | So far, we have been using the default color palette that
appears over here on the right-hand side of our screen.
| | 00:49 | This is our default CMYK Color palette.
| | 00:53 | If you do not know this already, CMYK
stands for Cyan, Magenta, Yellow and Black.
| | 00:59 | In this color model, those four colors are
combined to give you the different shades
| | 01:04 | and the different color combinations you are
used to seeing when working with objects.
| | 01:09 | Now this Color palette also is by
default docked on the right-hand side
| | 01:13 | of our screen here and we're not seeing all of the colors.
| | 01:16 | These little valves are color swatches are the
first bunch of colors that appear in this palette
| | 01:23 | and down at the bottom is a little arrow button here with a
line in front of it, clicking this will expand the palette
| | 01:29 | to show me all of the color swatches in the palette.
| | 01:32 | So I can select from any of these colors if I wanted to.
| | 01:35 | I'm going to click outside of this to collapse it back.
| | 01:38 | Now you will notice it is kind of like a
scroll bar, there are buttons at the bottom
| | 01:42 | and at the top for scrolling through the colors as well.
| | 01:45 | So if I click the Down arrow here, I'm actually going
to scroll through the different colors in this palette.
| | 01:50 | I will go back to the top clicking the Up arrow.
| | 01:52 | Now that is just one of many, many palettes you can choose from.
| | 01:58 | At the very top of a palette, when you see this little
swatch with the X through it that represents no color at all.
| | 02:05 | In other words, no fill.
| | 02:07 | When it comes to the next lesson when we start
filling up our objects, you will see what I mean.
| | 02:12 | Now let's go up to the Window menu here
for a second because I want to show you
| | 02:16 | that under Color palettes, there is lots to choose from.
| | 02:19 | We could have no Color palettes first of all.
| | 02:22 | Right now we do have a check mark next to our default CMYK
palette and that is the one we see on the right-hand side,
| | 02:27 | but we can have multiple color palettes at
our disposal here just by selecting them.
| | 02:32 | If I wanted to go to my Uniform Colors, I can click
on it here and I have got a second palette open up now
| | 02:38 | and it has many colors and color swatches as well.
| | 02:42 | Clicking the expansion button down at the
bottom allows me to scroll through lots
| | 02:46 | and lots of colors, it has more swatches than the default.
| | 02:49 | Clicking out here will collapse that.
| | 02:51 | Now Color palettes, kind of like
dockers, can be floating palettes.
| | 02:56 | In other words, I can go up to the top because I see those
three dots at the top of both of these color palettes.
| | 03:01 | When I see my four-sided arrow, I can
click and drag to float that color palette.
| | 03:06 | These are my uniform colors, I could dock
at between my dockers and my actual file.
| | 03:12 | When I get in there, you can see how it is docked.
| | 03:15 | Still holding my mouse button down, I
can bring it right in to my drawing area
| | 03:19 | if I wanted to, to have easy access to all of these colors.
| | 03:23 | When I don't want an actual color palette anymore, I could
go back to the Window menu and de-select it or just close it
| | 03:29 | by clicking the Close button in the top-right corner.
| | 03:32 | Let's go back up to Window now and down to
Color palettes because over on the right,
| | 03:36 | you will notice a number of PANTONE Color palettes.
| | 03:39 | A lot of the prepress or print shops that are out
there around the world basically use these color sets.
| | 03:45 | So if you are using any of these palettes as you're creating work
in CorelDRAW, you can feel confident that when you send this off
| | 03:52 | to be professionally printed, they are going to have the same
colors and it is going to turn out the way you would expect it.
| | 03:58 | We can also open up palettes using the Open palette button.
| | 04:01 | Now if you are going to talk about creating
your palettes, here is where you got open them.
| | 04:05 | The Color palette Browser will also allow us to
search for palettes and from a one-stop shop,
| | 04:11 | turn on and off all of the palettes that we want.
| | 04:14 | So let's give this a click, Color palette Browser.
| | 04:17 | It opens up a docker here known as my Color palette
Browser, I have got Fixed palettes, Custom palettes.
| | 04:22 | Any I create will fall under User's palettes.
| | 04:25 | There is my Default CMYK and I can also have the
Default RGB palette here by clicking this check box.
| | 04:31 | Now I have got both.
| | 04:32 | RGB standing for Red, Green and Blue.
| | 04:35 | Combine those to get all of the different color combinations.
| | 04:38 | I'm going to turn that one off but I going to go up to my Fixed
palettes and here are some of the palettes that we saw right
| | 04:45 | from the Window menu under Color
palettes, some of them are PANTONES.
| | 04:49 | If I wanted my Web-safe Colors, I would go over
here and click in this check box to turn that on.
| | 04:54 | These are all the colors I would use while creating
objects that will be displayed over the web,
| | 04:58 | so I know that I'm using colors that people would be able to see.
| | 05:01 | I can turn on TRUMATCH Colors.
| | 05:03 | You can see now I have got my three palettes open.
| | 05:06 | You can turn them all on from here just by clicking check
box is then of course turn them off from here as well.
| | 05:11 | So I'm going to turn all of those off, go back to the top
and minimize my Fixed palettes, we also have Custom palettes.
| | 05:18 | This, I love.
| | 05:19 | Check it out under CMYK, for example.
| | 05:21 | If I'm going to be working on a project that deals with
nature, well I could click on the plus sign next to Nature
| | 05:27 | and I have got all kinds of color palettes
that would deal with different parts of nature.
| | 05:31 | For example, Rainbow, if I click on that there is the colors
of the rainbow and all the different shades in between.
| | 05:37 | If I go to Jungle, I bet you I'm going
to see some greens in here sure enough.
| | 05:41 | Earth tones, look at them all and of
course, I can de-select them all from here
| | 05:46 | by de-selecting their check boxes and minimizing that folder.
| | 05:51 | I'm going to minimize Custom palettes
and go down to User's palettes.
| | 05:56 | When I click the plus sign, there is really only one in there
and my Custom Spot Colors, you are going to see that too.
| | 06:01 | When we create our own color palette, it is
going to show up here under User palettes.
| | 06:05 | So let's leave this open and let's create our own.
| | 06:08 | We can go up to the Window menu, down to Color palettes, we have
already got our file open from the Lesson6 folder, Color_menu1.
| | 06:15 | Go over here and down near the bottom,
notice Create palette From Document.
| | 06:20 | This is cool, sounds complicated but it is really easy.
| | 06:23 | We give it a click, give it a name,
I'm going to type in GreenOnion just
| | 06:28 | like that and when I click the Save button, it's done.
| | 06:32 | All that's happened is CorelDRAW has analyzed all of the colors
being used in this file and created a palette out of it over here
| | 06:39 | and opened it automatically from my Color palette Browser.
| | 06:43 | So these are the colors that I have
used in this particular file so far.
| | 06:47 | If I was to add a new page and maybe create the back
of a menu start adding objects I know that I'm going
| | 06:52 | to be using the same colors by using
this Color palette on those objects.
| | 06:57 | Now under User palettes, I see my GreenOnion and of course, I can
turn it off at any time, collapse that section and when I'm done
| | 07:04 | with the Color palette Browser, close it
by clicking the Close button right up here.
| | 07:09 | So those are some of the color palettes, some of the options.
| | 07:13 | Some of the other options you can access
from the Play button that appears at the top.
| | 07:17 | This little circle with the arrow in it, I call it the Play
button, when I click on it, I'm going to see a pop-up menu.
| | 07:23 | Here, I can set outline and fill color defaults.
| | 07:26 | By default, you will see in the next lesson, there is no fill
and there is a black outline when you are starting a new file.
| | 07:32 | Look at under palette; I could create new palettes
from here, brand new blank one and just add colors.
| | 07:37 | I can open my new one called GreenOnion
right from here, I can save a palette,
| | 07:42 | save it as something else and close palettes from here as well.
| | 07:46 | Under Edit, I can access my palette
Editor, I can also find colors.
| | 07:51 | And then down below, the default can be set from here
as well because I clicked on the Play button at the top
| | 07:56 | of my CMYK Color palette, I see the
check mark, it is the default.
| | 08:00 | I can show those color names, scroll to the start
or the end of my palette and even customize it.
| | 08:07 | When I go up to my Window menu now and go
down to Color palettes and I want to go
| | 08:14 | down to open a palette, where am I going to open from?
| | 08:19 | The palettes folder.
| | 08:20 | Down here, you can see I have got some other
folders like CMYK, there is those Nature and People
| | 08:26 | and Things, for example, so I can open them from here.
| | 08:29 | I'm going to click Cancel, go back up to
my Window menu down to Dockers this time
| | 08:34 | and let's access our Color palette Browser from Dockers.
| | 08:38 | I'm going to go into User palettes,
I'm going to click on my GreenOnion,
| | 08:42 | click the Play button above my own palette
here called GreenOnion and come down
| | 08:47 | and I can start doing things like
editing using the palette Editor.
| | 08:51 | I like this, it shows me all of the colors in here.
| | 08:54 | There is a color I wanted to change like this dark green,
I could go in there and click on the Edit Color button.
| | 09:00 | This opens up my Select Color dialog box where I can choose from
different models; RGB, CMYK, you can see the Old and the New,
| | 09:10 | so if want to choose a different
color that's what It would become .
| | 09:12 | I could use Mixers to mix up colors, go
to my palettes as well if I wanted to.
| | 09:17 | There is the Jungle palette, choose something similar.
| | 09:21 | That might be the one when I click OK, I would edited that color.
| | 09:24 | I do not really want to do that so I'm going to click Cancel.
| | 09:27 | I could also add colors to this palette
if I wanted to clicking the Add button.
| | 09:32 | Maybe I want another shade of green in
there, I select it here, click Close .
| | 09:37 | Now I have got a new shade of green in there to work with.
| | 09:40 | I can delete colors I do not want and even sort colors.
| | 09:44 | Clicking Sort Colors allows me to put them in
reverse or sort them by brightness let's say.
| | 09:49 | So in this case, it goes from the darker
ones all the way up to the brighter ones.
| | 09:53 | I could come down and sort by the name if I
wanted to and I can also reset the palette.
| | 09:59 | This will discard all of the changes that
I have made to the palette to this point.
| | 10:02 | I have to confirm by clicking Yes, removes that one I
added, click OK and there is my palette on the right.
| | 10:09 | I'm going to close up the Color palette Browser
and I'm also going to close up My palette.
| | 10:14 | So I'm going to go up to the top here, just float it
out here and click the Close button right from there.
| | 10:20 | So those are your Color palettes.
| | 10:22 | In the next lesson, we're going to use Color palettes to start
filling up objects with colors, patterns, and even textures.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Filling objects with color| 00:00 | In this lesson, we're going to take what we learned in the
previous lesson and apply it to filling our objects with colors
| | 00:07 | and images, textures and all kinds of cool things.
| | 00:11 | You can see I have opened up a file to
work with, it is called ColorFills1.cdr.
| | 00:15 | If you got the exercise files, go to the Lesson6
folder and open this one up, you will have what I have.
| | 00:21 | Before we start looking at the different methods for filling
up our objects and so on, let's talk about the default.
| | 00:28 | If we go over to our Toolbox here, click
on the Rectangle tool, for example,
| | 00:33 | and I draw a rectangle over here to the left side of my page.
| | 00:36 | I click and drag across and down and look what I get.
| | 00:39 | It looks like a rectangle with a black border and a white fill.
| | 00:44 | In reality, it is a black outline with no fill at all.
| | 00:49 | So if I was to go the center here and move this over my
other objects, you can see I can see right through it.
| | 00:55 | So I'm going to hit my Delete key.
| | 00:57 | That is the default.
| | 00:58 | If you do not like the default, here is how you change it.
| | 01:01 | I'm going to go back to my Pick tool,
I have nothing selected on my page.
| | 01:06 | So let's say I wanted my new default fill color to be blue.
| | 01:10 | Well I come over to my color palette here and I click on blue.
| | 01:13 | I get a little dialog box, you may
have seen this before, Uniform Fill.
| | 01:18 | The message is saying, you do not have anything
selected, what do you want to apply blue to?
| | 01:24 | Is it Graphics, is it Artistic Text,
is it Paragraph Text as well?
| | 01:30 | Any or all of these could be selected.
| | 01:33 | With Graphic selected, if I click OK and now go to draw a
rectangle, click on the Rectangle tool, click and drag across
| | 01:41 | and down, it's now filled with blue, easy as that to
choose your default, and hit my Delete key and I'm going
| | 01:48 | to choose No Fill, so I have got nothing selected.
| | 01:51 | So I will got to my Pick tool and right at the
top of every palette is this little box with an X
| | 01:56 | through it that represents No Fill or No Color.
| | 02:00 | So I'm going to click on that, I see
the same default when I click OK,
| | 02:03 | I have just set the default back so when
I draw objects I do not have a fill.
| | 02:08 | I would apply the fill after the effect
that is what we're going to do now.
| | 02:11 | We'll start with our circle.
| | 02:12 | So we click on the circle.
| | 02:13 | Easiest way to fill that up with the color is
go click on the color in your color palette.
| | 02:18 | So if you do not see the color you are looking for,
remember you can expand the color palette down at the bottom
| | 02:23 | by clicking the arrow pointing left with the line in front of it.
| | 02:26 | Find the color you are looking for, I'm going to
go for this color right here known as Neon Red.
| | 02:32 | When I click on it, the circle is now filled with the color red.
| | 02:36 | What I haven't done is change the outline color.
| | 02:39 | Now the outline is currently set to 0.5 points,
you notice that up here on the Property Bar.
| | 02:45 | If I make this thicker like 4 points, for
example, you can see the black really shows up.
| | 02:51 | Let's double it now to 8 points.
| | 02:53 | To change an outline color, we'll
talk about that in the next lesson.
| | 02:57 | Let's go to our square, let's fill this
one up but using a different method.
| | 03:02 | Another method is to drag a color.
| | 03:05 | If I go over to my pallet here and expand it
and I want to fill this up with blue, Sky Blue.
| | 03:12 | Well we know we can click on it but I could also drag
this color by clicking and holding my mouse button down
| | 03:18 | and when I get inside, you will see
it looks a little bit different.
| | 03:21 | Right now out here, I have got my blue swatch with
a little paper fold that's in the top-right corner.
| | 03:26 | When I move inside an object that disappears
so I can actually drop the color in there.
| | 03:30 | You do not want to be on the outline.
| | 03:32 | Notice when I touch the outline, I can change my
outline to Blue, we'll do that in the next lesson.
| | 03:38 | But when I'm inside my object, it is not hollow.
| | 03:41 | When I let it go, I have just filled it with blue.
| | 03:44 | So that is a couple of different ways
to fill up an object with a color.
| | 03:47 | Another way is to use our Paintbucket down
here in our Toolbox and you will notice
| | 03:51 | that that is our fill tool with a little flyout.
| | 03:54 | If I click and hold this down, you can see the options are a
Uniform Fill, Fountain Fill, Patterns, Textures, PostScript,
| | 04:02 | No Fill at all or have access to millions of color
combinations through the Color option at the bottom.
| | 04:09 | Let's start at the very top with our Uniform Fill.
| | 04:13 | When I choose Uniform Fill, the dialog box
opens up giving me Models like the CMYK or RGB,
| | 04:19 | Hue saturation brightness, lots of
different models to choose from.
| | 04:24 | I'm going to go to RGB.
| | 04:25 | Now I have got over here on the right-hand side my
different colors and then I can get into the different hues.
| | 04:31 | Click down here maybe a nice bright pink.
| | 04:33 | When I found that color, all I have to do is click OK .
| | 04:36 | If you are really good and technical with colors too
and you know the values, you can type them in here.
| | 04:41 | I'm going to change 230 to 220, when I hit
my Tab key, it is going to change the colors,
| | 04:46 | slightly move me around here in the color palette.
| | 04:49 | When I click OK, I have changed the
color of my fill using my Fill tool.
| | 04:55 | Let's go over to the Fill tool again, click the
dropdown and go to Fountain Fill this time.
| | 05:00 | When I choose Fountain Fill, now I
have got some different types of fills.
| | 05:03 | Linear being the default.
| | 05:05 | By default, Linear is going to use the existing color
and white and it is going to display a preview over here
| | 05:10 | as it goes from that original pink color to white.
| | 05:14 | But I can change all of these options
such as Linear can be Radial.
| | 05:18 | Now it is coming from the center out,
white all the way out to my pink.
| | 05:22 | I could go to a Conical fill which
gives me this three dimensional look.
| | 05:27 | The last one is our Square, since we're working with a
square, let's use that one, but we'll change our colors.
| | 05:34 | Let's change it from pink to a nice dark blue over here -- sky
blue and instead of white, we'll go to yellow and we'll click OK.
| | 05:45 | Very cool.
| | 05:46 | That is a different effect, isn't it.
| | 05:48 | Let's go to our triangle now.
| | 05:50 | Another option is to choose a pattern.
| | 05:53 | When I click on Pattern Fill, I'm
going to see another dialog box.
| | 05:56 | I'm going to move this over, there is
2-color, Full color and Bitmap options here.
| | 06:02 | With 2-colors selected, I click the arrow
on the side to choose a pattern like Bricks,
| | 06:07 | for example, and then I choose my front and back colors.
| | 06:10 | For the Front, I'm going to go to a light gray.
| | 06:13 | For the Back, I'm going to go to a nice dark red.
| | 06:18 | As I scroll through my palette, there
is a nice dark red right there.
| | 06:22 | You can see the result in the preview,
all I have to do is click OK to apply it.
| | 06:27 | You can see the size of the bricks and it fills in nicely.
| | 06:30 | Let's go back there for a second, so click our dropdown go
back to Pattern Fill because there are some other options.
| | 06:36 | First of all, not just the colors but if we want it to down
below, you can see the Row or Column offsets can be adjusted.
| | 06:44 | I can also adjust skew and rotate those bricks if I wanted to.
| | 06:47 | I'm going to rotate it a little bit up to 10 degrees.
| | 06:51 | The width and the height, I'm going to
change it from 2, not a much smaller.
| | 06:56 | Actually, I'm going to click and drag and type 1 and 1.
| | 07:00 | And when I click OK, watch what happens.
| | 07:02 | There is a tilt and you can see the bricks
are much smaller, full control over the fill.
| | 07:07 | Let's try another option.
| | 07:09 | we'll go back to our Pattern Fill, but
this time let's go up to Full Color.
| | 07:14 | Here from this dropdown, you will see
lots of options here using Full Colors,
| | 07:18 | some of them are very fun some of
them are very professional in nature.
| | 07:22 | I'm going to go up to this one here right in the center.
| | 07:27 | You can see that I have full access to width and
height, the size, the x and y origin, skewing, rotating.
| | 07:34 | I'm going to change the Rotate back to 0,
so it's straight up and down and click OK
| | 07:38 | and that is a totally different pattern using some color.
| | 07:42 | One more time.
| | 07:44 | We also have Bitmaps to choose from and these
are like little images that will be repeated.
| | 07:49 | I'm going to go over to this one here, it looks like bubbles.
| | 07:52 | Let's change our size to go even smaller here.
| | 07:55 | I'm going to go to 0.5 by 0.5 and you can
see what that looks like in this preview,
| | 08:02 | I click OK and you can see all the little
bubbles repeated throughout my triangle.
| | 08:07 | Choose my Zoom tool, click and drag and let's do some more.
| | 08:13 | Back to my Pick tool, make sure the triangle is selected and
I will go to my Fill tool and let's try some textures now.
| | 08:19 | This is really neat.
| | 08:21 | There are lot of styles in the Texture library.
| | 08:24 | You can see Styles at the bottom
Samples, lots of different sample groups.
| | 08:29 | If I go to Sample 6, for example, I'm going
to see a list of texture fills that apply
| | 08:35 | to my Sample 6 library, Cotton candy,
for example, Electric Fence.
| | 08:40 | Some of them are really cool looking;
Hall of flame that is kind of neat.
| | 08:45 | You can see the first and second colors
being used, they can be adjusted,
| | 08:48 | you can also adjust the texture number,
the density, the brightness.
| | 08:52 | When we click OK, it is applied to our triangle.
| | 08:55 | Let's go back to our fill, back down to
Texture Fill and let's just try one more.
| | 09:01 | I'm going to go down to Samples 9 and
I'm going to scroll down to Alien Eyes.
| | 09:06 | Now that is a preview of the default but watch
what happens when I click the Preview button.
| | 09:12 | There are numerous, endless combinations and each
time I click Preview, I get a different combination.
| | 09:18 | When I see something I like, I can click OK.
| | 09:21 | I could also come in here and work
with these values if I wanted to.
| | 09:25 | Locking or unlocking any of the values and adjusting the others
including the colors being used and when I've got what I want,
| | 09:31 | I click OK to apply it to my selected object.
| | 09:35 | Alright let's go down to Postscript
Fill using Postscript language now.
| | 09:39 | If I went down to Bricks, for example, click Refresh,
I'm going to preview my fill to see what that looks like.
| | 09:46 | You can see tiny little bricks, clicking
Refresh will always update.
| | 09:50 | Let's go to Carpet, ColorBubbles.
| | 09:54 | There is a long list of Postscript textures down here.
| | 09:57 | I'm going to go to StainedGlass and click OK.
| | 10:01 | That is now applied to my object.
| | 10:03 | I think you are seeing how the possibilities are really endless
when it comes to filling objects and not just with color.
| | 10:10 | The last option is Color, we're going to skip
over None, this sets us back to No Fill at all.
| | 10:16 | But when we skip over that to Color, watch this.
| | 10:20 | The color docker now appears over here, you can see we
have got different models to choose from again; CMYK, RGB.
| | 10:25 | Let's say this document was going to be posted on the web,
| | 10:29 | we might want to choose Web Safe
Colors using some of the RGB colors.
| | 10:33 | We have got sliders to select the color
we're looking for and any combination
| | 10:37 | of these colors gives us our final
color up here, we see a preview of it.
| | 10:42 | You could also type in values if you know them
exactly and of course, hitting Tab will move you
| | 10:50 | around to the different values and
show you a preview using the sliders.
| | 10:55 | I'm going to go a little bit redder and finally when
you got what you are looking for, click the Fill button
| | 11:00 | and it fills up your object with the selected color.
| | 11:04 | A Shift+F4 takes you back out, I'm going to de-select
anything that is selected to see the end result.
| | 11:09 | So we have really focused in on the
objects and filing them up on the inside.
| | 11:14 | Well that border that goes around the outside also known as
the outline, we need to talk about changing the outline colors
| | 11:21 | and even the textures and some of
the patterns that we have looked at,
| | 11:25 | but this time working with outlines,
we'll do that in the next lesson.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Coloring object outlines| 00:00 | In this lesson, we're going to continue to work with color,
but now we're going to focus in on an object's outline.
| | 00:05 | So the outline is part of the object, it
is the border going around the outside.
| | 00:10 | we're going to continue to use the same file from the
previous lesson, so if you have skipped to this lesson
| | 00:14 | and you do have the exercise files, you can get all
cut up by going to the Lesson6 folder and opening
| | 00:19 | up ColorFills2.cdr, you will have exactly what I have.
| | 00:23 | we're going to focus in on this circle
as well as the text up above.
| | 00:27 | Let's start with our circle.
| | 00:28 | I'm going to go to my Zoom tool, you can press
F2 if you like on the keyboard and just click
| | 00:33 | and drag around the actual circle to zoom into it.
| | 00:36 | Now I'm going to go back to my Pick tool and I'm
going to click on the circle itself to select it.
| | 00:41 | Now we know from the previous lesson, if I go over to my color
palette and simply click on a color, I will be changing the fill.
| | 00:48 | Well the border or the outline that we see going
around the outside of the object is part of the object.
| | 00:54 | So if I wanted to change its color, I
would do a couple of different things.
| | 00:58 | First of all, I can go over to a color and
drag it to the outline if I wanted to do that.
| | 01:03 | Let's try that.
| | 01:04 | we'll go over to the Cyan here and let's
just click and drag it over to the outline.
| | 01:08 | When we touch the outline, you can see how the swatch
changes next to my mouse pointer from solid to hollow.
| | 01:14 | That means I'm on the outline and I can let it
go that will change the outline color, beautiful.
| | 01:20 | An even easier way to do exactly what we just did
right now is to right click on the color swatch.
| | 01:27 | So let's try a different color this time,
let's go to the dark blue and right click
| | 01:31 | with the right mouse button and you
can see how fast and easy that was.
| | 01:34 | Now if I wanted to start doing things like changing my
outline to a texture or a radiant or some kind of other fill,
| | 01:43 | well I can't really do that without converting it to an
object first, something we talked about in a previous lesson.
| | 01:50 | If I go up to my Arrange menu and come down to Convert Outline To
Object, now I have got a separate object that has its own fill.
| | 01:59 | That means I could apply a Texture Fill, let's try that out.
| | 02:02 | It is still selected, so I'm going to go down to my
Fill tool and just go to a Texture Fill right here.
| | 02:09 | Now you can see the last texture we used
from the previous lesson are Alien Eyes.
| | 02:13 | I'm going to click my Preview button a couple
of times until I get a nice looking preview.
| | 02:18 | That is a good one right there and
when I click OK, watch what happens.
| | 02:22 | I have now filled my outline with that texture.
| | 02:25 | That's only because I had to convert it to an object first.
| | 02:29 | Shift+F4 is going to zoom me out, I'm going to back up to my Pick
tool to make sure it's selected and click on my text at the top.
| | 02:37 | Now Artistic Text is kind of like an object.
| | 02:39 | Each of the characters that I typed here has its own outline.
| | 02:43 | So let's zoom in for that area with our Zoom tool.
| | 02:45 | And I'm going to go back to my Pick tool, make sure
it is selected and I'm going to fill it with yellow.
| | 02:52 | I'm going to fill it with yellow by clicking on
yellow and the outside, which is also an outline just
| | 02:57 | like with an object, can be changed by right clicking a color.
| | 03:01 | If I right click on black, you can see it is a black
outline; if I right click on blue, it's kind of hard to seek
| | 03:08 | as it is a thin outline but it has changed to that cyan color.
| | 03:12 | Now there is an another option for manipulating outlines.
| | 03:16 | You will notice down on the Status Bar couple of things
show up here telling me that my Fill Color is yellow
| | 03:21 | and my Hairline, which is the outline, is this sky blue.
| | 03:26 | So I'm going to double click on the actual swatch down here
which opens up my Outline Pen dialog box, this is cool.
| | 03:33 | Here I can change the color if wanted to, to
just something else but I'm going to leave it
| | 03:37 | at sky blue and I'm going to change the width instead.
| | 03:40 | Let's go up to 2 points and see what happens.
| | 03:43 | Well not much down below, so let's double it to 4 points and when
I click OK that is much thicker, much easier to see the color
| | 03:52 | that is being used in the outline and just another option for
changing outline effects such as the color and the thickness.
| | 04:01 | I'm going to back down there and double click that
again and I'm going to change my width down to 3 points.
| | 04:06 | It is a little too thick.
| | 04:07 | I have also got some other options for corners and so on, but I'm
going to click OK to accept that not looks a little bit better.
| | 04:13 | I will de-select, Shift+F4 to zoom out
and that covers outlines and fills.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Eyedropper and Paint Bucket tools| 00:00 | So far in this chapter as we have been working with color
and applying fills and outline colors to various objects,
| | 00:06 | we have been using the Color palette over
here on the right-hand side of the screen.
| | 00:10 | There is a couple of other ways to apply colors one is to select
a color sample it from one object and apply it to another,
| | 00:18 | but we can take that a step further here in CorelDRAW X4 and
even borrow object attributes and transformations and so on.
| | 00:24 | So that's what we're going to do in this lesson.
| | 00:27 | We are going to start here with this file called EyeDrop1.cdr.
| | 00:32 | So if you have got the exercise files and you want to follow
along check this one out in the Lesson6 folder, it is a two pager
| | 00:37 | and I'm on Page 1 here, where we see the Eyedropper
and Paintbucket tools are about to be introduced.
| | 00:44 | So here we have got two stars one the
plain yellow star with a black outline.
| | 00:49 | This one over here you can see has many
effects and attributes applied to it.
| | 00:53 | It's a little bit distorted, rotated, it has got
a special fill, a drop shadow in the background.
| | 00:58 | Lot's of things have been done to this
star, no wonder this guy wants to be a twin.
| | 01:02 | So we're going to use the Eyedropper tool first to
borrow a color from one object to apply to another.
| | 01:08 | So I want the exact color that I see down here applied to
this star, well then I might want to use my Eyedropper tool.
| | 01:15 | The Eyedropper tool is the fourth one down.
| | 01:17 | It's on this flyout.
| | 01:19 | You can see when I hold down this button I have got
two tools, the Eyedropper and the Paintbucket tool.
| | 01:25 | Both of these are used together, the Eyedropper to sample
the color or the properties, the Paintbucket to apply them.
| | 01:32 | So we start with our Eyedropper tool right here.
| | 01:36 | Now up at the top on the Property Bar, you can
see we have some options here from this dropdown.
| | 01:40 | Do we want to sample object attributes,
which would be outlines and fills,
| | 01:45 | if there is text in there that would
also be one of the attributes.
| | 01:49 | Any transformations like rotations and sizing,
lot of effects that you see and that other star
| | 01:54 | for example would be considered object attributes.
| | 01:57 | So we're going to start with the other option Sampling Color.
| | 02:00 | With that selected you can see you have
also got the ability to sample from a size,
| | 02:04 | Sample Size 1X1 pixel sample, a 2X2 or a larger sample.
| | 02:09 | So when we start sampling colors from a photograph if you want
to narrow it down to one specific pixel this is your choice.
| | 02:16 | If you want to select color from an area you can go as high
as 5X5 pixels and we'll leave that one by one and click OK
| | 02:23 | and I'm going to come down here and just
click in this blue box down at the bottom
| | 02:27 | where I see the Eyedropper and Paintbucket tools text.
| | 02:30 | I want to make sure I'm on the blue, when I
click I know I've selected the blue if it appears
| | 02:34 | down here next to this little Paintbucket, my Fill Color.
| | 02:38 | So with that selected now I switch tools, so I'm going to go
back to my Eyedropper click and hold select the Paintbucket.
| | 02:46 | Now with that color selected already all I have do
is to go inside my star and when I click there we go,
| | 02:52 | we have applied the selected or sampled color.
| | 02:55 | Now that still doesn't quite look like this
other star does it, that's just borrowing color.
| | 03:00 | Let's go back here to our Eyedropper tools, I'm going to click
and hold my Paintbucket and select the Eyedropper from the fly
| | 03:06 | out and we're going to change this
now to Sample Object Attributes .
| | 03:10 | Now you can see we have got Properties, Transformations
and Effects each of these has its own Dropdown.
| | 03:16 | If I go to Properties for example do I want to borrow
the Outline Fill and any text inside that object.
| | 03:22 | Well there is no text so I'm going to de-select
my text, I do want the outline and the fill.
| | 03:27 | Under Transformation, if we click this if it's a different
size we can apply the same size, the some rotation
| | 03:34 | and the same position even which would create
another duplicate right in this location.
| | 03:38 | So I do not want to select the position, I'm
going to keep them separate from each other.
| | 03:42 | So with those two selected I can go over to Effects now.
| | 03:46 | Look at all the effects that can be sampled or
borrowed from one object and applied to another.
| | 03:50 | Perspective, Envelops, Blends, Extrude,
Contours, Lenses, Powerclips.
| | 03:55 | These two at the bottom drop Shadow and
Distortion were applied to this object.
| | 04:00 | Now there is a whole chapter discussing these
interactive tools and applying affects so you will be able
| | 04:05 | to do exactly what I've done over here with this star,
but for now we're just going to borrow those attributes
| | 04:10 | by selecting their Check Boxes and clicking OK.
| | 04:13 | Now when we click on this object we'll be borrowing
all of those attributes that we just selected.
| | 04:19 | We go over to our Paintbucket, I'm going to
click and hold choose the Paintbucket tool,
| | 04:24 | come inside my star now and when I click watch what happens.
| | 04:28 | Beautiful, slight rotation a distortion
you can see the some color fill,
| | 04:34 | there is a drop shadow in behind
and they are almost perfect twins.
| | 04:38 | Now obviously if I wanted a perfect duplicate, I
could have just taken my object and duplicated it,
| | 04:43 | but it could be a different shaped object for
example you want to borrow all of the attributes
| | 04:47 | from one object and apply them to another just like we did.
| | 04:50 | Another option is to Borrow Color from somewhere else, I'm going
to go back to my Pick tool here and then I'm going to de-select
| | 04:57 | to see what that looks like, I'm pretty happy with that.
| | 04:59 | Let's go on to Page 2, if we click the Page 2 tab here you can
see the lynda.com logo, the trademark yellow across the bottom,
| | 05:07 | but there is a little callout here Lynda
says I'm not too keen on this shade of yellow
| | 05:11 | and that is because it's not the right shade of yellow.
| | 05:13 | It's yellow alright, but it's not the shade of yellow
that we're accustomed to seeing with lynda.com logo.
| | 05:20 | So where can we find the actual color
used with the lynda.com logo?
| | 05:25 | How about the lynda.com website.
| | 05:27 | Well it just so happens I have got my browser open, I'm
going to go down to my Taskbar here and click on that
| | 05:32 | to show you that's the yellow we're
after totally different shade.
| | 05:36 | So the first thing I might want to do is just
go up here and restore this down to a size
| | 05:42 | where I can see both my CorelDRAW page and my web page.
| | 05:46 | I'm going to do same with CorelDRAW, so just between the
Minimize and the Close button I'm going to click Restore Down.
| | 05:54 | Now you can see I have got this two side by side,
I'm going to size this down even further over here
| | 05:59 | and I do not need such a wide docker for my hints.
| | 06:02 | OK, so I can see them both now, all I need to do is
go back to my Eyedropper tool select the Eyedropper
| | 06:10 | and if you cannot see it just drag
your bottom border down a little bit.
| | 06:13 | So you can see all of your tools in the Toolbox
and with my Eyedropper tool selected I have
| | 06:19 | to make sure I'm selecting color, but from somewhere else.
| | 06:22 | So I'm going to change my Object Attributes
back to Sample Color and from where?
| | 06:27 | From the desktop.
| | 06:28 | So when I choose select from desktop, now I can go over here.
| | 06:32 | Notice I still have in another application my Eyedropper tool.
| | 06:36 | So I'm going to click on this yellow it's now selected down
here I can see it right next to my Fill Color and when I go back
| | 06:44 | to my Eyedropper click and hold select the Paintbucket and go
inside this rectangle and click I now have the right yellow.
| | 06:53 | Click the close button here.
| | 06:55 | I'm going to maximize CorelDRAW clicking the Maximize button
and now I know I have got the exact right shade of yellow.
| | 07:02 | It has to be, it came from the official lynda.com website.
| | 07:06 | Let me go back to my Pick tool make sure
nothing is selected just see the end result.
| | 07:12 | That concludes our lesson here on using the Eyedropper tool in
conjunction with the Paintbucket tool to borrow not just Color,
| | 07:19 | but Attributes as well and not only from within your
CorelDRAW file, but you can also borrow colors from elsewhere.
| | 07:27 | Have fun using the Eyedropper and Paintbucket tools.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the SmartFill tool| 00:00 | If you are following along with me in the previous lesson,
you learned how to use the Eyedropper and Paintbucket tools
| | 00:05 | to Borrow Colors or even Object Attributes
from one object and apply them to another.
| | 00:11 | What happens though if you want to fill up
something with color and it is not an object.
| | 00:16 | Well in that case you might like
to know about the Smart Fill tool.
| | 00:20 | That's what we're going to talk about in this lesson, using
the same file we were working on in the previous lesson,
| | 00:25 | so if you have skipped to this lesson and you'd like to get
caught up, go to the Lesson6 folder of your exercise files.
| | 00:31 | If you have got them, then open up by EyeDrop2.cdr,
go to Page 2 and you will see, what I see here.
| | 00:38 | So we know that we can fill up an object quite easily, let's
click on the balloon, we'll go over to the Color palette,
| | 00:43 | click on the light gray and it's filled, just
like that, we'll de-select to see the end result.
| | 00:49 | Now what if we wanted to fill up something that's not
necessarily an object, such as if I go over to the lynda.com logo
| | 00:56 | and I want to fill up these yellow spaces here with
something like white, so it doesn't show through
| | 01:01 | or maybe I want to add a little color to Lynda's face.
| | 01:05 | Well in that case, we're going to use our Smart Fill tool.
| | 01:07 | First, let's zoom into that area and I click my Zoom tool
and I'm going to zoom in to this logo area right there
| | 01:15 | and now I'm going to go over to my Smart Fill tool.
| | 01:18 | Now the Smart Fill tool is right here just
below our FreeHand tool and when we click on it,
| | 01:24 | the Property Bar changes to give us fill and outline options,
| | 01:28 | here is where we get to choose the colors we're
going to use for both the fill and the outline.
| | 01:33 | Neat thing is though it doesn't have to be an object.
| | 01:37 | Let's say we want to get rid of this yellow.
| | 01:39 | Well we know that little sliver of
yellow in there is not a natural object.
| | 01:44 | But with the Smart Fill tool it is treated
like one, so let's say we want to fill
| | 01:48 | that up with white and have no outline, whatsoever.
| | 01:52 | In that case, we go up to our Fill
options and when we click the Dropdown,
| | 01:55 | we can use the defaults so whatever our default
fill color is for this particular project,
| | 02:00 | it would be applied, happens to be no fill at all.
| | 02:03 | Same as our last choice down here,
but if we want to specify a color,
| | 02:07 | we have to make sure Specify is selected then click the
color Dropdown and here's where we get to choose the color.
| | 02:13 | In this case, white right at the very top.
| | 02:16 | So I'm going to click on the white swatch.
| | 02:18 | The outline I'm going to specify as well, I could
use the Default Outline which is a Hairline Black,
| | 02:24 | I could choose No Outline whatsoever or Specify a color.
| | 02:28 | I'm going to choose No Outline, so you can see now I do
not have any Dropdowns here for the Width or the Color.
| | 02:35 | So now all I have to do is still
with my Smart Fill tool selected,
| | 02:38 | is just click in the area that I want to apply that fill.
| | 02:42 | So this little area here that's yellow is actually enclosed by
its color, so when I click on it you can see it turns white.
| | 02:49 | Look inside the book here, I'm going to click there as
well, in here between the book and Lynda's shoulders
| | 02:56 | and there is a little bit yellow back here as well, I'm going
to click there to remove that and actually what's happening is,
| | 03:01 | that little area is being filled with our
specified white No Outline properties.
| | 03:07 | Alright let us try filling in Lynda's face and neck with a
different color perhaps, just to add a little color to this logo.
| | 03:15 | Well in that case we have our Smart Fill tool
selected, again we want to specify a color.
| | 03:21 | Let's go to a Flesh Tone Color here, as I scroll
down, I don't really see anything that's ideal.
| | 03:26 | So I can click Other here to access the Select Color dialog
box where I've got Models, Mixers and palettes to choose from.
| | 03:34 | I'm going to go over to Mixers here, you
can see I've got my CMYK Model selected.
| | 03:40 | I'm going to go over to one of these Light Flesh Tone colors,
| | 03:42 | I get to see a sample of it up here,
perfect and I'm going to click OK.
| | 03:47 | I don't want any outline again, I just
want to fill in some of these areas.
| | 03:51 | So I'm going to click on Lynda's forehead
you can see what happens, fills in that area.
| | 03:56 | Let's go over here to the ear and click on that,
leave the earing white and there is a couple
| | 04:02 | of other areas here that were used to create shadow effects.
| | 04:07 | Down here on the neck area we got one more click to go
| | 04:10 | and you can see we had given her a little
bit of a complexion, looks very nice.
| | 04:15 | Let's change the color of her collar now.
| | 04:17 | I'm going to specify something different
like a nice dark blue, right there.
| | 04:22 | Click in the collar area, again these
are not necessarily Objects,
| | 04:26 | they are just closed in areas I'm using a Smart Fill
tool, we're easily able to fill those in just like that.
| | 04:33 | Shift+F4 will zoom us back out to see the end result.
| | 04:36 | I'm going to go back to my Pick tool and click out here.
| | 04:39 | Now there is one other thing you should know
that's happening when you use this tool.
| | 04:44 | Let's go over to our Free Hand tool
here, just above the Smart Fill tool
| | 04:48 | and let us just draw a little line with
a circle so that we close up this loop.
| | 04:53 | Now we have got our enclosed area, we'll go over to our Smart
Fill tool, I'm going to leave the color that's selected here
| | 05:01 | for the fill color at Dark Blue for the
outline I'm going to specify a different color,
| | 05:06 | I'm going to specify a nice red and I'm going to make it thick.
| | 05:09 | So let's go up to eight points and
choose that red I was talking about.
| | 05:15 | Here we go, now when I click inside this loop I know it's going
to be filled with my specifications in this case Dark Blue
| | 05:21 | with a thick red outline, but watch this, when go over to our
Pick tool we have actually created an object, meaning I can click
| | 05:29 | and drag that away, that's what was filling up my loop.
| | 05:33 | So I'm actually creating new objects when I do
this, I mean if I wanted to, I could delete the loop
| | 05:38 | and I have created my own custom shape, I'm going to click on
that delete it and show you how you might want to use this.
| | 05:44 | Here's an example, we'll click on the Ellipse
tool hold down Ctrl and now I'm going to duplicate
| | 05:51 | that Ctrl+D on the keyboard creates a duplicate.
| | 05:54 | I'm going to use those offsets Defaults and click OK.
| | 05:59 | And now I'm going to move this over,
just to the right and I want you to see
| | 06:04 | that there's enclosed areas here
in the middle and on the outsides.
| | 06:08 | So in fact If I just move this in a little bit further,
I could create what looks like a crescent moon.
| | 06:15 | So let's do that we go over to our Smart Fill tool, I'm going
to change that color on the inside to yellow and on the outside,
| | 06:23 | I'm going to change that to black,
just scroll away up to the top here.
| | 06:28 | Doesn't need to be eight points, I'm going
to go down to three points and I'm going
| | 06:32 | to click inside this left-hand crescent moon area, just like
that, you can see it's filled in and remember what happened here,
| | 06:40 | I have actually created an object, meaning I
can click on my Pick tool and move that away.
| | 06:47 | Look at that, there is my circles left behind I can
marquee select those and delete them with my delete key
| | 06:52 | on the keyboard and I have created this new shape.
| | 06:55 | I'm going to click again here, just rotate it slightly.
| | 07:00 | Here we go, that looks good right there,
that maybe a little bit more perfect,
| | 07:07 | if I wanted to use the same yellow
as down here, you know what to do.
| | 07:10 | You are going to use your Eyedrop tool right.
| | 07:13 | So click on this object down here, let's go to our Paintbucket
or Eyedropper tool by holding it select that color back here,
| | 07:22 | hold on the Eyedropper switch to the Paintbucket
and click inside my moon, matches perfectly.
| | 07:29 | So there we go, lots of little tricks for working with color.
| | 07:33 | Now keep in mind with the Smart Fill tool,
you are able to create your own shapes just
| | 07:38 | by creating new objects after you smart fill an area.
| | 07:42 | Whenever you need to fill up an area,
that's not necessarily an object,
| | 07:45 | but in an enclosed area the Smart Fill tool
will save you lots of time and lots of effort.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
7. Working with LayersCreating layers| 00:00 | This next Chapter is going to be all about
working with Layers here in CorelDRAW X4.
| | 00:05 | Layers can be extremely useful very important part
of the creation process here in DRAW especially
| | 00:11 | with those more complex projects you might be working on.
| | 00:15 | I think back to my High School days, when my teachers
would use an overhead projector at the front of the room.
| | 00:20 | They take a see through acetate slide with an object on it, put
it on top of the projector and we would see it on the big screen
| | 00:26 | and then they would leave that there and put another one on
top of it, it too was see through, but had additional objects
| | 00:32 | that started to grow a bigger picture and then as
they folded additional acetate slides one on top
| | 00:38 | of the other creating this stack of slides,
you would eventually see the big picture.
| | 00:43 | Well you can do something very similar to
that here in CorelDRAW by using Layers.
| | 00:48 | Now Layers have some advantages.
| | 00:50 | If you are using Layers you can stay organized for example, you
can hide all the Layers you not working on to focus in on an area
| | 00:56 | of your project, on your page to work just on that
area, not be distracted or confused by what's around it.
| | 01:04 | Another advantage to using layers is, if you have got
multiple layers and you make changes to content on your page,
| | 01:11 | it's going to refresh or redraw faster
if it's on a layer with fewer objects.
| | 01:16 | If you are working on one big layer with every object
on that layer, then making a simple change to one
| | 01:22 | of those objects could slow down the redraw process.
| | 01:25 | So save yourself some system resources by using layers as well.
| | 01:28 | You will see the advantages as we move through this Chapter,
creating layers, we're going to manipulate those layers,
| | 01:34 | look at layer properties and even discuss something that will
save you a lot of time and effort, known as the Master Layer.
| | 01:41 | If you need objects repeated across multiple
pages create them once on a Master Layer
| | 01:45 | and then they will appear on every other page after that.
| | 01:49 | So let us start in this lesson, by creating some
layers using the file, I have already opened here.
| | 01:53 | If you look at the top here it's called GOCertificate1.cdr,
if you have got the exercise files and you would
| | 01:59 | like to follow along, you will find
this one in the Lesson7 folder.
| | 02:04 | So as I look at this, there are multiple objects here on one page
| | 02:07 | and I really don't know much about
the layers because I can't see them.
| | 02:11 | So the first step is to be able to see our layers in
our document, to do that we need our Object Manager.
| | 02:18 | I look over here to the right in this HINTS docker
and there is a tab called the Object Manager.
| | 02:24 | That happens to be my default, this
shows up when I launch CorelDRAW.
| | 02:28 | You may see it as well and just clicking on the tab will
display your layers, if you don't see the Object Manager go
| | 02:35 | up to you are Window menu down to
Dockers and you will see it up here.
| | 02:40 | Mine has a check mark indicating it is already
open, if yours doesn't click on Object Manager,
| | 02:45 | another option is to go to the tools menu and click
on Object Manager from there directly as well.
| | 02:51 | So once it is selected you can then go to the
Object Manager Tab to display your layers.
| | 02:58 | Now as I look at this, I'm seeing the defaults, there is
a special layer just for creating Guides Master Guides;
| | 03:05 | those are guidelines that we can create that
will appear on every page in your project.
| | 03:10 | So if I go to Master Guides right now and I click and
drag from my ruler down to the edge here and let go,
| | 03:17 | that guide will appear on every new page I create
because I created it on the Master Guides layer.
| | 03:23 | With it selected, I'm going to hit my Delete Key to remove it.
| | 03:26 | We also have a Desktop Layer, one
for Guides just for the current page.
| | 03:30 | There is our Default Layer One layer
and we have also got one for our Grid.
| | 03:35 | And you can see right now it's invisible.
| | 03:38 | You have a Show/Hide button for each of these
layers, a little eyeball and you can see when I click
| | 03:42 | on the closed eyelid, it opens up and displays my grid.
| | 03:46 | I want to hide that I'm going to close it up.
| | 03:49 | Other icons are for printing notice that if I show
the Grid it's not going to print and I can't edit it,
| | 03:56 | those no signs through the printer icon and the pencil
icon, indicate no printing and no editing, it's locked.
| | 04:01 | Again I'm going to hide my grid.
| | 04:04 | If I go up to Layer1 it is visible, I can print
It and I can make changes to it, it's unlocked.
| | 04:11 | My Guides will never print, my desktop and
Master Guides they won't print as well.
| | 04:16 | I really can't see the objects on this Layer1 right here.
| | 04:20 | So if I click on it and then click in the white space down
below, you can see it's red indicating, it's the active layer.
| | 04:26 | So if I whatever I do next will be on this layer.
| | 04:29 | But, I don't see the object, I thought
look at my page to see those objects.
| | 04:32 | For example, I click on the green rectangle it's selected,
but nothing tells me that over here in my Object Manager,
| | 04:39 | that is unless you go up to this third button at
the top which gives you your Layer Manager view.
| | 04:45 | When you click on that, check it out my rectangle
is showing up here and is highlighted or selected.
| | 04:51 | So on Layer1, which expanded automatically,
notice a little minus sign is here to allow us
| | 04:56 | to collapse or click the plus sign to expand.
| | 05:00 | I'm going to collapse for it just
to keep this simple to begin with.
| | 05:03 | So Guides Desktop and Grid, you can see show up on the Master
Page, anything we do on these layers affects the entire document.
| | 05:12 | So if there is multiple pages and we do something on the desktop
or in the Guides we'll see those on every subsequent page.
| | 05:19 | At the top we have got just Page1 guide and
our layer, right here which is selected.
| | 05:25 | So let's say we want to get organized here and have
some of the background objects like a green rectangle
| | 05:30 | and maybe this yellow rectangle and maybe the dollar sign
showing up in the background because we going to use those
| | 05:36 | to create additional Gift Certificates of different
denominations and maybe we want to keep the text all by itself
| | 05:42 | on it's own layer to stay organized as well and just
leaving the rest of the objects on their own layer.
| | 05:48 | Well in that case, we need some new layers, so
with Layer1 selected up here anything in Page 1.
| | 05:54 | I can go down to the very bottom of
this docker to create a new layer.
| | 05:58 | Clicking the New Layer button, creates a brand new layer it's
highlighted up here defaulted name, LayerOne little bit different
| | 06:06 | from the number layer one, that we see
down below, that's our default layer.
| | 06:10 | I'm going to call this one Text, all
my text is going to go on this layer.
| | 06:15 | So when I hit enter, I have got a new layer.
| | 06:18 | Let's create another new layer for our objects.
| | 06:21 | So click on that, type objects when
I hit enter, I got a brand new layer.
| | 06:26 | I'm going to collapse my original
LayerOne here, just to simplify this view.
| | 06:31 | So now I have got my three layers, as well as my Guides up here.
| | 06:35 | I'm going to go down to layer one and if I want to rename as
background for example, I could right click and choose Rename
| | 06:42 | from here or I'm just going to de-select
this by clicking down below.
| | 06:47 | Click again on a selected layer and it automatically takes
you into rename mode where you can type whatever you want
| | 06:53 | and I'm going to type in, Background and when
I hit enter, it's my currently active layer.
| | 07:00 | I have got a plus sign indicating
there are objects on this layer.
| | 07:03 | The other layers have no plus signs
indicating they are empty layers.
| | 07:07 | So let's expand our background now, It's time to
start moving things from one layer to the other.
| | 07:12 | So we have got a Text layer, let's start selecting some text.
| | 07:16 | Well I can do that from here in my document right on the page.
| | 07:20 | When I do, you can see that Artistic Text up here Arial
Bold and if I wanted to move that to my Text layer,
| | 07:26 | I could drag it from here, click and
drag when I get over text let go.
| | 07:32 | I have now moved it to the text layer.
| | 07:34 | If I go down below where I've got some additional Artistic Text.
| | 07:38 | You can see this information down at the bottom.
| | 07:40 | I could also move that up to the next layer, just by dragging
it from within the previous layer and letting go in the layer.
| | 07:47 | I would move that as well and I have got a group of
objects, I got some Artistic Text here when I click on that,
| | 07:53 | that's my $5 in the background, so I'm
going to put that up here on my Text layer.
| | 07:59 | Working my way down Artistic Text.
| | 08:01 | There is Green Onion Dollars, I see it selected over here.
| | 08:04 | Again I could drag it from here or from here into the new
layer, drag it up there, just above our Artistic Text.
| | 08:12 | We want to see the black line, if you go into an existing
Artistic Text layer or object you will group them together.
| | 08:18 | So I want to see the black line above to keep it separate.
| | 08:21 | Good it's in there now.
| | 08:23 | Let's go to some more Artistic Text down
here, you can see I've got over here
| | 08:27 | on the left hand side an object that I don't even see.
| | 08:30 | Another advantage to using layers that might
be objects you don't even know are there.
| | 08:35 | That I don't even need, so I'm going
to hit my delete key on the keyboard.
| | 08:38 | What about this one.
| | 08:39 | Oh there is something way out here that is invisible.
| | 08:42 | I'm going to delete it as well.
| | 08:43 | And I have a guess that if I click on Artistic Text
there is yet another one I don't need to hit delete.
| | 08:49 | So if I look down here my background I have got a group of
objects, I have got some curves another group and a rectangle.
| | 08:55 | I have got all my text moved over here to my Text layer.
| | 08:59 | So I'm going to minimize my Text layer or
collapse it by clicking the minus sign.
| | 09:03 | Now it's time to move some objects over to my Objects layer.
| | 09:07 | Notice that nothing changing over here really on my page
except that the order is going to be very important.
| | 09:14 | we're going to talk about that in a moment.
| | 09:16 | Right now though let's go get some objects here.
| | 09:18 | If I click on this group of objects that's my logo, I'm
going to move that up to the objects layer and when I let go
| | 09:24 | on Objects it expands to show that group of objects
and you can see that does affect my page here.
| | 09:31 | If I go over to the Curve now and click on this, drag it
| | 09:35 | up here underneath the Objects and let
go, I've moved it to its own layer.
| | 09:40 | Here is another Curve.
| | 09:41 | These two curves actually need to be moved.
| | 09:44 | So we can click and drag them up and drag them up here
and now we have got everything separated the way we want.
| | 09:54 | Perfect, alright I can minimize my background,
minimize my objects to see what that looks like,
| | 09:59 | click out here on my page and it's almost perfect.
| | 10:02 | The only thing I'm seeing that doesn't really suit
me is that the object here is overlapping my $5.
| | 10:08 | So the order that we see our see
layers here is also very important.
| | 10:11 | This is called their stacking order just like
stacking objects one on top of the other.
| | 10:15 | Maybe text should be on top of the objects.
| | 10:18 | So to move a layer just click on the layer
itself and drag it above Objects and let go.
| | 10:24 | You can see that's a much better look.
| | 10:26 | So all of my Text is on top of the
Objects which is on top of the Background.
| | 10:30 | That looks good just like that.
| | 10:32 | We can also within a layer adjust
our stacking order the same way.
| | 10:36 | So for example I have got this Curve here and here and
here, that's the order at the bottom I have got my group
| | 10:43 | of two objects that's at the bottom of the stacking order.
| | 10:47 | So I'm going to minimize that and I'm going
to expand my text because I'm not too keen
| | 10:51 | on how my MAKES A GREAT GIFT here seems to be in the background.
| | 10:57 | So if I click on Artistic Text, that needs to go up, I think.
| | 11:03 | There we go, make a little more visible, Artistic Text down here
and you could see when I let go I actually created a new group.
| | 11:09 | So we can take that out of there.
| | 11:11 | We need to see the line if we want to be able to
move it, out of a group and into it's own layer.
| | 11:18 | So let's go back Text and make sure
that's happening click the plus sign here,
| | 11:22 | here is my Artistic Text that's in the background.
| | 11:25 | I really should have that down at the bottom, so I'm
going to drag it down below Artistic Text Arial in green
| | 11:31 | and let go and now things are looking just right.
| | 11:34 | I can minimize that and that looks great.
| | 11:37 | I will de-select just by clicking
anywhere outside my selected object.
| | 11:41 | So there is the end result.
| | 11:42 | Looks the same as what we started, but now we're organized.
| | 11:45 | So let's say we want to just work on the text in
this particular page, we could hide the objects
| | 11:50 | in the background to make it a little bit less confusing.
| | 11:54 | Clicking the eyeball here next to Objects will hide it.
| | 11:58 | Clicking the eyeball next to the background will hide it
and you can see now I'm just left with my Text and I can see
| | 12:04 | that maybe this isn't perfectly centered, I can move that
over a little bit using control I'm just going to move it
| | 12:09 | to the left, so it looks like it's better lined up.
| | 12:12 | There is some text in the background, that looks
good and when I'm done I can minimize my Text Layer
| | 12:19 | and turn back on my Objects and my Background.
| | 12:23 | Let's say the Background should never
be changed, it has to stay that way.
| | 12:26 | Well we can lock it by clicking the Pencil right here.
| | 12:29 | Now it's all locked up, so I cant actually go
into the background and start making changes,
| | 12:32 | they are not even selectable here, unless I unlock them.
| | 12:37 | OK so we're getting into manipulating
our layers a little bit now.
| | 12:41 | we're going to continue with that in the next lesson,
but you should be feeling comfortable now creating layers
| | 12:46 | and ordering them, because stacking
order of course is very important.
| | 12:50 | So are some of the properties we're going
to be looking at in the next lesson.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Layer properties| 00:00 | In the previous lesson we touched on some of the
advantages of working with Layers here on CorelDRAW X4.
| | 00:06 | Now we're going to see those advantages in action
as we explore some of the Layer properties.
| | 00:11 | I'm still working with my Green Onion certificate here.
| | 00:14 | If you have jumped to this lesson and you need to
get caught up and you do have the exercise files,
| | 00:18 | you can go to the Lesson7 folder, open up
GOCertificate2.cdr and you will have what I have.
| | 00:25 | Over here in the Object Manager which we have opened up,
| | 00:28 | we can see that with our Layer Manager View selected we can see
the different pages, we have got a Master Page and only one page
| | 00:35 | and on Page 1 we have got several layers
that we created in the previous lesson.
| | 00:39 | So our text is separated from our objects,
which is separated from our background.
| | 00:43 | So one of the advantages we talked
about was screen refresh or redraw rate.
| | 00:49 | When you are working with a page that has multiple objects
and some of them very complex and you make a simple change
| | 00:54 | to one object, the entire drawing has
to be refreshed to show those changes.
| | 00:59 | That can eat up system resources and slow you down.
| | 01:03 | Well thanks to this little guy right here, little eyeball
next to our various Layers, we can turn off certain layers
| | 01:09 | to isolate the layer we want to work on and speed up the process.
| | 01:13 | So let's say we wanted to work with some of the objects.
| | 01:16 | Well we could hide the text by clicking the
eyeball on the text layer and do the same
| | 01:21 | for our background layer and here are the objects.
| | 01:24 | So if I just want to work on an object like maybe
it was this curve all the way around the outside,
| | 01:30 | this rectangle and I want to change the color.
| | 01:32 | Well as soon as I make a change like right clicking
on red for example, I see that change much faster
| | 01:38 | than if I had all of those other objects visible on my screen.
| | 01:42 | I'm going to click Undo, so I actually like the original
color and to get those layers back we just go to the eyeballs
| | 01:48 | that are now closed and open them back
up, to make those other layers visible.
| | 01:54 | I'm going to minimize my Objects layers, so I can see all
of my layers here nice and neat down the right hand side.
| | 02:00 | I'm going to de-select by clicking off the page and
talk about the next advantage when you are printing.
| | 02:06 | Let's say I wanted to get a preview of what
this is going to look like just the text.
| | 02:11 | So I'm working with the text and the background and the objects,
they are fine, but I want to be able to manipulate the text.
| | 02:17 | Well we know that we can turn off our Objects and
Background or at least hide them by clicking the eyeballs,
| | 02:23 | if this is all I wanted to printout I
could do the same with the printer icon.
| | 02:27 | So I'm going to turn those Objects back on and
the Background back on but turn off the printing
| | 02:33 | by clicking the printer icon next
to Objects as well as Background.
| | 02:38 | So with those turned off now I know that if I was to print
this entire file, all I would see is the text, need some proof,
| | 02:46 | let's go up to the File menu and down to Print Preview.
| | 02:51 | Print Preview, I'm going to answer, Yes to adjusting the
printer automatically shows me, I'm just going to get this text,
| | 02:59 | that's all I'm going to see in the printout
on my 8.5X11 inch sheet of paper here.
| | 03:04 | So when I'm done I click my Close button up here, to close
the Print Preview and back to my original and I'm going
| | 03:10 | to turn my printers back on because eventually when I'm done,
I want to print all those layers together to my printer.
| | 03:17 | So just working with the text layer and just printing
the text layer obviously it's going to print faster,
| | 03:22 | it's not going to waste any ink, I will be able
to get a nice preview of what the text is going
| | 03:26 | to look like, if I'm happy I turn these others back on.
| | 03:29 | In my opinion the biggest advantage to working with layers is the
ability to lock certain layers so that they cannot be changed.
| | 03:38 | I'm thinking of my background for example, if I wanted
to select something like this border right here,
| | 03:44 | this yellow border that goes around the inside of My
Gift certificate and I want to move it over to the left.
| | 03:51 | Well it's very thin so I might miss it and when I click
and drag and start moving, I just happen to get it there.
| | 03:57 | I click and drag a little too high, you can
see I have actually got the background moving.
| | 04:01 | So I want to undo that and click Undo again to move everything
back into position and let us try that again, de-select,
| | 04:10 | I want to go right to the yellow line, click and drag and whoops!
| | 04:13 | I have moved my background again.
| | 04:15 | Ctrl+Z on the keyboard to undo that.
| | 04:17 | So you could see how that could waste a lot of time, well why
not just lock the Background, instead of locking an Object
| | 04:24 | where if you want to go back and make
changes to your object you have to unlock it,
| | 04:27 | with your Object Manager open it's very
easy just to lock the entire background.
| | 04:32 | So I click the little minus sign here collapse
that and click the Pencil, next to Background
| | 04:37 | and when I do that, now it's as if it's not even there.
| | 04:41 | So if I go right in here to my background and click and drag
you can see I'm getting what I wanted, which is that rectangle,
| | 04:48 | if I come up here and try to drag the
background I can't, I can't move it,
| | 04:52 | it's not editable, I can't make changes to it, it's beautiful.
| | 04:56 | So you can always lock or unlock by clicking the Pencil,
when you need to go and make changes any layer on any page.
| | 05:06 | I'm going to minimize my objects now.
| | 05:09 | So I'm seeing my Layers, Text, Objects and Background.
| | 05:12 | Now one thing about printing, printing
and exporting are very similar.
| | 05:17 | Let's see we're going share this with
somebody who only had a Adobe Illustrator
| | 05:20 | and you wanted to give them just the text to work on.
| | 05:24 | Well when you click on the little printer
icon next to Objects and Background, we know,
| | 05:28 | that when we do a Print Preview,
we're only going to see the text.
| | 05:31 | When you do an export to Adobe Illustrator format,
you are only going to be exporting the text,
| | 05:37 | same thing as printing because our printer icons
have no signs to them for objects and background,
| | 05:43 | they don't get exported to Adobe Illustrator.
| | 05:45 | So you hand up the text for some to work on,
they give it back to you, you bring it in
| | 05:49 | and then you de-select your printers for
exporting the entire file the next time.
| | 05:54 | Let's go up to the top here because we've got some buttons for
showing Object properties as well as editing across layers,
| | 06:01 | right now Text is my current layer, I know because it's red.
| | 06:04 | If yours isn't just click on Text and then click down here
in the white space in your Object Manager to de-select
| | 06:11 | and when you see Text in red you know it's the current layer.
| | 06:14 | That means if I go up to this button where it says Edit Across
Layers and I click on that, I won't be able to edit objects
| | 06:20 | or the background, just text and if I expand my Objects look at
that, they are not even selectable same thing for my Background.
| | 06:27 | So that is another way to lock your background by changing
the properties right at the very top for all of your layers.
| | 06:34 | When you need to edit across all the layers
you click that button again to turn it back on.
| | 06:39 | So that's a great way to edit layers.
| | 06:42 | Now when I click on a plus sign let's say next to Objects
here I have got several objects on the Objects layer.
| | 06:48 | Right now I can see next to Curve for example and
I as I hover over it, it says Fill, None, Outline,
| | 06:53 | Yellow some of it is getting cut off over there.
| | 06:56 | I can go to the left border of my docker when I see the
double arrow click and drag that over to the left a little bit
| | 07:01 | so I can see more, those are the object properties.
| | 07:05 | Now if that looks cluttered to you and you don't need to
see them you can always turn your Object Properties off
| | 07:10 | and on using this first button up at the top.
| | 07:13 | If you like them click it again, if you
don't turn them off and that goes for all
| | 07:17 | of your layers you can do the same thing
for each layers turn them off and on.
| | 07:22 | So is the background, I don't see
them click the button I do see them.
| | 07:26 | So that's really your preference which you like to see I'm going
to minimize my Text layer click the minus sign next to Objects
| | 07:32 | as well as Background to minimize all of those layers.
| | 07:36 | So just some of the advantages and how you adjust some of the
properties of your layers there is one more I want to show you
| | 07:42 | that is new here in CorelDRAW X4 and that is the Guides.
| | 07:47 | You will notice for a Master Page we do have Guide.
| | 07:49 | So when we typically would use Guidelines
by clicking and dragging from our ruler
| | 07:54 | down into our drawing area we would have guidelines and then
we would add a new page and we would see those same guidelines.
| | 08:00 | So let's try that.
| | 08:00 | I'm going to click and drag form up here, I'm
going to drag this guideline down to the top,
| | 08:05 | I'm going to drag one from my Vertical Ruler on the left over to
the edge of my gift certificate, let's do another one over here
| | 08:12 | on the right and another one down at the bottom.
| | 08:17 | So from the top we drag it down to
the bottom, there just like that.
| | 08:20 | So we have got our four guidelines in there now.
| | 08:22 | Notice that they show up here on the Guides
Layer, but when I go to the next page
| | 08:28 | by clicking the plus sign here I create a new page I don't see
those guidelines, I can create different sets of guidelines
| | 08:35 | on different pages thanks to this Guides
layer which actually appears on the page.
| | 08:40 | Now if I go down to Guides here and make that the active
layer, it turns red and I bring in a guideline let's say
| | 08:48 | down the middle here, I'm actually doing it for every page.
| | 08:52 | So now when I go back to Page 1, I will see my guidelines
as well as the one I just added under Master Page here.
| | 09:00 | So you have got the ability to use both if you wanted to, when I
click on the Guideline I can delete it by hitting my Delete key,
| | 09:07 | I'm going to leave those in there on my page knowing
| | 09:10 | that if I create a new page I won't see
those guidelines I can use different ones.
| | 09:14 | So just some of the advantages to layer and some of the
properties, click the minus sign any time you want to minimize,
| | 09:20 | notice that Guides don't print, but they are visible
and you can edit them unless you don't want to,
| | 09:26 | clicking the Pencil locks them into
position, I like that feature too.
| | 09:29 | So you should be feeling comfortable now with
some of the properties as well as those advantages
| | 09:33 | of using Layers we're going to move on
to the Master Layer in the next lesson.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using a Master layer| 00:00 | If you have been following along with me in this chapter
you should now be feeling quite comfortable working
| | 00:04 | with layers here in CorelDRAW X4.
| | 00:06 | We created some layers, we ordered them, talked about the
advantages, adjusted properties to make use of those advantages
| | 00:14 | and now it's time to take it a step
further and talk about Master Layers.
| | 00:19 | And all the Master Layer is, is a new layer on the Master Page.
| | 00:24 | Whenever you need to repeat certain
content across multiple pages in a file,
| | 00:30 | well if you do it on the Master you only have
to do it once and it appears on every page.
| | 00:34 | So let's do that now.
| | 00:35 | We are still working with our Gift Certificate file from the
last couple of lessons, so if you have skipped to this lesson,
| | 00:41 | you need to get caught up and you have got
the exercise files, go to the Lesson7 folder,
| | 00:45 | open up GOCertificate3.cdr and you will have what I have.
| | 00:49 | It's a two page document.
| | 00:51 | Page 2 doesn't have anything on it quite yet.
| | 00:53 | I will go back to page 1.
| | 00:55 | We need the Object Manager opened up, so click on the
tab over here or if you don't have that tab you know,
| | 01:01 | you can go up to your tools menu and click on Object
Manager there and over here on the right we're
| | 01:06 | in what we call our Layer Manager View and you can see that
different pages, page 1 and 2 as well as that Master page.
| | 01:13 | There is a couple of different ways to create
Master Layers or layers on the Master page.
| | 01:19 | One way is to take an existing Layer and turn it into a Master.
| | 01:23 | So in our scenario where we're create a gift certificate,
so we want to create multiple gift certificates
| | 01:28 | with different denominations, it's important that we have
a consistent look, so maybe the background that we see here
| | 01:34 | on page 1 should be the background for
page 2 and any other new page we add.
| | 01:39 | So in that case we can up to page 1 here, we do have a
Background Layer and if I right click on it look at that,
| | 01:46 | Master is available right there and when I click on it, all that
happens is that Background Layer just got moved to my Master page
| | 01:54 | and that means now if I go to page 2
check it out, I have got a new background.
| | 02:00 | If I add a new page by clicking the plus sign here just
after 2 of 2 to add a third page, same background perfect.
| | 02:08 | I'm going to go back to page 1 and make sure
that I'm viewing the contents of page 1 here.
| | 02:14 | So I have got a new background and anything I put
| | 02:17 | on that background layer here in my
Master page will appear on every page.
| | 02:21 | But you can also create another Master if you wanted to, another
Master Layer and there is a different way to do that as well.
| | 02:28 | If we go down to the bottom we have already used the
New Layer button, now we're going to go just right
| | 02:32 | of that and click the New Master Layer button.
| | 02:37 | When I do that it is created just above my Background layer
that's great and maybe we want certain legal text to appear
| | 02:43 | on every page in the same occasion, so I'm going to type
in Legal Text and hit Enter, I have got my new layer.
| | 02:50 | It's the active layer, because it's red here.
| | 02:53 | So all I have to do now is create this text on
the active layer and it will appear on every page.
| | 02:59 | So let's do that, we'll go over to our Text tool.
| | 03:02 | I'm actually going to click out it here on the Desktop and
the Desktop by the way is the area outside your actual page.
| | 03:10 | Anything we put on the Desktop will appear on every
page in our document but on the Desktop and you can see
| | 03:17 | that we do have a Desktop option here under our Master page.
| | 03:20 | So if we didn't want to print anything or see or
edit anything on the Desktop we do have that option,
| | 03:25 | but I'm going to type in some legal text here.
| | 03:28 | Expires 1 year after date of issue.
| | 03:34 | Now that text is way too big, so I'm going to go to my
Pick tool here, Arial 24pt shows up on my Property Bar.
| | 03:41 | I'm going to change the point size to 8 just like that.
| | 03:44 | Now it's on my Master Layer called Legal Text already.
| | 03:48 | So it is going to appear on every single page, I just have to
put it into the right location just down here and when I release,
| | 03:55 | deselect by clicking off the page, you can see I have got a
Master Layer called Legal Text with some artistic text in it.
| | 04:03 | That should mean if I go to page 2 now I
see Expires 1 year after date of issue.
| | 04:09 | If I go to page 3, I have got my Background Master as well
as that text on the Legal Text Layer in the Master page.
| | 04:18 | So back I go to page 1 and now I continue with pages 2 and
3 creating Gift Certificates of different denominations.
| | 04:25 | Of course I can borrow things from the various pages.
| | 04:28 | If I go to my Text Layer over here on
Page 1 make that Active Layer, deselect,
| | 04:33 | you can see now I can really take anything I want from this
Layer and copy it to any of my other pages if I needed to.
| | 04:41 | Typically though you will create
one page and once you have got all
| | 04:44 | of your layers duplicate the page after
that but that's always the scenario.
| | 04:48 | So in this case we might do a little bit copying and
pasting to create our additional gift certificates.
| | 04:54 | But I think you have got the idea at least how to manipulate
your Layers as well as make use of the Master Layer
| | 05:00 | to save you loads of time and lots of effort.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
8. Viewing Your WorkExploring view modes| 00:00 | This next chapter is all about viewing your work in CorelDRAW X4.
| | 00:04 | There are a number of different View Modes
that come in handy, we'll explore those first,
| | 00:09 | and then we'll move on to Preview Modes to preview your
work before you send it to a printer or a print shop,
| | 00:15 | or also use the View Manager, look at the Zoom tool, and then
we'll do some finding and replacing; both with objects and text.
| | 00:22 | First though, we're going to explore those
different View Modes I was talking about,
| | 00:25 | using the file I have open here, its called Viewing1.cdr.
| | 00:30 | You will find it in the Lesson8 folder of your
exercise files, if you want to follow along.
| | 00:34 | You can see this particular file is a one pager,
but it has a number of objects on the page.
| | 00:39 | Here I have got some text with some
Special Fills and a Drop Shadow.
| | 00:43 | I have got an object using a PostScript
Fill here, the Sting Glass Effect.
| | 00:47 | I have got another object with some Distortion and Special fill.
| | 00:51 | Here you will see a bitmap image, over to
the right another image with a Special Fill
| | 00:55 | and an Extrusion, makes it look three- dimensional.
| | 00:58 | Then I have got a series of squares here that blend
from one color to another, using the Blending tool.
| | 01:04 | Things you are going to be doing
later on in this title, by the way.
| | 01:08 | Right now though, we're going to look at the
different View Modes, talk about the advantages
| | 01:12 | of each, and the effects it has on your work.
| | 01:15 | So we go up to our View menu, and probably what you are going
to see in the top section is a little dot next to Enhanced
| | 01:22 | with Overprints, and that's usually the default view.
| | 01:25 | You may have Enhanced selected.
| | 01:28 | But we're going to start at the top with Simple Wireframe.
| | 01:32 | Now, remember all of those objects and some of the effects.
| | 01:34 | When we click on Simple Wireframe, you
can see how simple this view really is.
| | 01:39 | Well, first of all, when we refresh
this screen, it's going to be very fast.
| | 01:43 | You are missing all of the Fills, you are missing things like
the Extrusion, the PostScript Fills, the Bitmap is Grayscale.
| | 01:51 | So it's not using up much memory here.
| | 01:53 | Look at my Blend, which went from one square to
another with a whole bunch of steps in between.
| | 01:58 | I'm just seeing the beginning and the
last, but no Fills and no Extrusions.
| | 02:02 | All of those are ripped off in this
view so that you can just get a feel
| | 02:05 | for the layout and the basic elements on your drawing page.
| | 02:09 | That's what this view is all about.
| | 02:11 | Now, if you need a little bit more detail, you can
go up to the View menu and go down to the next one,
| | 02:15 | which is a little bit more than a
Simple Wireframe, it's a Wireframe.
| | 02:19 | When I click on that, you can see representations.
| | 02:22 | For example, under View Modes here, looks
like a bit of a perspective on this rectangle.
| | 02:28 | That's representing my Drop Shadow.
| | 02:30 | Each of these stars also has a square
around it, representing the Drop Shadow.
| | 02:34 | The Extrusion is not a real Extrusion, but you can
see a representation of where that might happen.
| | 02:40 | Look at the Blend, it doesn't have the Fills and the
Special Effects, but it does have all the steps in between.
| | 02:46 | So it's a little bit more than just the basic
elements of my page here that I'm viewing
| | 02:50 | in Wireframe View, but a little more detail than the previous.
| | 02:54 | Let's go up to the View menu now and go down to Draft.
| | 02:58 | Now, the Draft View is another way to view your work,
without using up too much of your system resources.
| | 03:03 | So you can see things, for example, like this Bitmap down
here, if you were to zoom in, is a little bit pixilated.
| | 03:09 | Same thing for the Fill in my X4 Extruded box here.
| | 03:13 | If I look at this star, it's got a bunch
of PSs in there, short for PostScripts.
| | 03:18 | So I'm not actually seeing the PostScript Fill, but I know
| | 03:21 | that there is a PostScript Fill by
those PSs that I see inside the star.
| | 03:25 | So in this case I'm getting a little bit of
a feel for the Color Balances in my page.
| | 03:31 | I do see some of the Fill colors at least, so this
is a great view for refreshing your screen quickly,
| | 03:37 | but at the same time getting a feel
for some of the color in there.
| | 03:40 | Alright, let's go up to the View menu now, and down to Normal.
| | 03:44 | Now, with the Normal View, you can see
it's getting a little bit more detailed.
| | 03:49 | I still have some jagged edges, the angled
lines or any curves, you will see jagged edges.
| | 03:55 | I do see colors, I do see those Drop Shadows
now, PostScript Fills, I still don't see them,
| | 04:00 | I just see the initials PS repeated throughout
the star, telling me there is a PostScript though.
| | 04:05 | Look at the Gradient Fills that I see in the Extrusion.
| | 04:08 | They show up now.
| | 04:10 | So this is a pretty good view.
| | 04:11 | It will refresh quickly because I'm not seeing High
Resolution Graphics or Bitmaps, but I'm seeing the Bitmap
| | 04:19 | with a little bit more detail, so it's just
on the verge of a really enhanced view here.
| | 04:25 | In fact, if we go up to the View menu,
you will see the next one is Enhanced.
| | 04:30 | Now, when I click on Enhanced, I'm seeing pretty much
the greatest detail that I'm going to see in my document.
| | 04:38 | So those jagged edges we saw are a little bit smoother now.
| | 04:41 | There is some antialiasing that's been used in the Enhanced view.
| | 04:45 | The only thing I see is a little bit of a jagged edge down
there, but that's the Extrusion, so I wouldn't worry too much
| | 04:51 | about that, not necessarily how its going to print.
| | 04:54 | Keep in mind too that, what you are seeing on your screen from my
screen may look different than the actual file on your own screen
| | 05:01 | in CorelDRAW, just because of the resolution of the
movie you are watching, so keep that in mind too.
| | 05:06 | So this is our Enhanced View.
| | 05:07 | The only other view to talk about is Enhanced with Overprints.
| | 05:12 | If I click on it though, you are not
going to see any difference in this file.
| | 05:15 | If you are going to be sending your work to a
professional print shop, where they do have Overprints.
| | 05:19 | For example, if you have got two objects of
different colors overlapping one another.
| | 05:24 | Well then, those two colors blending together
where they overlap will create a new color.
| | 05:29 | That's what we call an Overprint.
| | 05:31 | We don't have any in this file, so we don't see the
effects switching from Enhanced to Enhanced with,
| | 05:37 | as you can see from the View menu, Overprint selected.
| | 05:41 | So I'm going to leave it at that even
though I don't have any Overprints.
| | 05:44 | Again, this is going to take up the most system resources.
| | 05:47 | It's going to take the longest to refresh,
but it's as close to the finish product
| | 05:52 | that I'm going to see when I actually print this out.
| | 05:54 | So those are the different View Modes you have to choose from.
| | 05:57 | In the next lesson, we're going to talk along
the same lines, but look at Preview Modes.
| | 06:02 | Preview Modes allow you to check your work before you actually
send them off to a print shop or to an actual printer.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exploring preview modes| 00:00 | If you were following along with me in the previous lesson,
we explored different View Modes here in CorelDRAW X4,
| | 00:06 | now we're going to move on to Preview
Modes, which are a little bit different.
| | 00:10 | Previewing your work allows you to see exactly what
its going to look like before you do things like Print,
| | 00:16 | or Send the file off to a print shop to be
professionally printed, or even before you Export your file
| | 00:22 | to another format, possibly to share with others.
| | 00:25 | If you can preview your work before you do those things, you
might save yourself some time, some effort, even some money,
| | 00:31 | by catching things that maybe you might have
caught a little too late, without previewing.
| | 00:35 | So let's look at the Preview Modes here using this file
that I have opened up already, called PreViewing1.cdr.
| | 00:42 | It's actually a multiple page document.
| | 00:44 | If you have got the exercise files, it's in your Lesson8 folder.
| | 00:48 | Now first of all, as I look at Page
1 here, I'm seeing the entire page.
| | 00:52 | Now, I can zoom in.
| | 00:53 | I'm going to press F4 on my keyboard.
| | 00:55 | That allows me to see all of the objects on the page very
close to the border, nothing is getting cut off here,
| | 01:02 | except that I got have a Toolbox on the left,
I have got toolbars across the top in menus,
| | 01:08 | I have got palettes down the right,
even a Status Bar at the bottom.
| | 01:11 | So all of that's taking up room on my screen.
| | 01:14 | If I go up to the View menu now and go down to
Full-Screen Preview, F9 is the keyboard shortcut.
| | 01:21 | People who have been using CorelDRAW for a long time are in the
habit of just hitting F9 to go into Full-Screen Preview Mode.
| | 01:27 | When you do that, I'm going to click on it, you actually
clear out all the palettes and toolbars and menus
| | 01:34 | and so on, so you can just concentrate on your page.
| | 01:38 | This allows me to zoom in even further,
but still see all of the objects.
| | 01:42 | So I get a feel for layout as well as the detail.
| | 01:44 | So as I'm looking at this, I think okay, that looks great,
maybe I'm safe now to send it off to the print shop.
| | 01:50 | Pressing Escape on your keyboard will exit Full-Screen Preview
and take you back to you previous view, which in our case,
| | 01:57 | having hit F4, we're zoomed into about 155% here.
| | 02:01 | Alright, there is another Mode as well.
| | 02:03 | If I go up to the View menu and go down to Preview Selected Only,
I will be able to preview items that are selected ahead of time.
| | 02:11 | So let's go into our page here, and
let's just click on the Bitmap here.
| | 02:15 | I'm going to click on the image, those brown-eyed susans.
| | 02:19 | I'm going to go up to View, and down to Preview Selected
Only, and that's all I'm going to be previewing.
| | 02:27 | Notice that it's the same location on the page.
| | 02:29 | I see the entire page, but only that object is showing up.
| | 02:33 | This can be really handy if you have got objects overlapping each
other, and you want to be able to proof your entire file object
| | 02:41 | by object; focusing in on one object at
a time or multiple objects at a time.
| | 02:45 | Then I press Escape, hold down my Shift
key, and click on these two stars as well,
| | 02:50 | and go up to View, and down to Preview Selected Only.
| | 02:55 | You can see all of the selected items
show up here, the rest do not.
| | 02:59 | I will press Escape again.
| | 03:02 | Now, I wonder what's happening when we do a
Full-Screen Preview or Preview Selected Only.
| | 03:07 | You can see kind of what we're allowed to
view here, but what kind of view is that?
| | 03:12 | Remember, in our View Modes we had
Enhanced and Wireframe and Normal and so on.
| | 03:16 | If we go up to tools, down to Options, and
over here under Workspace, click on Display,
| | 03:23 | we'll see a section dedicated to our Full-Screen Preview here.
| | 03:26 | Notice for me, the default is using that Enhanced View,
| | 03:29 | which allows me to see high resolution graphics
like our Bitmap that we just previewed.
| | 03:34 | I'm also seeing the page border, so I have a
good feel for where the edge of the page is.
| | 03:39 | We could also switch over to Draft View if we
wanted to save a little bit of our system memory,
| | 03:44 | refresh the screen a little bit faster, but I like the Enhanced
View, so I get a pretty close idea what this is going to look
| | 03:50 | like when I print it or send it off to the print shop.
| | 03:53 | So those are the options.
| | 03:54 | I will click OK, and just keep those options.
| | 03:58 | Now I want to show you yet another view.
| | 03:59 | we'll go up to the View menu and down to Page Sorter Review.
| | 04:04 | Now, this allows me to see little thumbnail representations of
all the pages in this file, which happens to be all four pages.
| | 04:10 | You can see they are labeled Page 1, 2, 3, 4.
| | 04:13 | This welcome page here might be better at the beginning.
| | 04:16 | So in this view I can actually click and drag
when I see the line appear over here on the left,
| | 04:21 | it becomes Page 1, then I get Page 2, 3, and 4.
| | 04:26 | If I want to zoom in to a specific page,
I just double click on it to zoom in.
| | 04:30 | There we go; see, I'm on Page 3.
| | 04:33 | To go back to Page 1, which is now my welcome, I'm
still in that zoomed in view; Shift+F4 will zoom me back
| | 04:40 | out to see the entire page, and each page can have its own view.
| | 04:45 | Now, there is one more view.
| | 04:47 | Now, you may have noticed from the
View menu, we also have a View Manager.
| | 04:51 | we're dedicating the entire next lesson to the View Manager,
| | 04:54 | so we're going to skip over that, and
instead, we're going to go over to File.
| | 04:58 | we're going to look at Print Preview.
| | 05:00 | If you are going to be sending this file to your printer
or to a printer that you are hooked up to; either directly
| | 05:06 | or through a network, clicking Print Preview is going
to allow you to see a preview of what it will look
| | 05:11 | like on your selected printer, using Selected Print Options.
| | 05:14 | Now, if you see this message saying, the
printer paper orientation doesn't match one
| | 05:19 | or more document pages, do you want to adjust automatically?
| | 05:21 | I always say Yes.
| | 05:22 | Things are adjusted, and then I'm
brought into my Print Preview Mode.
| | 05:26 | So here you can see the page, the way its
going to look when I send it to my printer.
| | 05:31 | Looks a little bit different.
| | 05:32 | Some of the quality, for example, because of the printer that
I have selected, are not as good as it looked on the screen,
| | 05:37 | and I can go thought the different pages down below.
| | 05:40 | Even Page 1, you can see I have got text
here with a little bit of a jagged line.
| | 05:45 | Page 2, same thing, I see some jagged
lines here, specially with the shadow.
| | 05:50 | So it's going to look a little bit different when it
comes out of my printer than it does on my screen.
| | 05:55 | we're going to go into detail with Print Preview later on
when we talk about printing, so right now we're going to close
| | 06:00 | up this view by going up to the Close button; last button
on the Standard toolbar, Alt+C is your Keyboard shortcut.
| | 06:07 | Give it a click to return to our previous view, where
we can actually work on our document or on our page.
| | 06:13 | So that should give you a good idea of some of the different
Preview Modes available to you here in CorelDRAW X4.
| | 06:18 | A Typical scenario is, you send something
off to a print shop, you get it back,
| | 06:23 | you just spent an arm and a leg, and it doesn't look right.
| | 06:26 | Now you have got to go back to work and send it off to the
print shop again, paying twice as much as you maybe should have
| | 06:32 | if you had previewd your work before you sent it off.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the View Manager| 00:00 | In this lesson we're going to start by exploring some of
your Zoom Functions available to you here in CorelDRAW X4,
| | 00:05 | and then apply what we learn to the View Manager;
one of my favorite features here in CorelDRAW.
| | 00:12 | We are still using the same file from the previous lesson, so if
you have skipped to this lesson, and you want to get caught up,
| | 00:17 | if you have got the exercise files, go to
the Lesson8 folder, open up PreViewing1.cdr.
| | 00:23 | I'm on Page 2, but I'm actually going to go over to Page 3.
| | 00:27 | Clicking the Page 3 Tab takes me to my Gift Certificate.
| | 00:31 | Now, right now the Gift Certificate
looks kind of small on the page.
| | 00:34 | If I was going to work on this, I would probably
want to zoom in to at least the full certificate.
| | 00:39 | Then to work on areas of that Gift Certificate,
I would want to zoom in even further.
| | 00:43 | So let's look at some Zooming Techniques.
| | 00:46 | We have already seen a couple.
| | 00:47 | For example, pressing F2 on your keyboard is the equivalent of
going up here to the Toolbox and clicking on your Zoom tool.
| | 00:54 | So let's do that, F2.
| | 00:54 | You can see how my mouse pointer has the plus sign, now
all I have to do is click and drag to draw a rectangle
| | 01:00 | around the section I want to zoom
into, and I have zoomed into that area.
| | 01:04 | Now, with the Zoom tool selected, it's a little bit different.
| | 01:07 | If I go over to my Zoom tool, look
what happens to my Property Bar.
| | 01:10 | It tells me, I'm zoomed into a level of 306%,
in my case, you may see a different value there.
| | 01:16 | But I have also got all of these other Zoom tools at my
disposal right from the Context-Sensitive Property Bar.
| | 01:21 | So if I click this dropdown, for example,
I might want to zoom To Fit, for example.
| | 01:26 | If I click zoom To Fit, every thing that appears
on the page will be visible at the zoom level.
| | 01:32 | You can see it actually zooms me out to 302% in
this case, so I can see everything on this page.
| | 01:38 | Now, if I go back to my dropdown and I want to see the
entire page, that zooms me right out so I can see the border
| | 01:44 | of the page and where my graphic fits on that page.
| | 01:47 | Another option is just to click.
| | 01:49 | Because I have got a +sign in my Zoom tool here that's selected,
if I want to zoom in to the GREEN ONION DOLLARS text here,
| | 01:55 | I just click once, click again; with
each click I'm zooming in even further.
| | 02:00 | If I go too far, I can zoom out by doing
the opposite, which is right clicking.
| | 02:04 | So clicking the right button on the
mouse, with each click takes me back out.
| | 02:08 | That's the equivalent of using my plus and minus signs here.
| | 02:11 | Notice that zoom in is the plus sign, zoom out can also
be used with the Function Key 3 on your keyboard,
| | 02:17 | so F3; with each click, will take you back out.
| | 02:21 | Gives you a little bit less control of what you are zooming into.
| | 02:23 | Now, we have also got a couple of
options here; one is Zoom To Selected.
| | 02:27 | We don't have anything selected at this point.
| | 02:29 | Then Zoom To All Objects, that's our F4 key.
| | 02:33 | So giving that a click takes me back to that 302%.
| | 02:37 | Alright, let's select something.
| | 02:38 | I will go to my Pick tool, and let's say I was
going to work on this Green Onion Logo here.
| | 02:42 | So I click on it.
| | 02:43 | You can see it's actually quite large; it
includes that Gradient Fill in the background.
| | 02:47 | So now when I go to my Zoom tool over here and go up
to this button, I can Zoom To the Selected object.
| | 02:54 | It takes me right there, I like that.
| | 02:56 | I have also got some other ones, Zoom To Page, holding down
Shift and pressing F4 takes us out to see the entire page,
| | 03:03 | that's the equivalent of choosing To Page right here.
| | 03:07 | Alright. We have also got the ability to zoom
in to the full page Width or page Height.
| | 03:12 | So if I want to be able to see the
full Width, I click on this button.
| | 03:15 | Now I can see the edges of my page,
but not necessarily the top and bottom.
| | 03:19 | If I need to see the top and bottom, I can zoom to the top
| | 03:22 | and bottom of the page using the last
button up there on the Property Bar.
| | 03:26 | Of course I have got some Zoom Levels here
in my dropdown; a 100% would be actual size.
| | 03:32 | Alright, so those are some of your
View Options when using the Zoom tool.
| | 03:36 | Another Option, if you have got a Wheel Mouse is just
to wheel up to zoom in or wheel down to zoom out.
| | 03:45 | So with each tap of the Wheel Mouse towards the top, I'm zooming
in, and wherever my mouse pointer is, is what I'm zooming into.
| | 03:54 | As I pull the wheel back, I'm zooming out.
| | 03:57 | So that's really great if you are going to be
working on different areas of a drawing, for example.
| | 04:03 | What's even better though is if you use
the View Manager to save those Zoom Levels.
| | 04:07 | I really like this.
| | 04:09 | Let's say, for example, I'm going to press F4.
| | 04:11 | F4 in my keyboard takes me out to see the entire
graphic here, and I'm going to click on my Pick tool.
| | 04:16 | So let's say I'm going to work on this logo, but not this
entire area, just right here on the Green Onion itself.
| | 04:22 | Well, I might want to go to my Zoom tool and just
click and drag around the Onion, there we go.
| | 04:27 | Now I can really work on the details of this logo.
| | 04:30 | Well, wouldn't it be nice if I could just
flip back to that and back to the full page,
| | 04:33 | back and forth, see the overall outcome of my changes.
| | 04:37 | I can using the View Manager, and I'm going
to go up to my Window menu, down to Dockers.
| | 04:43 | You will see over here on the right I have
got something called the View Manager;
| | 04:45 | Ctrl+ F2 is the keyboard shortcut to open that one up.
| | 04:49 | I'm going to close up my Hints; if you have
got Hints there you can close that up as well,
| | 04:53 | just to give us more space with our View Manager.
| | 04:56 | Alright, I have got some buttons here at the top.
| | 04:58 | You can see a plus sign for zooming in and a minus sign for zooming out,
very similar to these buttons up here, in fact, exactly the same.
| | 05:05 | There is my button to Zoom To Selected Objects and
of course Zoom To all Objects, that's my F4 key.
| | 05:11 | I have got a plus sign for adding views, and I have got
a minus sign for removing them if I no longer need them.
| | 05:17 | This very first button here is called the Zoom One-Shot.
| | 05:21 | So I'm going to go back to my Pick tool
here, which allows me to access this.
| | 05:26 | When I click on it, all I have to do is just what I did a
moment ago, zoom into the area that I want to be working on.
| | 05:32 | I want to make sure I get all of this.
| | 05:34 | When I let go, that's perfect, all I have
to do now is add it by clicking the plus sign.
| | 05:40 | You can see the name of this view is 1-1294% on Page 3.
| | 05:45 | That's not very descriptive, so I'm going to click again,
right where it says View, and now I can type over that.
| | 05:50 | So I'm going to type in Green Onion.
| | 05:54 | I'm going to put in CU after it for close up, just to remind me.
| | 05:58 | When I hit Enter, I have locked it in.
| | 06:00 | Let's zoom right back out to all the objects.
| | 06:03 | We can use this button right up here, or press F4.
| | 06:05 | We could add a view for this particular view, but we
have got the button right there, so no need to do that.
| | 06:12 | Now let's say we wanted to zoom in on
the GREEN ONION DOLLARS text over here.
| | 06:16 | So we would again click on this button,
the Zoom One-Shot, same as hitting F2.
| | 06:21 | Zoom into that area, and add it as well.
| | 06:26 | I'm going to click where it says View, 2-545%, for me.
| | 06:31 | I'm going type right over that, Green Onion Text, there we go.
| | 06:37 | I can hit Enter to lock that in,
and zoom back out to All Objects.
| | 06:41 | Now, what I really like about the View Manager
is that you can also save views from other pages.
| | 06:47 | So if we go over to Page 2 let's say, and I want to zoom
right out to all objects, and maybe work on this star
| | 06:54 | with the PostScript Fill, I could do the exact same
routine; click and drag, save that by clicking the plus sign,
| | 07:03 | and you can see its automatically showing me its on Page 2.
| | 07:06 | I will just change the name; PS star Fill, there we go.
| | 07:13 | When I hit Enter, done.
| | 07:14 | Now, here is the real beauty of the View Manager.
| | 07:17 | I click on the Green Onion right
here on the list, it takes me there.
| | 07:20 | Go over to the text, zoom back out, zoom in to the Green Onion,
make a few changes, zoom back out to see the overall look
| | 07:28 | and feel, and that's the real beauty of the View Manager.
| | 07:31 | So it saves your views and actually
saves all of those views with the file.
| | 07:35 | So when we go up to save our file, we'll be saving those
views with the file, so that next time we open it up,
| | 07:41 | we access our View Manager to make use of all of these
views, and of course, you can add as many as you like.
| | 07:46 | If there is one you don't want, just click on it, click
your minus sign over here to delete the current view, its gone.
| | 07:53 | Now you can go to another view if you
like or zoom out to all your objects.
| | 07:58 | So those are Zoom Techniques here in CorelDRAW
X4, really help you when you are zeroing
| | 08:03 | in on specific areas of a project that you need to work on.
| | 08:06 | Having the View Manger makes it fast
and easy, saving you a lot of clicks,
| | 08:10 | and a lot of keyboard strokes when working on you masterpiece.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Finding and replacing text and objects| 00:00 | In this next lesson we're going to explore the Find
and Replace Functionality built into CorelDRAW X4.
| | 00:06 | When you think of Find and Replace, typically
you think of Word Processing Applications,
| | 00:11 | where you are searching for text and
replacing that text with something else.
| | 00:15 | Yes, you can do that here in CorelDRAW X4, but you can
also search for Objects; Objects and their Properties,
| | 00:21 | or their Effects, their Colors, their Special Effects.
| | 00:25 | we're going to do all of that in this lesson, and we're going to
continue to use our previewing document from the previous lesson.
| | 00:30 | If you have skipped to this lesson however, and you do
have the exercise files and you would like to follow along,
| | 00:35 | go to your Lesson8 folder, open up PreViewing2.cdr.
| | 00:39 | I'm on Page 3.
| | 00:41 | Now, when we do a Find or a Find and Replace here
in CorelDRAW, it's for the page we're looking at.
| | 00:46 | So I'm on Page 3 here, where I do have
some text and I have got some graphics.
| | 00:50 | When we go up to the Edit menu now, and come down to Find and
Replace, you are going to see several options; Find Objects.
| | 00:57 | This is just simply going to locate
objects according to your selections.
| | 01:01 | Or if you need to replace those objects with
something else, you can go to Replace Objects.
| | 01:06 | Down here we can locate text using the Find Text
function, and if we need to replace that text
| | 01:11 | with something else, we can use the Replace Text function.
| | 01:14 | So let's start with Finding Text.
| | 01:16 | This looks very familiar to you if you
have used any Word Processing Application.
| | 01:20 | Here you type in what it is you are looking for; if you need to
match the case exactly, or whole words, you can do that as well.
| | 01:26 | I'm going to search for $5.
| | 01:29 | When I hit Find Next, you can see what happens.
| | 01:33 | It actually gets highlighted or selected for me here.
| | 01:37 | So it's very easy to spot, even though
it was faded in the background
| | 01:40 | in my drawing here, its easily found and easily recognizable.
| | 01:44 | So if that's what I was looking for,
I'm done, I click the Close button,
| | 01:47 | or if want to see if there is any other
occurrences of $5, I hit Find Next.
| | 01:52 | No, there aren't any, so I click OK.
| | 01:55 | I close this up, and I have found my $5.
| | 01:58 | Notice that it's still selected here so I could
start making changes to it if I wanted to.
| | 02:02 | If the change is just to change the denomination, in that
case I would probably want to go up to the Edit menu,
| | 02:08 | down to Find and Replace, and choose Replace Text.
| | 02:12 | This is very similar to Find, except I have got
an extra field; what do I want to replace it with.
| | 02:18 | So I'm going to type in $5, and I want
to create a $1 Certificate, so $1.
| | 02:24 | I don't need to match case or whole words.
| | 02:27 | I click on Find Next, highlights it.
| | 02:31 | Now I have got a decisions; do I want to replace that with
my $1, or do I just want to go through the entire page here,
| | 02:37 | finding any occurrences of $5 and replace it
with 1; that's where I would use Replace All.
| | 02:41 | I just want to do the one replace, so I click Replace.
| | 02:44 | It doesn't find any more.
| | 02:45 | That's what this means when I see, End of document reached.
| | 02:47 | I click OK.
| | 02:49 | I close it up, and look at that, I have
got $1 Gift Certificate now, easy as that.
| | 02:53 | So that's looking for text, and again, if you have used Word
Processors before, you are probably pretty familiar with this.
| | 02:59 | What you might not be familiar with is locating objects.
| | 03:03 | Check this out.
| | 03:04 | We go up to the Edit menu, come down to Find and Replace,
and let's start with just Finding or locating objects.
| | 03:11 | This will launch our Find Wizard.
| | 03:13 | So I'm going to click on Find Objects.
| | 03:15 | The Wizard starts up, and I have some options here.
| | 03:18 | I can start a new search.
| | 03:19 | If I have done a search already, I can save it, and
then load it up any time right from here in this Wizard.
| | 03:25 | I haven't done that yet.
| | 03:26 | I can find objects that match the currently selected
object; you would have to select something first.
| | 03:31 | So I'm going to begin a new search,
its already selected, I click Next.
| | 03:35 | Look at this, look at all the tabs here.
| | 03:37 | I can search for Object Types, Curves Rectangles, Stars.
| | 03:41 | Down below, I can be searching for Text,
Artistic Paragraphs, or Text on a Path.
| | 03:46 | Dimensions, look at that, Linear,
Angular, Call Outs, Connector Lines.
| | 03:50 | Under Others, I have got Bitmaps, OLE Objects, and 3D Objects.
| | 03:55 | So I'm going to keep this simple to start with.
| | 03:57 | Let's see if we have any Rectangles.
| | 04:00 | I'm going to click on Rectangles.
| | 04:02 | If I wanted to select the multiples, I could
choose to find any type of object that's selected,
| | 04:07 | not every object that's selected, so it could be either or.
| | 04:10 | I'm going to just choose Rectangles and click Next.
| | 04:13 | Rectangles is selected.
| | 04:14 | If I want to specify Properties for
the Rectangle, I click this button.
| | 04:18 | Here I can choose Corner roundness,
exact Widths or Heights for my rectangle.
| | 04:22 | But if I'm not concerned about that,
I just want to find any Rectangle,
| | 04:26 | I will just click Cancel here, and
continue on by clicking the Next button.
| | 04:31 | Summarizes what I have selected, Rectangles.
| | 04:34 | If I wanted to save this for future use, that's where I do it;
we'll do that momentarily, right now let's just click Finish.
| | 04:40 | Alright, now you can see that my big rectangle in
the background is selected, its found it right away.
| | 04:46 | Are there anymore?
| | 04:47 | I click Find Next.
| | 04:49 | No, that's the only rectangle on this page.
| | 04:52 | So I click OK.
| | 04:54 | Now, if I wanted to edit this search
I could or start a brand new one.
| | 04:57 | I'm going to click Edit Search right from here and just go
back to the beginning, where I begin a new search, click Next.
| | 05:04 | This time I'm going to Deselect Rectangles and look for Curves.
| | 05:08 | Now, curves as you know can be any
object that's been converted to curves.
| | 05:12 | It could be a freehand drawing.
| | 05:14 | When I click Next, I can specify
Properties for the curve if I wanted to.
| | 05:20 | In fact, I can choose exact Numbers of nodes, or if I click
in this check box, change it from exactly to more than
| | 05:27 | or less than, the number of nodes I enter over here.
| | 05:30 | But I'm going to cancel that.
| | 05:31 | I don't need to specify Nodes, I
just want to find all the Curves.
| | 05:34 | I click Next, there it is, summarized for me.
| | 05:37 | I click Finish, and there is the first on.
| | 05:41 | You can see it's actually selected for me.
| | 05:44 | Find Next takes me to the next one.
| | 05:46 | Anymore? Sure enough, this big one that
looks like a rectangle is actually a curve.
| | 05:50 | Anymore? Yes, I have got numerous Curves inside my logo here, and
each time I hit Find Next, it's highlighting something different.
| | 05:58 | If I click on Find All, here it says, One or more
of the objects you want to find are within groups.
| | 06:04 | So in this case we would have to ungroup all of these items.
| | 06:07 | Clicking Yes does that, and now you can see all of
the Curved objects are selected when I click Find All.
| | 06:14 | So I can Edit that search or just close
this up and start over if I wanted to.
| | 06:19 | I'm going to Deselect everything and go back to my Edit menu now.
| | 06:23 | Down to Find and Replace, and this
time we'll go to Replace Objects.
| | 06:28 | Now, when I come in here I get the Replace Wizard, very
similar, but here's where I choose what it is I want
| | 06:34 | to Replace; is it a color, a color model, or a palette?
| | 06:37 | For example, if I wanted to take all of the colors
using the CMYK Color Model and change it to Grayscale,
| | 06:43 | just for printing on a black and white printer, for
example, this is a fast and easy way to do that.
| | 06:48 | Do I want to look for outline properties and
replace them with something or text properties?
| | 06:52 | I'm going to go down here to text properties and click Next.
| | 06:57 | Now I get to choose what Font, the Weight, the Size
that I'm looking for and replace it with something else.
| | 07:02 | So let's say we just want to change our Font; where
we have used Arial Black throughout this page,
| | 07:07 | change it to some other font to see what it might look like.
| | 07:09 | Well, in that case we want to find a Font.
| | 07:11 | You can see Arial is selected here.
| | 07:14 | If I click the dropdown, I will see my Font
list, Arial Black is the one I'm looking for.
| | 07:19 | I want to replace that with a different Font.
| | 07:21 | So I select the Font check Box; I could just
change it with a different Weight or Size,
| | 07:25 | but I'm going to come down here and try something different.
| | 07:28 | Now, you find one that's kind of
thick and black looking on your list.
| | 07:33 | I'm just scrolling down the list till I see one, and I'm
actually going to go down to one of the Swiss Fonts down here.
| | 07:40 | You can choose whatever you like.
| | 07:42 | I'm going to go to Swiss 721, its a black one, fairly thick.
| | 07:45 | When I click Finish, I see my Find and Replace,
and right now I'm going to click Find Next
| | 07:54 | to locate the first; which happens to be this $ sign up here.
| | 07:58 | When I click Find Next, you can see the next $ sign.
| | 08:02 | There's another one and another one;
you could see how long this might take.
| | 08:05 | So it might be easier, instead of just replacing
them one at a time, to replace them all in this case.
| | 08:12 | When I do that, you can see it whipped through them
all very quickly, and its finished searching the page.
| | 08:17 | I click OK, and I have just changed everywhere
where I was using Arial Black to my Swiss Font.
| | 08:23 | Fast and easy.
| | 08:24 | I'm going to close this up.
| | 08:27 | Alright, I'm going to Deselect by clicking off the page here.
| | 08:30 | I want to make sure nothing is selected, and let's try one more.
| | 08:34 | Now this time we're going to save our search.
| | 08:36 | So we go up to Edit, down to Find and Replace.
| | 08:40 | I'm going to in this case Find Objects.
| | 08:44 | This is something that I might do
on a regular basis, I will save it.
| | 08:48 | So I want to begin a new search, click Next.
| | 08:51 | Let's say one of the things I do on
a regular basis is look for Fills.
| | 08:56 | So if I want to look for anywhere I have used
a Fountain Fill, I can select that check box,
| | 09:00 | and you can see there is lots to choose from.
| | 09:02 | I can also look for Outlines and Special
Effects, like Perspectives and PowerClips,
| | 09:07 | Lenses, Extrudes, Transparencies, and Distortions.
| | 09:12 | In this case though, I'm just going to keep
it at a nice simple Fountain Fill, click Next.
| | 09:16 | Find any Fountain Fill or a Specific
Fountain Fill are my options.
| | 09:20 | I want anyone, click Next.
| | 09:22 | There is my summary.
| | 09:23 | Now, before I click Finish, I'm going to
save this, and I'm going to give it a name.
| | 09:27 | You can see it's going to try and save it to my Lesson8 folder.
| | 09:30 | I'm going to put it on my Desktop
actually, where its easy to find.
| | 09:34 | I'm going to call this FountainFillFind, just like that.
| | 09:41 | Click Save.
| | 09:43 | Now I click Finish.
| | 09:45 | You can see it has found one; there is a
Fountain Fill right there in the background.
| | 09:48 | Find Next.
| | 09:50 | That's the only one so far in this page, so I click OK.
| | 09:54 | If I wanted to now, I'm going to close
this up, and I want to run that again.
| | 09:58 | I don't have to go through all those steps,
just go up to Edit, down to Find and Replace.
| | 10:03 | This time, when I go to Find Objects, I'm not going to
begin a new one, I'm going to load a search from disk.
| | 10:10 | I click Next, and I get to go find it.
| | 10:13 | It's on my Desktop, it's called FountainFillFind.fin;
it ends with a .fin extension.
| | 10:18 | So when I click Open, it's there.
| | 10:20 | I click Finish, and there it is, its found it right away.
| | 10:24 | I will just move this out of the way.
| | 10:25 | If I had added Fountain Fills, clicking
Find Next would find them.
| | 10:30 | I haven't of course, so I click OK, and close up my dialog box.
| | 10:34 | So I think you see how using Find and Replace; whether
its for Objects and their Properties, or for Text,
| | 10:40 | it can really save you a lot of time, and you are guaranteed, you
are going to find every occurrence of what you are looking for.
| | 10:46 | If you try to do it yourself, it's possible something is hiding
in the background and you won't find it, whereas CorelDRAW will.
| | 10:53 | So have fun using Find and Replace; both for
Objects and their Properties, as well as Text.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
9. Working with Bitmap ImagesApplying bitmap effects| 00:00 | If you were following along with me in the very first chapter
in this title, you may recall we talked about the differences
| | 00:06 | between vector graphics and bitmaps and I also mention that
CorelDRAW X4 is mainly a vector illustration type application.
| | 00:14 | In other words, the stuff you create here in CorelDRAW
will be vector graphics. That doesn't mean though,
| | 00:19 | that we can't use bitmap graphics in our projects. So here you
can see, I have opened up a file. It's called Bitmaps1.cdr.
| | 00:27 | If you've got the exercise files and you want to follow along, go to
the Lesson9 folder and that's where you'll find this one. Open it up.
| | 00:33 | It's a 1-pager. I've got some artistic text background and
| | 00:37 | my bitmap image, right here in the middle.
| | 00:40 | One of the nice things about CorelDRAW is that you can use
bitmap images but you can also make changes to bitmap images
| | 00:47 | without leaving CorelDRAW. So in this chapter we are going to
look at things like applying special effects. We will use the
| | 00:53 | Image Adjustment Lab do some minor adjustments to our images.
We will look at cropping as well as converting vector objects
| | 00:59 | we create into bitmaps, so we can use those bitmap effects.
| | 01:03 | So, if you got this open, we are going to click on the bitmap image
| | 01:06 | to select it and you will notice up at the top, there's a menu
dedicated to working with bitmaps. There it is, right up there.
| | 01:13 | If I click on it, you are going to notice a lot of Bitmap options.
Converting objects to bitmaps up there. There are some adjustment tools.
| | 01:20 | Editing a bitmap, will actually take you out of CorelDRAW in
into Corel PHOTO-PAINT, where you have got many more options for
| | 01:27 | editing the actual image. We are going to that later on this title.
| | 01:31 | You can see Resampling, changing Modes, Tracing, we will talk about
that later as well. This is the section though in this lesson that
| | 01:38 | we are going to focus in on where we see all of our different effects.
| | 01:41 | Now, we are going to start up here with our 3D effects,
just to get some background and how to preview your effects.
| | 01:47 | So let's go over here to the right.
| | 01:49 | We'll go down to a very popular one
called the Page Curl. We'll click on it.
| | 01:54 | This opens up the dialog box. Yes, it does say Page Curl, but there
is something very important about this dialog box you need to know
| | 02:00 | and that is you can go to your other effects right from
here. In other words, you don't have to cancel things,
| | 02:05 | close it up, go back to your Bitmaps menu every time you
want to try something different. You can do it all from here.
| | 02:12 | And you can preview your work in many different ways.
| | 02:15 | So right now you can see the default settings.
The Page Curl is going to curl from the top corner
| | 02:20 | in a vertical direction.
| | 02:21 | Transparent means that the curl itself you would able to see
through it. If we make it Opaque, then we can choose some colors.
| | 02:27 | We are going to adjust the Width and the
Height of the Curl. They're defaulted at 50.
| | 02:31 | So let's say I want to change it to the bottom right corner.
| | 02:34 | Use a Horizontal direction. Keep things Transparent. Keep the
Width and the Height as they are and see what that looks like.
| | 02:42 | There's couple of different ways to do that. I have got some preview
button up here it will open up this Page Curl dialog box a little bit.
| | 02:49 | The first one gives me a Split Screen. So when I click
on it, you can see right now I am seeing the image
| | 02:54 | in two halves here.
| | 02:56 | Now, as I click and drag with my Hand
tool down to the bottom right corner,
| | 03:00 | eventually,
| | 03:01 | you might see the curl over here on the right, when we click
on our Preview button. So with this opened up, clicking the
| | 03:08 | Preview button will preview it over here in the right panel.
So I can move this down and over a little bit. Click Preview
| | 03:14 | to see the end result. Probably not the best effect for this
particular type of preview. So we will turn that off by clicking it
| | 03:21 | and go to the other option, which is to view just the image itself
| | 03:25 | up here in a preview screen.
| | 03:27 | I'm going to scroll down to the bottom
right to the bottom right corner here
| | 03:29 | and click my Preview button and now you can see a better
preview of what that might look like. I can move it around,
| | 03:36 | Preview it again and if don't like to having to hit
back Preview button over and over again I can lock it on,
| | 03:42 | clicking the Lock button locks it.
| | 03:44 | Now when I make a change like Change Transparent to
Opaque I see it instantaneously using the two colors,
| | 03:51 | gray and white. If I want to add some color to that,
maybe I want to go with a blue instead of a gray,
| | 03:57 | try a light blue.
| | 03:58 | Right away you see what it's going to look like in the preview
because we have locked it down. I am going to click the Lock button
| | 04:04 | to unlock the Preview.
| | 04:06 | And I am going to close up this image,
| | 04:09 | close that up as well,
| | 04:11 | so we don't have anything showing up at the top.
| | 04:14 | And if you prefer to preview things right on the page itself,
| | 04:17 | well, make sure nothings open at the top and then
click your Preview button to see the result down below.
| | 04:23 | And of course we can Lock that as well
if we want to see changes instantaneously.
| | 04:27 | Let's change the width to something a little bit bigger
| | 04:30 | and when I click up there around 72, you can see the result.
You can also adjust the Height that's coming further off the page.
| | 04:37 | There we go. Now it's starting to cut things off so the beauty
of the preview is I can make adjustments to get it exactly
| | 04:43 | where I want before I save those changes by clicking OK.
| | 04:46 | Don't do that, we're actually going to hit
the Reset button after we unlock the Preview.
| | 04:51 | Resetting always takes us right back where we started,
it resets all of these setting. And instead of clicking Cancel here
| | 04:57 | and going on to another effect.
| | 04:59 | We can access those effects right from
here. There's a little flyout button.
| | 05:02 | It's almost hidden in the top right corner. But clicking it gives
us access to that Bitmap menu with all of our effects down below.
| | 05:09 | Though, here's our 3-D effects, let's try one more. I'm
going to go over to the sphere here which is kind of cool.
| | 05:16 | This dialog box allows me to create almost like a sphere underneath
my image. So it's like bubbling up. If I click my Preview button
| | 05:24 | with the default settings you will see what that looks like,
| | 05:27 | like a bubble in the middle and that's a neat effect.
| | 05:29 | It's a creative effect. I am optimizing for Speed
if I want to optimize for Quality and hit Preview.
| | 05:35 | It might take a little bit longer to preview that image
| | 05:38 | but it's going to be a quality image as opposed to a fast image.
| | 05:42 | You can see it's taking much longer with quality selected
| | 05:45 | and here is my preview down below.
| | 05:47 | I can adjust Percentages. You can see over here, I've got the Wire Frame
View of what I have got selected. If I click here on this little arrow,
| | 05:55 | it allows me to go in and choose where I want the center of
that bubble to be and then of course, I can make adjustments,
| | 06:00 | maybe a smaller. You can see it actually goes in
the opposite direction from a bump to an indent.
| | 06:07 | And I am going to go just a slight bump
| | 06:10 | and click my Preview button. Quality still selected,
| | 06:13 | takes a little bit longer
| | 06:15 | and eventually I will see the end result change right here on my page.
| | 06:19 | So there it goes. It is not quite as extreme as it was
a minute ago, if I liked that I would click OK to save it.
| | 06:25 | But I'm going to reset this and try some other ones.
| | 06:29 | So let's go back to our flyout and we will skip pass the 3Ds,
now we go into Art Strokes. If you want to create a special effect
| | 06:36 | out of this image in other words turn it from a photograph
into something like a sketch, using Pen and Ink, maybe
| | 06:42 | using Crayons or Pencils, you've got all of these Art Strokes effects
to chose from. I am going to go to Charcoal right here at the top.
| | 06:49 | Move this out of the way, so you can see the preview on the page itself,
using the defaults, so I will just click the Preview button to see
| | 06:56 | what that looks like. You can see if I was to take a Charcoal
pencil and just use it to sketch this out, it might look just
| | 07:02 | like what you see here, kind of cool. I can
adjust the size and the edge of my charcoal.
| | 07:08 | So if I make a change I am going to make
it a little more extreme, go up to 5 here,
| | 07:12 | with the bigger piece of charcoal, click Preview
| | 07:15 | and I will see what that looks like.
| | 07:17 | And it's totally different in fact but very realistic, if you
were to print this out, people might be fooled into believing you
| | 07:23 | sketched this out with a charcoal pencil. I am going to click Reset
| | 07:28 | and go back to my flyout now. so I don't have to go back
to the Bitmap's menu and check out one more Art Stroke.
| | 07:34 | Let's go down to one that I really like, Water Color.,
| | 07:37 | Water Color is neat and if you have ever worked with water
colors, you know you can change brush sizes, the granulation,
| | 07:43 | the amount of water, the amount of bleed and brightness. So let's
see what the defaults look like. I am going to bump up my brush a
| | 07:50 | little bit though and click Preview.
| | 07:52 | So it takes a minute to transform this into a water color type image,
you can see that is neat, I like that. You could print this out
| | 08:00 | and if you have got a good printer, again, people might
be fooled into believing this is a natural water color.
| | 08:06 | I am going to reset that and let's check out some other categories now.
| | 08:10 | Those were Art Strokes, we can do Blurs,
now this image actually has a bit of a blur,
| | 08:14 | outside of the main Tortoise there, you can see the background
image is a little bit blurry and that was probably using one
| | 08:20 | of these effects, you got Motion Blurs, you have
got Radial Blurs. I am going to go down to Zoom here,
| | 08:26 | show you a neat effect.
| | 08:28 | And again, I encourage you to experiment with these effects. I am
going to increase the amount and the Focal point can be adjusted by
| | 08:35 | clicking this little button here.
| | 08:37 | I want my tortoise here right where the shell
and the neck need to be the focal point.
| | 08:43 | So I just click once there, click Preview to see what that
looks like. It is going to have the effect of zooming to that
| | 08:49 | focal point or zooming out and away from that focal point.
| | 08:53 | So that is a neat effect, may be it is a little too much, I can
adjust that by bumping it down and previewing again. Remember you have
| | 08:59 | got your Lock button if you want to see instantaneous
previews and that is actually a nicer effect right there.
| | 09:05 | Again clicking OK would save but we are going to hit Reset
| | 09:08 | to try out some other categories.
| | 09:11 | When I click the flyout, let us go down to-
| | 09:13 | well, you will notice Camera only has one option that is to diffuse it,
so we are going to save some camera effects for later on with PhotoPaint.
| | 09:21 | But under Color Transform, you can change things to Bit planes,
Halftones and then we have got a couple of options using Color Solarize,
| | 09:27 | and Psychedelic. I am going to go to Solarize and move this
out of the way, click Preview to see what the defaults
| | 09:34 | look like and then I might want to make some adjustments at this
point. So the levels right in the middle there, I am going to move it
| | 09:40 | down to about a quarter at 65.
| | 09:43 | Click Preview to see that effect.
| | 09:45 | You can see that is much darker.
| | 09:47 | Let's go a lot to the other extreme to 25 and click Preview.
| | 09:51 | It is getting much brighter
| | 09:53 | and actually that works with this image,
kind of neat. That is the Solarize effect,
| | 09:58 | let's Reset,
| | 09:59 | go back to our flyout,
| | 10:01 | Let's go down to Creative, there are lots of creative ones in here,
some of them are cool. For example, you have got Glass Blocks,
| | 10:08 | Kid's Play, which is a like Lego, and
| | 10:11 | as we go down you will see some other ones, for Smoked Glass and
Stained Glass. And if we go down to Vortex or Weather, you can
| | 10:19 | add weather effects. I am going to try Weather
| | 10:21 | and it's not likely going to be snowy or rainy or foggy underwater
| | 10:26 | but let's say for some reason, it's snowing underwater.
We will leave Snow selected, the Strength of the Flurry,
| | 10:32 | won't be a Storm but maybe between a Flurry and a Storm,
| | 10:35 | and the Size, let's knock it down so that flakes are too big.
Randomize means we can randomize the effects of the snow.
| | 10:42 | So, if I click Preview here,
| | 10:45 | you can see that, that's a lot of snow. Strength, I am going to
knock it down a little bit, I am going to click the Randomize button.
| | 10:51 | See 534 is the number that shows up when I click Preview.
| | 10:56 | That's a totally different effect,
| | 10:57 | click Randomize to try another one, click Preview
| | 11:01 | and that's a totally different look.
| | 11:03 | Definitely not something that applies to our image,
so let's Reset it and go back to our flyout
| | 11:08 | and let's skip over Creative and go to Distort. We can distort
these things using Blocks, displacement, we can pixelate it,
| | 11:16 | swirl it. I am going to down to Swirl
| | 11:18 | which is a cool effect, get to see a wider frame. We can change the
direction clockwise or counter clockwise, we can choose focal point
| | 11:25 | just like we did with the Zoom Blur. I am going to click on it
| | 11:28 | and this is going to be my point right
here where the neck meets the shell.
| | 11:32 | Whole Rotations, we've got Additional Degrees. Over here you can see
the effect according to what we choose here that's a very big swirl.
| | 11:40 | I go up here, that's really swirl.
So I am going to make it very subtle,
| | 11:44 | not quite at the beginning, but let's get a nice swirl in there,
Optimize for speed and Additional Degrees can be added
| | 11:52 | or removed.
| | 11:53 | So I am going to bring it down to zero
| | 11:55 | and I'm going to click Preview to see what that looks like.
| | 11:58 | You can see, I really can't tell what it is but it's a cool artistic
effect. Let's bring the rotations down now to zero, actually just
| | 12:06 | above zero.
| | 12:07 | And of course, we can go in here and type in values if we wanted to.
| | 12:12 | I'm going to come in here and type in 4
| | 12:15 | and when I click Preview,
| | 12:17 | the effect is exaggerated.
| | 12:19 | Kind of neat. We will click Reset though and go back to our
flyout. I do want to show you one more distort, let's go back to
| | 12:25 | Distort here and go down to Wet Paint because it's kind of neat.
| | 12:28 | Wet Paint gives you effect that the paint hasn't dried and it's
dripping, so we are going to adjust the wetness and the percentage.
| | 12:34 | Let's just click Preview with the default settings
| | 12:38 | and there's our wet painting and it's really dripping. So the
percent can be decreased if we wanted to, I'm going to go to 51,
| | 12:46 | right there on the middle and it's more subtle, you'll have to closely
and bump it back up to about 76 and bring the Wetness all the way
| | 12:54 | up to 50 to Preview that.
| | 12:58 | But we will Reset
| | 12:59 | and let's go back to our flyout
| | 13:02 | and let's go down to Noise.
| | 13:04 | Now Noise can be an effect that you want, sometimes it's
an effect that you get in your photos that you don't want,
| | 13:11 | you may need to sharpen. So Noise and Sharpen here are
the exact opposites. Noise can be added for an effect,
| | 13:18 | let's go down to how about Median here
| | 13:21 | and you can see its Radius is set to 1. If I
preview this, you will get the effect of Noise.
| | 13:27 | If you've ever taken photos when it's dark, for example,
| | 13:30 | I'm going to bump that up to 10 now and preview that. Sometimes
you see that graininess in your image and likely that's what would
| | 13:38 | be caused by a little bit of jiggle in the camera or with the
iris open a little bit longer. Things can happen and you can
| | 13:44 | remove noise but you can also add it to give a special effect
and you can see the effect here is a non-realistic looking photo
| | 13:52 | but it's kind of cool nonetheless. We'll
click Reset and talk about the opposite.
| | 13:57 | When we go to our flyout now
| | 13:59 | and go down to Sharpen,
| | 14:01 | you can see we have got some options for sharpening our image.
Now also under Noise, you have the ability to remove noise here,
| | 14:08 | so Remove Moire or Remove Noise, if
there's any noise, when we click on it
| | 14:15 | and preview that, we might see the image sharpen up.
| | 14:18 | Now with those really extreme cases where maybe it was
really dark and you got a lot of pixilation or graininess,
| | 14:25 | removing noise will not always be perfect
but it might improve your image at least.
| | 14:30 | I'm going to reset
| | 14:32 | and let's go back now to our flyout and look at the Sharpen
options. So you want to add some sharpness to this, you've got
| | 14:38 | a whole bunch of options here; Adaptive,
Directional, High Pass, Sharpen and an Unsharp Mask.
| | 14:44 | I'm going to go with the High Pass and move this out of the way.
| | 14:48 | I'm going to bump my Radius up to 11
| | 14:52 | and click Preview.
| | 14:53 | Watch what happens to the image, you can see how sharp that is. In fact,
it's made it totally unrealistic and it's almost like it's embossed.
| | 15:00 | So move the Radius back down here to about 3- I'm going to 2.
| | 15:05 | Percentage, leave at a 100 and click Preview.
| | 15:09 | I can see that I almost can't see the image at all,
| | 15:13 | so let's bump our Percentage down here to about 22
| | 15:17 | and try the preview
| | 15:20 | and that's actually a sharper looking image.
That's more like the original image.
| | 15:24 | Bump that up slightly to 25 and see what that looks like. So you can see
it takes a little bit of fiddling. You are going to adjust those things
| | 15:31 | if you like to lock your preview so you can see the preview
without hitting the Preview button that will save you time.
| | 15:38 | And each time you let go, you are going to see the end result
automatically, unlock the preview if you want to use the Preview button.
| | 15:45 | I'm going to reset that back to where it was and click Cancel.
| | 15:49 | Now, that is just the tip of the iceberg when it comes to
applying effects to Bitmaps in your CorelDRAW images here.
| | 15:56 | So as you are working with CorelDRAW and you're adding images
to your projects, keep in mind you've got those Bitmap effects.
| | 16:02 | You're not necessarily editing the bitmap,
we will do that later using PHOTO-PAINT,
| | 16:06 | but you can apply a number of effects to those Bitmaps.
| | 16:10 | There's also something called the Image Adjustment Lab that will help us
adjust our images. That's what we're going to look at in our next lesson.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| The Image Adjustment Lab| 00:00 | As you're probably aware by now CorelDRAW X4 is
by no means a bitmap image editing application.
| | 00:06 | If we wanted to do some real image adjustments, we would take it
into another application like PHOTO-PAINT, we'll do that later
| | 00:13 | and you've probably heard of Photoshop and
there is a whole handful of others out there
| | 00:16 | that can do a really good job at manipulating bitmap images.
| | 00:20 | That being said, in CorelDRAW we do have access to some
bitmap image editing features and that's what we're going
| | 00:27 | to look right now using the Image Adjustment Lab.
| | 00:30 | So you can see, I'm still working with the same file
from the previous lesson, it's called Bitmaps1.cdr,
| | 00:35 | if you've got the exercise files and you want to follow
along, you'll find this one in the Lesson9 folder.
| | 00:41 | It's just a one-pager and we've got our bitmap here.
| | 00:43 | Now, we looked at some effects in the previous lesson, but if we
wanted to make adjustments to this image, maybe make it brighter
| | 00:49 | or increase or decrease the contrast, do certain
things that will improve the quality of our image,
| | 00:55 | we can do those through the Image Adjustment Lab.
| | 00:58 | Now, we're going to go up to the Bitmaps menu here, after
we select the image we want to work with, I'll show you why.
| | 01:05 | If I don't click on the image and I go up to Bitmaps,
you'll notice up at the top there is a number of options
| | 01:09 | that I just can't select like Auto
Adjust, and my Image Adjustment Lab.
| | 01:15 | So the first step is to select the image you want to adjust.
| | 01:18 | So we click on it, we know it's selected by the handles, then we
go up to the Bitmaps menu and sure enough there is Auto Adjust
| | 01:26 | and the Image Adjustment Lab, and you'll notice
that the two icons here look very similar.
| | 01:31 | Well, the fact is you can go into the
Image Adjustment Lab to access Auto Adjust,
| | 01:36 | but for your convenience it's right here on the menu.
| | 01:39 | So I want you to see what happens to
the image when you click on Auto Adjust.
| | 01:43 | It takes just a second and things just got a
little bit sharper and a little more colorful.
| | 01:48 | Looks like the saturation was probably adjusted
as well as the brightness and the contrast.
| | 01:52 | I'm going to click on the Undo button,
and you can see a flip back.
| | 01:57 | If a click Redo, you can see the effects.
| | 02:00 | So it really doesn't prove the image, and that's just taking
an analysis of our image here and making a few adjustments
| | 02:07 | that you could also make manually if you so
choose by going into the Image Adjustment Lab.
| | 02:12 | So let's do that now.
| | 02:13 | With the image still selected, we go up to
Bitmaps and down to our Image Adjustment Lab.
| | 02:18 | So this opens up here on our screen with a preview of our
image and the preview you see here is the full image basically.
| | 02:25 | We have some options I really like up here on the toolbar.
| | 02:29 | These last three buttons include Full
Preview, which you're looking at right now.
| | 02:33 | So as we make adjustments over here on the right-hand side to
things like Temperature, Tint, Saturation, Brightness, Contrast,
| | 02:39 | and Highlight, Shadows and Midtones, we'll
see those effects here in the Preview window.
| | 02:44 | But if you want to know what it looked like before
those adjustments, you have a couple of other options.
| | 02:49 | This one here Before and after full preview allows us to
see the image on the left, the original and we can move it
| | 02:55 | around with the Hand tool here, just pan over, and
as we make changes we'll see them on the right half.
| | 03:00 | So we'll see the original, before and the
fixed up or adjusted image on the right.
| | 03:06 | Another one that I really like is this third
option the Before and after split preview.
| | 03:11 | What this does is it allows me to see the entire image,
I will give it a click, but split down the middle.
| | 03:17 | So I'll see the original on the left
and the adjusted image on the right.
| | 03:22 | Meanwhile, I'm looking at the entire image.
| | 03:24 | So let's try this.
| | 03:26 | We also have some buttons up here for zooming in and out, there
is our Pan tool as well, and if we wanted to rotate the images
| | 03:33 | by 90 degrees with a click, we could do that,
but our image is right just the way it is.
| | 03:38 | So let's start making adjustments.
| | 03:39 | We'll start with the Auto Adjust button, up here when
I click on Auto Adjust it' s the same Auto Adjust
| | 03:45 | that we used a moment ago directly from the Bitmaps
menu, and you can see some adjustments were made here
| | 03:50 | for example the Temperature and down below and you can see I've
got this graph showing me a couple of adjustments were made.
| | 03:57 | On the right-hand side of my image, I see the after
effects, the original on the left, kind of cool.
| | 04:03 | Now, if I didn't want to actually keep this I don't have
to start over, but there is another neat feature built
| | 04:09 | into the Image Adjustment Lab and that
is the ability to create a snapshot.
| | 04:14 | If you like the looks of that, and you might want to keep
it but you might want to try some other things first.
| | 04:19 | So we come down here and click Create
Snapshot, watch what happens.
| | 04:23 | A little snapshot now appears down
here near the bottom of my window.
| | 04:27 | So that would be one option you can see, the number one up there.
| | 04:31 | Now, if we wanted to reset to the original or we wanted to
reverse the last operations, we've got Undo and Redo buttons here
| | 04:37 | as well, but we can accumulate a number of snapshots
trying out different settings and then pick the one we
| | 04:43 | like to actually apply it to our original image.
| | 04:46 | So I'm going to click on Reset to original, I keep my snapshot
here with the fix, the Auto Adjust fix, and now I'm going to come
| | 04:53 | over here and start making some manual adjustments.
| | 04:56 | The Temperature is going to make things warmer
or cooler by adding or removing red and blue.
| | 05:02 | So I can use the slider if I want to make
bluer or cooler, and just drag it to the right.
| | 05:06 | When I let go, you can see the effects
over here on the right-hand side.
| | 05:11 | Let's really exaggerate it to see a definite
change in the Temperature of our image.
| | 05:17 | So I'm going to drag that back, I'm
going to leave it here at 6202.
| | 05:22 | Now, if that's all I wanted to do I could
take another snapshot, I'll do that.
| | 05:27 | So now I've got two snapshots, let's go up here and continue.
| | 05:30 | Now, if you wanted to continue where you left
off, you just start making additional adjustments.
| | 05:35 | If you want to reset, you can click the Reset to
original button, start making other adjustments,
| | 05:40 | but I want to build on that Temperature change.
| | 05:42 | Let's go to Tint, here you've got Magenta and some
Green and you can adjust the Tint of your image.
| | 05:48 | As you are going to the left, got more Magenta, going to the
right a little more Green and that's really exaggerated there.
| | 05:56 | So I'm going to bring it back to about 60, there, I like that.
| | 06:01 | The Saturation, if I click on this slider is
going to allow me to adjust the amount of color.
| | 06:06 | In other words, I can adjust the vividness
of the colors already in this bitmap,
| | 06:11 | going to the right will increase the
Saturation, going to the left will remove color.
| | 06:17 | Eventually, if I go all the way to the left, you are going
to see a black and white image, there is no color at all.
| | 06:22 | So I'm going to go over here to the right just past
the mid-point to make it a little bit more vivid.
| | 06:28 | I'm going to go to 20 and let go.
| | 06:30 | Now, you can type in the values here if you wanted to as well.
| | 06:33 | If you want to be more precise like 22, you can just type
that in, hit my Tab key to move onto the next slider.
| | 06:40 | Now, I can adjust the Brightness, I think it does need to be a
little bit brighter, I'm going to the right that brightens it.
| | 06:45 | Contrast, that's going to allow me to see contrast between
colors and shades and the light and the dark areas.
| | 06:51 | So if I go to the left, you can see it's dark around
the slider, that's going to decrease the contrast.
| | 06:58 | I'm going to go the right, and see an increase in
contrast, much sharper looking, almost unrealistic.
| | 07:04 | So I'm going to bring that back to 20 and that looks pretty good.
| | 07:08 | Good time to take a snapshot, I'm going
to click the Create Snapshot button.
| | 07:11 | Now, I've got a third option down here, let's continue now
with the Highlights, you've got Lights, you've got Darks
| | 07:18 | and you've got Midtones, they're
called Highlight Shadows and Midtones,
| | 07:21 | and we can adjust each of those starting with the Highlights.
| | 07:24 | I'm going to make them brighter,
the brights brighter, more darker,
| | 07:28 | it's up to you using this slider and now I'm going to -10.
| | 07:32 | The Shadows or the dark parts in this image
can be really darkened or enlightened.
| | 07:39 | Again, this is going to effect our Contrast, I'm going to
go -16 and the Midtones is everything between those Shadows
| | 07:45 | and Highlights, I'm going to brighten those up
a little bit and I like that effect right there.
| | 07:49 | I'm going to click Create Snapshot.
| | 07:51 | Now we have got four options down below,
thanks to this Image Adjustment Lab
| | 07:56 | and as I click on these I'm going to see them up here.
| | 07:59 | It might be a good time to switch my Preview to Full.
| | 08:02 | So I'm going to click Full right here and now as I click
on my snapshots, I can pick the one I like the best.
| | 08:11 | I think it's going to be the second one right here.
| | 08:13 | Once I've got it selected I click OK and those
changes are applied to my original image,
| | 08:19 | I deselect to see the end result
and that's the Image Adjustment Lab.
| | 08:24 | Obviously, there is a whole lot more we can
do to manipulate and edit bitmap images.
| | 08:29 | Later on in this title, we'll be taking an image over
into Corel PHOTO-PAINT to take it a step further.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Cropping bitmap images| 00:00 | In this lesson we're going to explore
the Crop tool here in CorelDRAW X4.
| | 00:03 | It's very interesting because the Crop tool will
allow you to crop both vector and bitmap images.
| | 00:10 | In the old days before we had computers
cropping meant taking a photograph
| | 00:14 | and with scissors cutting out the areas you didn't want to keep.
| | 00:17 | Now in these days where we work with electronic files,
the Crop tool, which appears over here in our Toolbox,
| | 00:23 | comes in very handy because we can
cut off the parts we don't want,
| | 00:27 | and as I mentioned we can do that with vector and bitmap images.
| | 00:30 | That's we're going to do in this lesson using
this file, here that I have already opened
| | 00:34 | up from the Lesson9 folder of the exercise files.
| | 00:36 | So if you have got them and you want
to follow along, open up menuPhotos1.
| | 00:40 | I'm on page 1 here of our menu and here we
do have samples of vector and bitmap images.
| | 00:47 | So we're going to start with a vector, and in this
case I want to cut off the tops and the bottom
| | 00:51 | of the word menu here, so I can make my own adjustment.
| | 00:54 | So let's go to our Zoom tool we'll start with that.
| | 00:57 | Zoom in to the word menu here, little easier to work with.
| | 01:01 | If I go to my Pick tool and click on the word
menu; look at all the little nodes in here.
| | 01:05 | This is artistic text that was converted to curves,
something we've done in the previous lesson,
| | 01:10 | and by doing that it becomes a true vector graphic.
| | 01:13 | We can make all kinds of modifications to
our text; thanks to these little nodes.
| | 01:17 | But before we do that, let's add an effect by
cropping off portions of our vector graphic.
| | 01:23 | We do that with out Crop tool; third button down.
| | 01:26 | One click on it selects the Crop
tool, when you move your mouse pointer
| | 01:29 | onto the page you can see, the Crop
tool is attached to your pointer.
| | 01:33 | Now what we have to do is click and
drag over the area we want to keep.
| | 01:36 | So I'm going to come down here, just below
the top of the M in menu and off to the left.
| | 01:41 | I'm going to click an drag across and down,
and some interesting things happen on our page.
| | 01:47 | The area inside the crop area here is
actually the way it will look when we're done.
| | 01:54 | The areas outside you can see have
been distorted to allow us to focus
| | 01:58 | in on the inside potion which is
the part we're going to be keeping.
| | 02:03 | Now I actually haven't cropped anything yet, I
have only selected an area which can be altered.
| | 02:08 | So I can use these little nodes here that bring this in a little
bit on the left, maybe stretch it out a little on the right.
| | 02:14 | I'm going to go to the bottom and just drag that up ever so
slightly and the top I want to bring it down, ever so slightly.
| | 02:22 | Once you've got the area that you want to keep, you are ready
to crop by double-clicking anywhere inside the selected area.
| | 02:29 | So, I'm going to double-click to see the end result.
| | 02:32 | It is actually a cool effect.
| | 02:34 | Because it's a vector graphic, I can now go to my Pick tool,
see that it's selected, I can manipulate this object, the size,
| | 02:41 | location, but if I go to my Shape tool, something we've talked
about in the previous lesson, look at all these nodes here.
| | 02:47 | So I can start clicking and dragging nodes to really
make changes to the look and feel of this text.
| | 02:54 | Let me drag down the corner here, stretch that out, and
just minor changes, but it's really going to change the look
| | 03:00 | and feel of this text, which really isn't text,
it's a vector graphic that we have cropped.
| | 03:07 | Bring out the edges here; I'm going to bring out this node up
a little bit, this one too; and they are very slight changes
| | 03:15 | that we're making here to the edges; it's going
to change the appearance of our text dramatically.
| | 03:26 | And you can play around and experiment
with yours, however you like.
| | 03:29 | When we're done, let's click on the
Pick tool; click off the image.
| | 03:33 | Look at that effect, kind of cool.
| | 03:34 | Shift+F4 allows us to see the big picture and thanks to
cropping, we're able to do that with our vector graphic.
| | 03:41 | Now let's go o the traditional cropping scenario,
where we have got an image, maybe it is an photograph.
| | 03:47 | This happens all the time you take a photo, there are
parts of the photo that just don't need to be in there.
| | 03:52 | As I look at this first page of my menu, it's this, right here.
| | 03:56 | This image is overlapping my text.
| | 03:58 | So I could size it down which gives me a smaller image, but
really what I want to do is get rid of this area in the top
| | 04:04 | of my photo, so people will focus in
on the picture of the actual appetizer.
| | 04:08 | So, let's zoom in to that area, clicking
the Zoom tool or F2 on your keyboard.
| | 04:13 | We'll just drag a rectangle around the outside of that image.
| | 04:16 | There it is overlapping my zucchini sticks.
| | 04:18 | I will go back to my Pick tool and make sure it's selected
first and now I'm going to go over to my Crop tool.
| | 04:24 | Now all I want to do is crop out the top.
| | 04:27 | So that means going right to the edge here and I'm going to go
just below the rim of the basket, click and drag across and down.
| | 04:35 | You can see as I'm clicking and dragging, the area
inside is not distorted, everything outside is,
| | 04:41 | and I'm going to come down to the bottom, right there.
| | 04:44 | I can adjust this a little bit if
I need to; bring it down slightly.
| | 04:48 | When I'm happy I double-click inside, and it's a fairly
large bitmap image so it takes a second to crop it
| | 04:54 | down and that's exactly what I was looking for.
| | 04:57 | I click my Pick took and deselect.
| | 04:59 | Shift+F4 zooms me out to see the entire page and the end result.
| | 05:04 | Beautiful!
| | 05:05 | So that's the cropping tool here in CorelDRAW X4.
| | 05:09 | The nice thing is of course that you
can crop both vector and bitmap images.
| | 05:13 | Another thing you can do is straighten images.
| | 05:17 | That's what we're going to do in the next lesson.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Straightening images| 00:00 | OK let's face it.
| | 00:01 | We can't all be professional photographers.
| | 00:04 | Sometimes when you take a picture, whether you're using a
regular camera, a digital camera, it may come out crooked.
| | 00:11 | Why? Well maybe you are holding the camera on an angle
and you didn't mean to, maybe you are on uneven ground.
| | 00:17 | Whatever the case maybe there is a new feature here
in CorelDRAW X4 that allows you to go into an image,
| | 00:22 | right from within CorelDRAW an straighten it.
| | 00:25 | You don't have to take the image into
some other image editing software.
| | 00:28 | You can do it here in CorelDRAW now.
| | 00:31 | That is what we're going to do in this
lesson, using the same file we were working
| | 00:34 | with in the previous lesson our menuPhotos
file and we're going to page 2.
| | 00:39 | So if you've been following along just click on page 2.
| | 00:41 | If you haven't been following along you've skipped to this
lesson and you have the exercise files, you can get caught up,
| | 00:46 | by going to the Lesson9 folder and opening up
menuPhotos2.cdr, and then of course click on the page 2 tab,
| | 00:54 | because you could see we have got an
image here that just doesn't look right.
| | 00:59 | The image itself, the rectangle, is straight, it's leveled, but
the image inside the plate of spaghetti and meatballs is not.
| | 01:07 | So we need to straighten this image.
| | 01:09 | Now you already have some cropping techniques under your belt.
| | 01:12 | Cropping is a part of straightening or rotating
an image, you will see in a minute here.
| | 01:17 | First thing I would like to do though is zoom into
that image, so we can get a good close up of it.
| | 01:21 | I'm going to click and drag with my Zoom tool here, sure
enough, yeah that is not level, just doesn't sit right.
| | 01:27 | So now I'm going to go up to my Pick tool
and I'm going to click on the image first.
| | 01:31 | This is the image I want to straighten, so it has to be selected.
| | 01:33 | Now I'm going to go up to the Bitmaps menu, and you
will notice this new one down here, Straighten Image.
| | 01:39 | When I click on Straighten Image it opens
up my lap, the Straighten Image lap.
| | 01:43 | Remember the Image Adjustment lap had some
buttons up here for rotating the image.
| | 01:48 | Now these are just 90 degree rotations,
and I don't really want to do that;
| | 01:52 | I want to be able to just straighten the contents of the image.
| | 01:55 | I have got my zoom options, so if I want to zoom in I can
click the Zoom in tool, click in the area I want to zoom into,
| | 02:01 | down at the bottom you can see that,
that is definitely not level.
| | 02:05 | I can go back to a full page view.
| | 02:07 | So it fits in the window, clicking this button, actual size by
clicking the 100% Ctrl and the number 1 will do that as well.
| | 02:15 | When you are zoomed in you've got the Hand tool as well,
when you click on that you can just move around the image.
| | 02:20 | I want to go down towards the bottom here.
| | 02:22 | You can see that this is definitely not leveled.
| | 02:24 | I really get that feel though by going
back to the fit in window option.
| | 02:29 | So now it's time to rotate this and we do have
some options over here on the right for rotating.
| | 02:34 | We can rotate an image to the left or to the right by using the
slider or by entering a value here for the degrees of rotation.
| | 02:43 | We can go as high as 15 and as low as minus 15.
| | 02:46 | I'm going to just play around with the slider I'm going to
click and drag it this way and you can see what is happening.
| | 02:52 | The entire image is rotating, but there are areas by
default that show up here in gray, kind of grayed out.
| | 03:00 | Those are the areas that will be automatically cropped because
the Crop image checkbox should be checked off by default.
| | 03:08 | If it's not, I'm going to deselect.
| | 03:10 | You can see what happens, the entire image is rotated, the
plate looks more leveled, but the image itself is crooked.
| | 03:17 | So cropping is a very important part of straitening.
| | 03:20 | I want that on.
| | 03:21 | Now the other option is to maintain
the original size of our image,
| | 03:25 | it fit perfectly on our menu, so I
do want to keep the original size.
| | 03:29 | and watch what happens when I click this checkbox.
| | 03:31 | See it almost feels like I zoomed in.
| | 03:33 | Well now my plate looks a little more leveled, I think I need
to go further to the left, and with those two checkboxes,
| | 03:39 | I see the end result right in front of me like a live
preview, and that looks good there at -3.0 degrees.
| | 03:46 | The Grid itself you can see the gray lines, colors
if you wanted to change them can be changed.
| | 03:52 | If you think it's easier to look at red
lines, go ahead and change the color.
| | 03:55 | You can also increase or decrease
the space between those squares.
| | 03:59 | See I have got more squares to really figure
out if things are lined up or I can decrease it.
| | 04:06 | I think that's a good option right there
and things looks quite level to me now.
| | 04:12 | I might go one more degree to the left.
| | 04:14 | Not too far I think it maybe 3.4 is good, prefect just like that.
| | 04:23 | Once you have got things looking the way you want
all you have to do now is click the OK button,
| | 04:28 | and if you want to start over there is a Reset button,
but I like what I see, so I'm going to click OK.
| | 04:34 | It takes a second, it's going to redraw itself.
| | 04:37 | There we go; nice and straight.
| | 04:39 | I can deselect by clicking off the page, zoom back out
Shift+F4 on the keyboard, zooms me out to see the end result.
| | 04:46 | Same size, same original size for my image, but inside I
have got a nice level plate of spaghetti and meatballs.
| | 04:52 | That is the Straighten Image lap, brand new in CorelDRAW X4.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Converting vector objects to bitmap| 00:00 | If you were following along with me in the very first lesson in
this chapter we were applying special effects to bitmap images
| | 00:07 | and there were tons of effects to chose from.
| | 00:09 | Well, what if you have got a vector image and you'd like
to use some of those bitmap effects on your vector image.
| | 00:15 | Sorry, but you can't unless you take that
vector image and convert it to a bitmap.
| | 00:21 | That's what we're going to do in this lesson.
| | 00:24 | We'll take a vector image, convert it to a
bitmap, and then try some of those bitmap effects.
| | 00:28 | So we're still working with the same file we've been using
in the last couple of lessons our menuPhotos file here.
| | 00:33 | If you were following along with me in the previous
lesson you are on page 2 of our menu, we're ready to go.
| | 00:39 | If you skip to this lesson and you have got the exercise files,
you need to get caught up, you can go to the Lesson9 folder,
| | 00:45 | open up menuPhotos3.cdr go to page 2 and
you will have exactly what I have here.
| | 00:52 | So we're going to manipulate this vector
image in behind the word menu here our sphere.
| | 00:57 | So that's a neat effect there, it's almost three dimensional,
but if I wanted to apply one of those bitmap effects
| | 01:02 | to this I couldn't, that is unless I convert it.
| | 01:05 | So let's zoom into it first of all.
| | 01:07 | I'm going to click my Zoom tool, you can press F2.
| | 01:10 | We'll zoom into this menu text with the sphere and behind it.
| | 01:14 | Let's go to our Pick tool and make
sure we click on the sphere itself.
| | 01:19 | Now with that selected if I go up to my Bitmaps menu and
I go down to all of these effects you see at the bottom,
| | 01:24 | notice that as I hover over them,
none of them are available to me.
| | 01:28 | So what we need to do is go to the top of this menu
first and convert the vector image to a bitmap.
| | 01:34 | When we click this we see the dialog
box for converting to bitmap.
| | 01:38 | So one of the things we'll need to select is the
resolution, and the resolution is measured in dots per inch.
| | 01:44 | Now your selection will all depend on the output.
| | 01:47 | In other words, if you're going to be posting
this to the web, you will choose a low resolution,
| | 01:52 | and if you're going to be printing it out professionally, you
will choose a high resolution for the best quality possible.
| | 01:58 | What is kind of cool is CorelDRAW keeps track of the
file size, that is just the image that is selected.
| | 02:04 | Currently you can see with my selections I'm at 486 kilobytes,
but I have got a 150 DPI selected using an RGB color mode.
| | 02:13 | You may see some other options here, but let's go though them.
| | 02:16 | I'm going to click the dropdown for resolution.
| | 02:18 | I can go as high as 300 if I was printing
professionally and I might go all the way down to 72
| | 02:24 | if I was just going to simply be posting this on the web.
| | 02:27 | Let's go to the very highest and watch our file size change.
| | 02:30 | You see my went up to 1.9 Megabytes.
| | 02:33 | That is almost two megabytes just for the sphere itself.
| | 02:36 | If I go down to about 200 that saves me some space,
you can see I'm down under a megabyte now at 862.
| | 02:44 | Alright let's chose a color mode, we have got different
color modes, Black and White is 1-Bit, 16 Colors is 4-Bit.
| | 02:51 | As we go down the list, the higher our file size.
| | 02:53 | Let's go down to CMYK color 32-Bit
you can see now I'm over a megabyte,
| | 02:59 | if I change this back to RGB 24-Bit you
can see I'm back down under a megabyte.
| | 03:05 | Alright under Options we've also got
the ability to affect our file size,
| | 03:09 | by whether or not we use antiaaliasing
and a transparent background.
| | 03:13 | Now you may recall when we talked about the
differences between vector and bitmap graphics.
| | 03:18 | Bitmap graphics are rectangular in shape because
they are made up of pixels, little squares.
| | 03:23 | So as I look at my selected object here it looks round,
| | 03:26 | but actually if you look at the handles they do
go around the outside in a rectangular shape.
| | 03:32 | So the space here in the corners of my sphere
will actually be included in the bitmap.
| | 03:37 | The question is do I want to see white here or do I want to be
able to see through this area like I do right now with my vector.
| | 03:45 | So transparent background should be selected for this
particular vector graphic because it is not a rectangle.
| | 03:51 | I want to keep these invisible areas invisible.
| | 03:53 | Antialiasing is going to keep my edges as smooth as possible.
| | 03:58 | Now if I turn this off by deslecting the checkbox,
it's going to affect my file size a little bit,
| | 04:03 | but I'm going to see jagged edges around the outside.
| | 04:06 | I want to keep that as smooth as possible, so I'm
going to keep it selected and all I have to do now
| | 04:10 | if I have got everything selected the way I want, I click
OK to convert this vector into a bitmap, and there we go.
| | 04:17 | Now on your screens you will probably notice that it is
a little bit more jagged around the edges and the quality
| | 04:23 | of the image probably went down a little bit.
| | 04:26 | That's the disadvantage to converting to a bitmap.
| | 04:29 | But the advantages are we can go up to our
Bitmaps menu now with our sphere still selected,
| | 04:34 | go down to our effects and start applying these effects.
| | 04:37 | Notice they are available to us now.
| | 04:39 | So, for example, if I wanted to I might go down to Art
Strokes here, go over to the right and Impressionist.
| | 04:47 | For this particular menu this might come
in handy here and look just the way I want.
| | 04:51 | So we've seen some of these effects earlier.
| | 04:54 | Clicking Preview allows us to see the default settings
applied to our bitmap and you can see the effect.
| | 04:58 | I'm going to switch to Dabs though,
and I'm going to bring the dab size up.
| | 05:04 | The Coloration; I'm going to bring that up as
well to about 32 and I can adjust the brightness.
| | 05:09 | Now I don't see any preview here, but clicking the
Preview button will show me what I have selected so far.
| | 05:15 | Clicking the lock allows me to make changes and
see instant previews with preview locked in.
| | 05:20 | So I'm going to adjust the brightness down a little bit here.
| | 05:23 | Maybe down a little bit further.
| | 05:25 | I'm going to go down to 25.
| | 05:26 | That's coo.
| | 05:28 | Coloration; I'm going to try a higher value up around 50.
| | 05:31 | I like that and the dab size I'm going to
make it even bigger, I'm going to go up to 15.
| | 05:37 | That looks perfect.
| | 05:38 | All I have to do now is click OK to lock in that change,
deselect, Shift+F4 zooms me out to see the end result
| | 05:47 | and that's totally different than what it looked like
before I converted it to a bitmap and applied the effect.
| | 05:53 | So there is the area of advantages to
converting vector graphics into bitmap images;
| | 05:58 | you have got all those effects you can now apply.
| | 06:00 | Of course the disadvantage; you will see a change in
quality, vector graphics are smoother, they are sharper
| | 06:08 | and that's because they are made up of lines and curves
| | 06:10 | and mathematical calculations that
will always keep those lines smooth.
| | 06:15 | Whereas a bitmap image is made up of pixels so you
will see pixelation, especially when you zoom in,
| | 06:20 | but by converting to a bitmap we can apply those effects.
| | 06:24 | So experiment with other vector graphics
converting them to bitmaps
| | 06:27 | and then experiment even more with the effects you can apply.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
10. Shaping ObjectsUsing the shaping tools| 00:01 | In this lesson we're going to have some fun exploring the
shaping tools you have here in CorelDRAW X4 that allow you
| | 00:06 | to take multiple objects and create new shapes out of them.
| | 00:10 | You can see here in the file that I've opened already named
Shapingtools1.cdr which by the way is in the Lesson10 folder,
| | 00:17 | if you have got the exercise files and you are following along.
| | 00:20 | We have got six tools to look at here.
| | 00:22 | The WELD tool, TRIM, INTERSECT, SIMPLIFY
FRONT-BACK and BACK-FRONT.
| | 00:29 | So here we have got a series of shapes that have been
combined to create what could be considered art work,
| | 00:36 | and what we're going to do is use these tools
to create some new art work out of what you see.
| | 00:40 | We are going to start right here with the Weld tool.
| | 00:43 | So the first thing I would like to do is zoom into that area.
| | 00:46 | I'm going to click my Zoom tool, F2 on the keyboard also
allows you to do this, click and drag around the WELD area
| | 00:52 | and this is the area that we want to focus in
on; our stop sign with the arrow through it.
| | 00:56 | So I'm going to click on my Pick tool
and the first thing we need to do
| | 00:59 | to access our shaping tools is to
select the objects that we want to use.
| | 01:05 | So in this case with the WELD tool, it sounds like
we're going to be bringing couple of objects together.
| | 01:10 | The order that you select your tools is extremely important.
| | 01:14 | Welding is going to take these two objects and create one object
out of them and if I select the stop sign first which is red,
| | 01:22 | then hold down shift key and click on the arrow
the second item chosen was build with white.
| | 01:28 | That means when I go up to my Property Bar and click
on this very first button of all of my shaping tools
| | 01:34 | that appear here, the Weld tool watch what happens.
| | 01:38 | They all get welded together into one shape
and the fill color by default is set to white
| | 01:44 | and that's because I selected the arrow last.
| | 01:46 | Let's undo that by clicking the undo
button or Ctrl+Z on your keyboard.
| | 01:50 | We'll deselect by clicking off the page.
| | 01:53 | This time we'll click on the arrow first, hold
down the Shift key and click on the stop sign.
| | 01:58 | Now when we go to weld these two together, you guessed it,
they will be welded together just like they were a moment ago,
| | 02:04 | but this time they are filled by default with
the red fill, the second object selected.
| | 02:09 | So now I have got a brand new object.
| | 02:11 | This is ideal for people if you are
into sign making or engraving.
| | 02:14 | You have really just created an outline of all of your shapes.
| | 02:17 | So if you have multiple shapes together
and you weld them together you end
| | 02:20 | up with this nice outline, great for key cutting and so on.
| | 02:23 | Alright let's zoom back out Shift+F4 and let's go
on to the Trim tool, back to F2 on the keyboard
| | 02:30 | or click your Zoom tool, let's zoom into the trim area here.
| | 02:35 | Trim is kind of the opposite of welding.
| | 02:37 | In this case we're going to use our Pick tool to select what
we want to trim and what will be trimmed from what we select.
| | 02:45 | So, for example, if I click on my arrow and hold
down my Shift key and click on the stop sign second,
| | 02:51 | I will be trimming this arrow from my stop sign.
| | 02:55 | Watch this we go up to the second button
here in our shaping tools, give it a click
| | 02:59 | and what's happened here is I have
actually cut out a piece of the stop sign.
| | 03:04 | So I can show you that by deselecting, I'm just clicking an
empty space, click on my arrow here and move it out of the way.
| | 03:12 | You can see there is a big hole in my stop sign
now in the shape of the arrow so I delete the arrow
| | 03:17 | and I have just created a brand new shape
here using the Trim feature, very cool stuff.
| | 03:23 | F4 will zoom us back out and I'm going into
my Zoom tool and zoom into the INTERSECT area.
| | 03:33 | Now intersecting as the name may imply is where we're going
to focus in on where our objects intersect one another.
| | 03:42 | You can see there is an area right here and
over here where they intersect one another.
| | 03:48 | There are areas where they do not intersect each other.
| | 03:51 | So when I go to my Pick tool, click on the stop
sign Shift+click on my arrow to select them both.
| | 03:58 | Let's go up to our Intersect button here, the
third one of our shaping tools, give it a click,
| | 04:04 | and now what we have got - you can
see some lines going through here.
| | 04:07 | I will go off the image to deselect, go to my arrow now and
just move that out of the way, and look what I'm left with here.
| | 04:15 | It's kind of an intersected version, a brand new
object is created based on those intersecting points.
| | 04:22 | So, if I just fill this up with blue, for example, our
sign, you would see what that looks like, brand new shape.
| | 04:28 | The other shapes remain in behind, but I have got this new one.
| | 04:30 | I'm going to hit Delete to remove it and
Shift+F4 this time so I can see the whole page.
| | 04:36 | Time to talk about Simplify.
| | 04:38 | Okay let's go to our Zoom tool in and zoom into this area.
| | 04:42 | Here where we have got multiple objects
stack on top of each other.
| | 04:46 | What we have got here are for example a couple
of circles and if I move this top circle
| | 04:52 | out of the way you can see there is full green circle underneath.
| | 04:55 | Underneath that I have got my arrow, which
actually extends past the border of my circle
| | 05:01 | and beneath that I have got a full stop sign.
| | 05:04 | Well really I have got areas that
you can't even see that I don't need
| | 05:08 | and because I have got them the file size
is actually bigger than it needs to be.
| | 05:13 | So I'm going to undo that move and I'm going to
select all of these objects by multi selecting.
| | 05:20 | I'm going to click and drag all of those objects except for my
background there and I'm going to go up to the Simplify button.
| | 05:26 | So the Simplify button is the fourth one and when
I click on it nothing really seems to have changed.
| | 05:32 | But let's deselect everything and then go to
that circle and just move it out of the way.
| | 05:38 | You can see in behind I can see right through to my background
and I have got a new shape here which looks like green ring.
| | 05:44 | I move that out of the way you can
see right through to the background.
| | 05:48 | My arrow is no longer a full arrow it is a piece, and look at
my stop sign in the background, it's a brand new shape as well.
| | 05:55 | So all I'm seeing is what I need to see; the
stuff in the background doesn't need to exist
| | 06:00 | and increase the file size for no reason at all.
| | 06:03 | The Simplify button is always going to bring down
file sizes when you are creating objects like this.
| | 06:09 | So Shift+F4 will take us out and it is time
to talk about FRONT-BACK and BACK-FRONT.
| | 06:14 | So I have got identical images down here.
| | 06:17 | I'm going to zoom in to my FRONT-BACK option.
| | 06:21 | Back to my Pick tool and I'm going to click on my arrow.
| | 06:26 | I'm also going to hold down shift and
click on the stop sign in the background
| | 06:30 | and let's start with the first of the two Front Minus Back.
| | 06:35 | When I click on the front object minus
the back, you can see what I'm left with.
| | 06:41 | This area at the top and at the bottom of my arrow,
| | 06:44 | but what was in behind the stop sign has just
removed that portion from my front object.
| | 06:51 | So if I move over now I'm just going to scroll over here to
my BACK-FRONT area and deselect anything that is selected,
| | 06:59 | click on my stop sign hold down shift, click on my arrow.
| | 07:03 | This time I'm going to go up to the last that we're
going to look at in this lesson Back Minus Front,
| | 07:09 | when I click on that, you can see what I'm left with.
| | 07:12 | The back stuff which is the stop sign minus anything that was on
top of it and there is a little V bit down here that you can see
| | 07:19 | that was visible between the crease in the arrow at the bottom.
| | 07:23 | So just a few handy tools to help you get a little bit creative,
creating your own shapes and of course if file size is a concern,
| | 07:31 | we have got some options here in our shaping
tools that will bring down the overall file size.
| | 07:36 | Shift+F4 zooms us out to see the end results
of our experimentation with the shaping tools.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| PowerClipping objects inside one another| 00:00 | In this lesson we're going to explore one of my all time favorite
features of CorelDRAW, it's called PowerClipping and it's
| | 00:07 | the ability to take one object and place it inside another.
Now the object that you are placing could be something
| | 00:14 | you've drawn in CorelDRAW, could be a bitmap
image. The container that you are placing,
| | 00:19 | the image or the object into could also be another object you've
drawn, it could be text and you can see I've got a file opened here
| | 00:27 | already called PowerClip1.cdr
| | 00:30 | and if you are following along and have the Exercise
Files, you can get this in your Lesson10 folder.
| | 00:35 | This has some text and you can see the words ONION is conveniently
hollow. So we've got an outline but the fill appears to be white,
| | 00:43 | and it might be nice to fill this up with something else
by PowerClipping it inside here. It could be this image or
| | 00:50 | it could be something we create.
| | 00:51 | So let's try both scenarios. We also have a rectangle down here, it's
hollow. I'm going to click on it and I'm going to create a texture of fill
| | 00:58 | from this. So let's go to our Fill button in the Toolbox,
| | 01:02 | we 'll go over and down to Texture Fill. Now I've already
got it selected here. It's in the Samples category
| | 01:08 | under the Texture library and alphabetically it's near the
bottom here, it's called vegetation. I'll hit the Preview button
| | 01:15 | a few times till I get the exact look I am after.
| | 01:18 | That's good, right there,
| | 01:19 | and all I have to do now is click OK to
fill up my rectangle with that texture.
| | 01:24 | Now it's time to get this texture inside the word ONION and
we're going to powerclip our object that we already have here now
| | 01:30 | created inside the word ONION. Watch what happens. There are two
different ways to do this. One way is with the object selected
| | 01:37 | go up to the Effects menu
| | 01:39 | and you will notice PowerClip down here.
| | 01:41 | As I move over to the right there is only one option and
that is to place inside a container. So when I click on this,
| | 01:47 | my mouse pointer is now this thick black arrow, waiting for me
to click on the container, in this case it's the word ONION.
| | 01:54 | So I'm going to go any one of these characters and make sure
the point of my arrow is inside the character before I click once
| | 02:01 | and look at that. The object is powerclipped inside the word
onion and it's automatically centered. That's an option that you can
| | 02:09 | chose to change. I will show you how in a moment.
| | 02:11 | Alright let's click Undo
| | 02:13 | and take that out, and maybe we'd rather put this
bitmap image of the green onions inside the word ONION.
| | 02:19 | Here's the other way you can do it. Instead of clicking
and then going up to the Effects menu right click and drag
| | 02:27 | the object up into the word onion
| | 02:29 | and when you see your mouse pointer turn into a character
| | 02:33 | with the A and the arrow let go,
| | 02:36 | you've got some options now. We've seen this earlier when we were copying
properties, but now we're going to go down here to PowerClip Inside.
| | 02:44 | Give it a click,
| | 02:46 | our green onions are inside and remember the default is
that image is centered in behind the word onion and all I'm
| | 02:53 | seeing is those part of the image that go through the letters.
| | 02:57 | OK, so what if I wanted to move that around? Maybe I am
seeing too much of the white onion I want to see more green.
| | 03:02 | Well in that case we have some new options now. I am going
to click on my rectangle here and delete with the Delete key
| | 03:09 | a little distracting. Now I want to manipulate that image
a little bit. Well to do that, we click on the word ONION,
| | 03:16 | we go up to Effects and down to PowerClip, now we have got some
other options. One is to extract the contents. I would take them
| | 03:23 | back out so we could powerclip them again. That is not really
what I want to do. I want to edit the contents. Clicking Edit
| | 03:30 | Contents takes me to another view where
I can see an outline of the word ONION
| | 03:35 | and I can see the image in the background.
| | 03:38 | So all I have to do now is just lick and drag the image to the
location where I want. If I drag it down a little bit, I'm going to
| | 03:43 | get more of the green showing through the outline and less
of the white onions, and if that looks good- and of course I
| | 03:51 | could size this as well if I want to stretch it out a little bit, so I
can show certain portions. There we go, that might be good right there.
| | 03:57 | When I am happy,
| | 03:59 | I've got some options, I can right click or I can go down to Finish
Editing Object right here in the bottom left corner of the screen.
| | 04:06 | Clicking on that finishes the edit
| | 04:09 | and now I return back to my page where I see the changes
have taken place. Alright, so one last thing to look at in and
| | 04:16 | that is the default where the object you powerclip inside is
automatically centered. If you want to have more control
| | 04:22 | right from the get go, go up to you Tools menu,
| | 04:26 | down to Options right here at the top,
| | 04:28 | and over here under Workspace we'll go down to Edit
| | 04:32 | and you can see there is a checkmark here for Auto-center new
PowerClip contents. So if you don't like that just deselect it,
| | 04:39 | click OK and the next time you PowerClip you'll have full
control over where you place that PowerClip. So again,
| | 04:45 | my all time favorite PowerClipping. You can really create some
cool and unusual effects using PowerClipping, and remember
| | 04:53 | you are not restricted to PowerClipping inside text like we
did, you can powerclip images into objects and vice versa.
| | 05:00 | So have fun experimenting with the PowerClip option.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding envelopes| 00:01 | In these last two lessons of this chapter,
we're going to look at two different tools
| | 00:05 | that allow us to manipulate the shape of our object.
| | 00:08 | In this lesson, we'll look at an interactive tool known as the
Envelope tool, and then in the next lesson we'll open up a Docker
| | 00:15 | that allows us to manipulate the corners of an object.
| | 00:18 | In both cases, though we're going to use the same file that
I have already opened up here, it's called Envelopes1.cdr,
| | 00:25 | so if you've got these exercise files
and you want to follow along,
| | 00:28 | go to your Lesson10 folder to find this one, it's a two-pager.
| | 00:32 | You can see down below, I'm on Page 1, where
I see my Green Onion logo and some clip art.
| | 00:37 | We are going to work with our logo here first
using the Envelope tool to manipulate its shape,
| | 00:42 | and this is very similar to using the
Shape tool as you will soon find out.
| | 00:46 | Let's click on our object which is actually a group of objects,
but it will be treated as one, because they are grouped,
| | 00:51 | and now let's go over to our Toolbox
here, we've got some interactive tools,
| | 00:55 | and this fifth button from the bottom is a flyout.
| | 00:58 | So when I click-and-hold my Mouse button down, I'll see the Blend
tool, Contour, Distort, Drop Shadow, there it is, right there,
| | 01:04 | the Envelope tool, and notice that on the flyout there and
a little pop-up tip, it is an interactive envelope tool.
| | 01:12 | That means we can manipulate on the fly.
| | 01:14 | So let's click the Envelope tool.
| | 01:16 | My handles have disappeared around the outside of my
object, but I do see these little nodes in each corner,
| | 01:22 | and at the mid-points of each line around the outside.
| | 01:26 | So the envelope in this case is rectangular in
nature and it's snug up against the edge of my logo.
| | 01:32 | So if I want to make some changes, I
just start clicking-and-dragging nodes.
| | 01:36 | Let's see what the defaults have to offer just by going
to this top node, I'm going to click-and-drag straight up.
| | 01:41 | I can go side-to-side as well, but I want to try
and go straight up as possible, and when I let go,
| | 01:47 | you can see how the entire object has been
reshaped, every thing's been kind of pushed
| | 01:53 | up to the top and stretched to fill in those gaps.
| | 01:56 | Let's go over to the right side and
click-and-drag that mid-handle in a little bit.
| | 02:01 | Same thing on the left, ever so slightly,
every thing gets squished in the middle.
| | 02:05 | So that's using the defaults and if we look at our Property
Bar when using the Envelope tool there are a ton of options.
| | 02:12 | We've got Presets, we can add/ remove
nodes, just like we did with the Shape tool.
| | 02:17 | We've got some options for the curves, cusps
and keeping symmetrical curves and arcs.
| | 02:23 | You can see we've got Convert to Curves
right from here if we had to do that.
| | 02:26 | So if you had some kind of bitmap object, for example,
| | 02:30 | you wanted to use the Envelope tool on,
you can convert the curves right from here.
| | 02:34 | And then we've got some options for the Envelope function,
and we're going to use these very shortly, but right now,
| | 02:39 | the one that's selected by default
here is the Unconstrained Mode.
| | 02:43 | That's why we're able to drag up, left, right,
| | 02:46 | all around and totally manipulate this shape
to customize it to be exactly what we want.
| | 02:52 | Now I'll set some options over here on the right-hand side.
| | 02:54 | we're going to look at this guy here to
create an envelope from another shape,
| | 02:58 | but this last one allows us to clear the envelope and start over.
| | 03:01 | So I'm going to click on that.
| | 03:03 | Even turns Off my Envelope tool, so I got to go back to my
Toolbox to click it, and let's start with those Presets.
| | 03:10 | When I click the Presets dropdown, you can see they are just
labeled envelope one through six, those are the defaults
| | 03:15 | and as I hover over them, you can see
circular, square, there is a parallelogram,
| | 03:21 | we've got kind of squished in at the top and the bottom.
| | 03:23 | There is a banner that's kind of
curved down and there is one curved up.
| | 03:28 | So if you wanted to apply any of these, you just click on it,
like envelope5 for example and you can see the end result.
| | 03:35 | If you don't like it, you can click Undo or just
simply remove that envelope altogether to start over.
| | 03:42 | I'm going to click Undo.
| | 03:44 | Now there are six Presets but notice the
plus sign here and the minus sign (-),
| | 03:48 | this means we can add our own Presets, interesting.
| | 03:51 | So let's go back to what we did earlier.
| | 03:53 | We'll click-and-drag the top up.
| | 03:55 | Drag our sides in, just ever so slightly,
let's make it subtle, in the left in the right.
| | 04:01 | Let's say that is a preset, we want
to be able to all kinds of logos.
| | 04:06 | Well, all we have to do is click the plus sign to save it.
| | 04:08 | I'm going to click the plus sign.
| | 04:11 | Now I go to my Envelope folder by default and
all I have to do is type in a name for this.
| | 04:16 | I'm going to call this Logos1, and click the Save button.
| | 04:22 | Now I've got a new preset in there.
| | 04:23 | So if I have to remove this, I'm going to clear the Envelope.
| | 04:27 | Go back to my Envelope tool and I wanted to
apply that same effect, that same Envelope.
| | 04:32 | I go up to my Presets now, check it out, there is one called
Logos1 and when I click on it, it's instantly applied,
| | 04:39 | I didn't have to go clicking-and-dragging nodes.
| | 04:41 | Of course, I can manipulate this further, the nodes
are still there if I wanted to, but before we do that,
| | 04:47 | let's just undo the Envelope and check
out some of the other modes over here.
| | 04:52 | First one is Straight Line Mode, so when I click
on this, you are going to see a different effect.
| | 04:57 | When I go to the right-hand side, for example,
when I click-and-drag out, I can't go up and down,
| | 05:02 | the node can only go left to right, so it's constrained
and you can see the lines are actually quite straight.
| | 05:08 | It doesn't mean the end result will be perfectly straight lines,
| | 05:11 | but the actual clicking-and-dragging shows me
straight lines, when I let go, you can see the effect.
| | 05:16 | Let's undo that and look at another
option which is a Single Arc Mode.
| | 05:22 | When I click on this, I'm still constrained
in that, when I click-and-drag my border here,
| | 05:27 | the node, I can't go up and down, just left to right.
| | 05:30 | So I'm kind of creating the letter D
for example using the Single Arc Mode,
| | 05:35 | and of course my entire logo stretches to fill in this space.
| | 05:39 | I'm going to undo that and let's try out our Double Arc Mode.
| | 05:44 | This is kind of like what we saw with unconstrained,
but when we click-and-drag, we get that double arc
| | 05:49 | but we just can't go up and down, so it is somewhat constrained.
| | 05:52 | Let's come out here and that looks totally different.
| | 05:56 | I'm going to undo that.
| | 05:58 | It takes us back to unconstrained, now of
course when I click-and-drag out it looks
| | 06:03 | like Double Arc, except I can move up and down as well.
| | 06:07 | You'll also notice that when I let go, I've got these
little arrows, so I can change the direction of the curve
| | 06:12 | if I wanted to just by clicking-and-dragging.
| | 06:16 | Stretch it, rotate it until I get the shape I'm after.
| | 06:20 | You can see that's a little bit more bottom heavy when I do that.
| | 06:24 | So lots of options with our Envelope tool.
| | 06:27 | I'm going to remove that and I'm going to deselect
my selected object and I'm going to draw a shape.
| | 06:34 | I'm going to go up here to my Rectangle tool, I'll make sure
I'm selecting the Three Point Rectangle, here is a cool effect.
| | 06:41 | All I have to do is draw my shape
by clicking-and-dragging across.
| | 06:44 | Now I'm going to drag down, you can
see that would be a perfect rectangle.
| | 06:48 | Well, I've already got that with my logo so if I wanted to
manipulate this and borrow from the shape, I can do that,
| | 06:54 | I'm going to hit Escape, I'm going to start over, and this
time I'm going to click-and-drag on an angle, and now,
| | 07:01 | when I come down this way and click, I've
got a rectangle that's a kind of tilt.
| | 07:06 | Now if I'd like to apply this to my logo, I can
borrow that and create an envelope out of my shape.
| | 07:14 | So I'm going to back up to my Pick tool, I'm going to
click on the object that I actually want to manipulate,
| | 07:20 | my logo and I'm going go over to the Envelope
tool and instead of clicking-and-dragging nodes,
| | 07:25 | I'm going to borrow an envelope from an existing shape.
| | 07:29 | That's the Eyedropper tool you see up here.
| | 07:31 | Create Envelope From, I give it a click and come over to my
shape, I click on it and you can see the outline now of what&# |
|
|
